An informative speech is one that one that intends to educate the audience on a particular topic.
Learning Objective
Define an informative speech
Key Points
This type of speech uses descriptions, demonstrations, vivid detail, and definitions to explain a subject, person, or place the audience wants to understand.
An informative speech makes a complex topic easy to understand or offers a different point of view.
Unlike persuasive speeches, an informative speech relies less on pathos and more on communicating information.
Key Terms
definition
A statement expressing the essential nature of something; formulation.
informative
Providing knowledge, especially useful or interesting information.
An informative speech is one that intends to educate the audience on a particular topic. There are many different types of informative speeches, including speeches that describe the conditions of a subject and speeches that instruct the audience on how to perform an action.
Purpose of the Speech
An informative speech is one that aims to inform the audience about a given topic.
Erik Möller speaking about a visual redesign of WikiProject main pages in his presentation on ‘The purpose-driven social network: Supporting WikiProjects with technology’ at Wikimania 2012.
The main goal of an informative speech is to provide enlightenment regarding a specific topic the audience knows nothing about. It may demonstrate how to use a new type of software, explain a new concept in the field of science, describe an expedition an archaeologist took, or provide details about a person of interest that the audience wants to learn more about.
The topics covered in an informative speech should help the audience to understand a subject better and to remember what they learned later. The goal of this type of speech isn’t to sway the audience to the speaker’s point of view. Instead, the details need to be laid before the audience so that they can make an educated decision or learn about a subject they are interested in.
Transferring Information
In an informative speech, how the information is presented will determine how the audience receives it.
The outlines of two people. One person is passing a stack of shapes to the other person.
However, it is important for the speaker to think about how this information will be presented. An informative speech should rely less on pathos, which is an appeal to the emotions of the audience and an important component of persuasive speeches. Instead, an informative speech might rely on visual aids, for example, in order to give the audience a visual representation of important information contained in the speech. Providing the information in multiple forms during the speech increases the likelihood that the audience will retain the information included in the speech.
13.1.2: Types of Informative Speeches
The four types of informative speeches are definition, explanatory, descriptive, and demonstrative.
Learning Objective
List the four types of informative speeches and describe their use
Key Points
A descriptive speech helps the speaker create an accurate mental picture in the mind of the audience regarding a specific person, place, or thing.
A demonstrative speech describes how to perform an action.
An explanatory speech explains the state of a topic.
A definition speech explains a concept or theory regarding a topic.
Key Terms
description
A sketch or account of anything in words; a portraiture or representation in language; an enumeration of the essential qualities of a thing or species.
definition
A statement expressing the essential nature of something; formulation.
An informative speech is one that informs the audience. However, as should be clear, this general definition demonstrates that there are many ways to inform an audience. Therefore, there are several types of informative speeches. The main types of informative speeches include definition, descriptive, explanatory, and demonstrative.
A definition speech explains the meaning, theory, or philosophy of a specific topic that the audience likely does not know much about. The topics may be general, such as a sport, or highly specific, like a particular person. The main goal of this speech is to educate the audience so that they understand the main points regarding this subject.
A demonstration speech explains how to do something. If you have ever sat through a lecture where a teacher explained how to create a bibliography, then you have heard a demonstration speech. Like most informative speeches, a how-to speech will likely use visual examples that show the audience how to move from step to step through a particular activity. Visualizations help the audience retain what each step looks like, increasing the likelihood that they will retain the overall information of the speech.
Demonstrative Speech
A demonstrative speech creates a mental image in audience members’ minds.
Temple of Concordia
An explanatory speech might give a description of the state of a given topic. As an example, consider the types of speeches that are given at industry conferences. The goal of these speeches is for the speaker to inform the audience on a particular part of an industry. Commonly, these will also utilize visualizations that give the audience a visual representation of the particular data or statistics contained in the speech. This is one way to condense highly complex information into an easily retainable package for the audience.
A descriptive speech creates a vivid picture in a person’s mind regarding an object, person, animal, or place. An archaeologist who has discovered a new temple in South America or a paleontologist who believes they have found a new dinosaur may use a descriptive speech to inform an interested audience about their recent discoveries .
As all of these types make clear, there are many ways that a given set of information can be communicated in a speech. When deciding what type of informative speech you want to write and deliver, consider what you want the audience to know about your topic.
13.1.3: Subjects of Informative Speeches
Informative speeches can cover many subjects as long as they can be discussed without persuading or altering the perceptions of the audience.
Learning Objective
Name some examples of subjects of an informative speech
Key Points
When choosing a subject of an informative speech consider whether you want to describe, explain, demonstrate or educate the audience about the topic.
The subject of an informative speech should be one that can be communicated clearly to an audience.
When choosing a subject for an informative speech, consider what is the essential information that an audience should know about that subject.
Key Term
subject
A particular area of study.
There are many different subjects that can be used in informative speeches. College lectures about an event in history or a historical figure would be considered informative speeches
Lecture
A lecture is one type of informative speech. It’s usually about an important event or figure in history.
An introduction slide for a lecture that says “Short lecture on Hans Frei.”
Other examples of subjects for an informative speech include an actor or actress, the field of advertising, a classic film the history of Dracula, social networking websites, and what causes volcanoes.
Each of these examples lends itself to multiple types of information. For example, an informative speech about a particular actor or actress would likely focus on providing a description of who the person is and what movies or plays they have been in. Incorporating famous pictures or clips from works is a way of increasing the audience’s retention of the information about the particular person.
An informative speech about the causes of a volcano could be considered a how-it-happens speech, which could be similar to a how-to speech. A speech about volcanoes might include a model volcano, describing how the model’s functioning is similar to processes in the real world.
More technical subjects, such as the field of advertising, require more technical information and specific data relevant to the industry. Technical subjects especially, but really all informative speeches, benefit from the use of visualizations, such as bar graphs or images. The choice of visual aids depends on what information the speaker wants to inform the audience of. For example, a speech that intends to explore the financial trends of political advertising over ten years would benefit from a bar graph. However, a speech that is informing the audience on how political advertisements have functionally changed over time would benefit from actual examples of ad campaigns.
In order to differentiate an informative speech from other types of speeches, it is important to stick to the basic facts of the subject. No personal biases, unsubstantiated information, or popular opinion should be included when stating the main ideas of the topic. The goal is to educate the audience on the facts, not to provide the speaker’s opinion. When crafting an informative speech look at the subject carefully and eliminate any potential statements that have prejudice or might persuade the audience.
13.2: Effective Informative Speaking
13.2.1: The Goals of an Informative Speech
An effective informative speech should be driven by a series of goals.
Learning Objective
List the goals of an informative speech
Key Points
One of the goals of an informative speech is to enhance the understanding of the audience.
Another goal of an informative speech is to maintain the interest of the audience.
A final goal of an informative speech is for the audience to remember the speech.
Key Terms
goal
A result that one is attempting to achieve.
inform
To communicate knowledge to others.
An effective informative speech requires the speaker to aim for a series of goals. And similar to a soccer match, hitting these goals increases the likelihood of a successful speech. The main goals for an informative speech are to help explain a specific subject and to help the audience remember the knowledge later.
Setting Goals
You need to determine a series of goals in order to create a successful informative speech.
A poster at the United Nations Headquarters in New York City, New York, showing Millennium Development Goals.
One of the goals, perhaps the most essential goal that drives all informative speeches, is for the speaker to inform the audience about a particular topic. In order to aim for this specific goal, a speaker should consider how best to package the complex understanding that they have cultivated of the topic, from personal experience and research, into an easily communicable form for the audience.
A final, significant goal an effective informative speech is to make the audience remember. Most memorable speeches have emotional appeals that audiences continue to talk about long after the speech is delivered, and sometimes even after the life of the speaker. To make sure that the information contained in a speech is remembered by the audience, the deliverer of an informative speech should combine organization, repetition and focused visualizations to increase the effectiveness of the speech and the likelihood that the audience will leave informed.
One way to help an audience remember the details of an informative speech is to maintain the interest of the audience. The challenge of an informative speech is delivering information in a neutral way that does not bore the audience. Unlike persuasive speeches, which rely heavily on emotional appeal, informative speeches have to demonstrate why the audience should care about the information contained in the speech without compromising a neutral tone.
13.2.2: Scoping Your Speech
Make sure that only the most relevant information is including in the speech, so the scope of your speech does not become too wide.
Learning Objective
Explain how to effectively scope an informative speech
Key Points
Every piece of information in a speech should relate to the speech topic, purpose, and thesis simultaneously.
Audiences have a hard time following or understanding speeches that are too broad in scope (that is, speeches that include too much irrelevant or tangential information).
By keeping all of the information relevant as he or she develops your speech, the speaker’s job becomes easier by keeping all supporting information on point.
Key Term
scope
The extent of the area or subject matter that something deals with or to which it is relevant.
Some speeches contain such a wide range of information that the audience is left wondering what the speaker was trying to communicate. A speech with a scope that is too broad complicates the audience’s ability to retain information. Properly scoping your speech allows the speaker to narrow down what the speech will cover, thus increasing its ability to inform the audience.
Scope Out a Specific Target
Every piece of information in a speech should be relevant to the topic, purpose and thesis. If it’s only a tangent, it doesn’t belong in the speech.
Scope refers to the extent of the area or subject matter that something deals with or to which it is relevant. The key word here is relevance; the speech should not go in so many different directions that none of those directions relate to the original purpose and thesis of the speech.
One way to effectively scope a speech is to think of the question: “What information do I want my audience to know at the end of the speech? ” Use the answer to this question as a focal point for everything else to be included in your speech. Everything included then must be relevant to your purpose and thesis. Anything superfluous or extraneous is only going to broaden the scope and take the speech away from that ultimate goal.
The evidence and supporting arguments should not only be related tangentially; there should be direct lines of relevance to every piece of information included in your speech.
Scoping a speech is not only helpful for the audience, but is also to the benefit of the speaker. Keeping the speech on point and focused makes it easier for the speaker to build more credible, reinforced arguments. By narrowing the scope of the speech, the speaker improve the speech’s ability to effectively communicate essential information to the audience.
13.2.3: Tailor Complexity to Your Audience
An important component of effective informative speaking is knowing how to tailor the complexity of the speech to the audience.
Learning Objective
Apply knowledge of your audience when composing your speech
Key Points
Consider the audience that will be hearing your speech.
Tailoring the complexity of the speech to your audience means considering how best they receive information.
Considering how much information your audience already knows should help you tailor the complexity of your speech.
Key Term
complexity
The state of being complex; intricacy; entanglement.
Overview
The main goals for an informative speech are to help explain a specific subject and to help the audience remember the knowledge later. To achieve these goals, a speaker should consider how best to package the complex understanding that they have cultivated of the topic, from personal experience and research, into an easily communicable form for the audience.
Complexity
One way to deliver an effective informative speech and ensure that the audience leaves your speech informed is to tailor the complexity of the speech to the specific audience.
Consider the Audience
The speaker should tailor the complexity of the speech to the specific audience.
An audience listens to a speech.
Never presume that your audience has a lot of background knowledge on your subject, but also don’t assume they know nothing. The audience is an integral part of public speaking; not only will they hear your speech, but they should be an important component that informs the writing of the speech as well. Consider, for example, if you are preparing to deliver an informative speech on the topic of cloning to an audience of geneticists. Their professional training will have given them an extensive understanding of DNA. Because of this, you would want to tailor the complexity of the speech to match the knowledge that the audience already possesses, meaning that the speech could contain lots of technical terms with little explanation because the audience will already understand what those terms mean.
Conversely, consider delivering a speech on the same topic to an audience of college students. This audience, even if they have taken biology classes, will not possess the same expertise knowledge that professionals do. Therefore, you would want to tailor the complexity of your speech to the knowledge of the students, using fewer technical terms and more general explanations.
13.2.4: Demonstrate the Relevance of the Topic
Make the topic of your speech relevant to your audience by articulating why they should care about your chosen topic.
Learning Objective
Choose a topic that is relevant to your audience
Key Points
You can make a topic relevant by choosing a timely topic.
Another way to make a topic relevant is to tell the audience why they should care about the particular subject of your speech.
Making a topic relevant for your audience increases the likelihood that they will remember the information contained in your speech.
Key Term
relevant
Not out of date; current.
Overview
Informative Speaking is a speech meant to inform the audience. This speech can take on topics ranging from the newest, high-tech inventions from around the world that hope to cure cancer, to more light-hearted topics. The topic should be one that is timely and interesting.
In order to improve the likelihood that the audience will walk away informed by your speech, you should make your topic relevant. The topic of an informative speech should be one that is timely. This means that what was a good topic for a speech for Teddy Roosevelt is probably no longer going to be a good topic for a speech given now. A relevant topic is one that is appropriate for the contemporary period. This is because the information that an informative speech contains should be the most recent, whether this information is statistical data or just the state of the conversation around a particular topic.
Choose a Relevant Topic
Although Theodore Roosevelt was a great speaker, giving a speech about him today might not be relevant.
Another way to consider how to make the topic of a speech relevant is to consider the audience who will hear your speech. Ask yourself, “What topic would the audience find interesting or useful? ” If you feel committed to a particular topic, then begin thinking about how you can demonstrate why the topic is relevant to your audience. Doing this requires that you articulate why they should care about your chosen topic. But remember that an informative speech should try to communicate this in an unbiased way that does not rely heavily on emotional appeals.
13.2.5: Make Connections
Make connections among your ideas and with audience interests; use transitions, signposts, internal previews, and summaries when speaking.
Learning Objective
Explain how to make connections in your speech
Key Points
Make connections among your ideas so you can connect the ideas into meaningful groups for your main points.
Make connections between your interests and the audience interests to motivate attention during your speech.
Make connections with transitions to show relationships and join ideas together.
Make connections with signpost transitions to help the audience organize ideas by numbering the main points, such as first, second, etc.
Make connections by using previews before main points and use internal summaries to connect one idea to what is coming next.
Key Terms
connection
The point at which two or more things are connected; a feeling of understanding and ease of communication between two or more people.
signpost
A particular type of transition in the form of a brief statement that indicates where the speaker is in the speech, such as “first” and “finally,” or that calls attention to a key idea, such as “now remember this.”
transitions
Words or phrases that allow the reader to understand how adjacent parts of a communication are connected.
Make connections like the old time switchboard operator.
In order to make your informative speech effective, you can think of yourself as the old time switchboard operator and make connections!
Connecting Information
In your speech, you should make connections between pieces of information for your audience.
A switchboard staff making connections in 1979.
Connect ideas and content when preparing the speech. After researching and collecting information for your speech, you will need to connect the ideas and different pieces of information into an organized message. You will group similar ideas together and connect them to form the main points of your speech. In addition to making connections between ideas and pieces of information, one of the most important connections is that between the speech and the audience.
Connect the topic to audience interests. There are many ways to establish this fundamental connection. One of the ways is to explain why the topic of the speech is important. This might occur in the introduction of the speech where you lay out what your speech will say. In addition to laying out the trajectory of the speech, you would include an additional explanation of why the topic is relevant to the audience. Another way to make the connection between the speech and the audience is to express your own interest in the topic. Demonstrating your own excitement could help the audience connect with you and your ideas.
Connect the ideas in the speech with transitions. Transitions are certain words, expressions, or other devices that give text or speech greater cohesion by making it more explicit, or signaling how ideas are meant by the writer or speaker to relate to one another. Transitions can signal addition, example, contrast, comparison, concession, result, summary, time (often chronologically), and place. The following are examples of transitional words and phrases: last, first, second, next, but, on the other hand, moreover, in addition, furthermore, however, to begin with, otherwise, conclusively, lastly, secondly, thirdly, most importantly, in conclusion, to end with, first of all, last of all, to sum it up, last but not least, lastly, finally, for example, on top of all, ultimately, or nevertheless.
Connect the important ideas with signposts. Signposts are a particular type of transition in the form of a brief statement that indicates where the speaker is in the speech, such as first and finally. You use signpost transitions to help the audience organize ideas when you number the main points, such as first, second, etc. You will also use signposts transitions to help the audience remember ideas by telling them what is important by directing their attention to an idea or concept. For example, you might saynow get this, this is really important, or now remember this when you want to signpost the attention of the audience.
Connect ideas with internal previews and summaries. Often you will devote more time to connecting ideas than a simple word or phrase. You may provide a short introductory preview of what you are going to be talking about in order to prepare the audience for what will come next. Additionally, you may want to summarize what you have just said to connect one main point to the next before you start talking about your next point.
13.2.6: Tailor Abstraction to Your Audience
Tailor abstraction to the specific content and the audience level of understanding.
Learning Objective
Use concrete terminology and abstract terminology when it is appropriate for your audience
Key Points
The ability to simplify experiences with a word makes it easier to communicate, but it also makes us lose the connection to the specific meaning that we want to convey through the abstract wording.
When you want the audience to make a concrete connection to their direct experience, remember to come down to earth on the the abstraction ladder. You can move up the ladder again to talk about boarder concepts.
Your objective when choosing words is not to avoid abstract general words altogether, but rather to avoid using them when your audience needs more specific,concrete connections to what you are saying.
Key Term
abstraction
The act of comparing commonality between distinct objects and organizing using those similarities.
Abstraction and the Abstraction Ladder
Abstraction is the process of perceiving similarities from our direct, specific observations in the universe, organizing the similarities, and then assigning a word label for the more general concept. The ability to simplify experiences with a word makes it easier to communicate, but it also makes us lose the connection to the specific meaning that we want to convey through the abstract wording.
Abstraction, the Process
I see a number of different objects and I see something similar about all of them, let’s say the color. I take this one characteristic, the color, and give it a label, for example, red. Here I have a direct observable experience with the objects and I see the color in them. I abstract the color and give it the label red. For you my label red is not connected with the objects I saw, but you may see similar objects and learn to assign the same label, red, to the color. We group together all the similar experiences to form a higher-level concept, which includes all the specific, individual observations we are engaging in abstraction.
Abstraction Ladder, the Concept
S. I. Hayakawa explained the concept using a ladder . Hayakawa used his cow Bessie to illustrate the four levels of abstraction from highest level four at the top to lowest at the bottom.
Ladder
Think of abstraction as a ladder. The most specific and direct experiences are at the bottom, while each step above is more abstract.
4 – Wealth
3 – Farm Asset
2 – Cattle
1 – Bessie, my cow
Lets look at another example with clothing. Level one is very specific, such as Levi 501. Moving up to level two, you have noun categories, such as clothing. Moving up a level, you have a broad noun class or group names such as manufactured goods or industry. Finally, at the top level, you have even more abstract concepts such as power, beauty, and casualness.
Almost anything can be described either in relatively abstract, general words or in relatively concrete, specific ones. You may say that you are writing on a piece of electronic equipment, or that you are writing on a laptop computer. You may say that your company produces consumer goods, or that it makes cell phones. When groups of words are ranked according to degree of abstraction, they form hierarchies.
Tailor the level of abstraction to the specific content and the audience level of
understanding
.
Using Concrete, Specific Words for Clarity
In general, as you move from one level to another while speaking, you will tailor the level of abstraction to the specific speech content and the audience level of understanding. You can increase the clarity, and therefore the usability, of your speaking by using concrete, specific words rather than abstract, general ones. Concrete words help your audience understand precisely what you mean. If you say that you want to produce television shows for a younger demographic segment, they won’t know whether you mean teenagers or toddlers. If you say that you study natural phenomena, your audience won’t know whether you mean volcanic eruptions or the migrations of monarch butterflies. Such vagueness can hinder audience from getting the information they need in order to make decisions and take action. When you want the audience to make a concrete connection to their direct experience, remember to come down to earth on the the abstraction ladder. You can move up the ladder again to talk about boarder concepts.
For example, you will draw heavily on level one to create images of specific people, places, or things in the minds of your audience. You may move up and down the level of abstraction as needed. For example, if you are talking about a top-level abstraction such as transportation, you may need to make it real for the audience by describing actual means of transportation such as your green mountain bike for city use or your blue and silver BMW for longer trips.
Abstract and general terms do have important uses for different audiences and occasions. For example, in scientific, technical, and other specialized fields, speakers often need to make general points, describe the general features of a situation, or provide general guidance for action.
Use abstract and specialized terminology to communicate
messages
economically.
Specialized, abstract terminology only works when your audience will understand them. You can use the specialized terminology of a particular profession or group if you know that they already have specific connections to the more abstract terminology. With audiences who understand the abstractions, the technical meanings can communicate messages economically with fewer words than if you started with specific instances at the bottom of the abstraction ladder.
Your objective when choosing words is not to avoid abstract general words altogether, but rather to avoid using them when your audience needs more specific, concrete connections to what you are saying.
13.2.7: Make It Memorable
Making your speech memorable is a way to improve its ability to inform the audience.
Learning Objective
List ways to make your speech memorable for your audience
Key Points
Use visual aids to help make your speech memorable.
Repeat key points of your speech to make it more memorable.
Making your speech memorable is important because it increases the likelihood that the audience will walk away informed.
Key Term
memorable
Worthy to be remembered; very important or remarkable.
Remember that the goal of an informative speech is to inform the audience . Ideally, not only are they informed while you are speaking, but they actually retain that information after you have left the podium. In order for this to happen, you have to make your speech memorable.
Memorable Speech
Making your informative speech memorable increases the likelihood that your audience will retain the information.
An audience clapping at a conference.
There are multiple ways to make your speech memorable. One way to do this is to repeat the key information that you want the audience to remember. This means repeating important information, within reason, throughout the speech. Lay out the important keys in the introduction of the speech, reiterate them in the body of the speech, and then repeat them again in the conclusion.
Another way to make your speech memorable is to use visual aids. Visual aids have the advantage of providing the information of your speech in an easily digestible form. In addition, visualizations have the ability to be uniquely captivating. Having an attractive visual can get the attention of the audience and improve the chances that they will remember the information contained in the visualization.
Though there are many ways to make an informative speech memorable, another way is to let yourself be engaged in the presentation of the speech. Demonstrating your own excitement by the speech’s topic has the possibility of drawing in the audience. If the speaker seems uninterested in the speech, then why should the audience be engaged? Therefore, let yourself be absorbed and excited by the speech, which might lure in the audience and make the speech more memorable.
These are just a few ways to make your speech memorable. Remember, the goal of making an informative speech memorable is to increase the likelihood that your audience will walk away informed. Using visual aids and repetition of key points are two strategies to use in order to deliver an effective informative speech.
13.2.8: Utilizing Devices to Enhance Audience Understanding
Visual aids, microphones, video screens, and/or a podium can help enhance audience understanding.
Learning Objective
Describe the use of devices in public speaking
Key Points
Visual aids such as graphs, handouts, slide show presentations, and objects can help audiences understand complicated subjects. Many people learn visually and need information provided in this context, as well as orally, to enhance learning.
A podium can help the presenter provide the audience with necessary information on a topic by offering a place for the speaker to have cue cards or scripts.
A microphone is a good way to make sure that everyone in the audience hears the presentation properly. Wireless headsets allow the speaker to amplify the presentation while moving about the audience or reviewing visual aids.
A video screen is a good way to make sure the audience can see the entire presentation in a large venue.
Key Term
podium
A platform on which to stand, as when conducting an orchestra, preaching at a pulpit, or delivering a speech.
Utilize Devices to Enhance Audience Understanding
Visual Aid
Using a visual aid, like a large-screen digital projector, helps inform the audience.
Speakers at the re:publica XI visual language conference are showcasing their designs by using a large-screen digital projector.
Visual Aids
Many people need the assistance of visual material to understand complicated topics. Visual aids help the speaker reinforce the information provided in the speech to increase absorption and retention of the material. Visual aids can include objects, models, handouts, graphs, charts, photos, and slide show presentations. With visual aids, a speaker needs to make sure they adequately enhance the presentation without causing a distraction for the audience.
Podium/Rostrum
A podium can help an audience understand a speech. It allows the speaker to have notes or scripts to make sure the important information is covered regarding the subject matter. Additional information can be included in the notes so that if the audience has any questions the speaker can make sure they provide a complete answer.
Amplification
Amplification is important to make sure that the entire audience can hear the speech properly. Some large auditoriums and amphitheaters are designed to assist acoustics. Still, a microphone is a beneficial addition to a speaker’s toolkit. With the advancements in wireless technology, a headset can also be used, enabling the speaker to move about during the presentation, go over visual aids, or enter the audience during the question and answer session.
Video Screens
Video screens are beneficial for an audience, especially those who are seated in a large venue. The screens can help the audience see the speaker and the visual aids better, especially if they are in the back of the room or off to the far right or far left of the stage. Video screens are often available at modern conference centers and auditoriums that can be synced with presentation devices.
With the addition of visual aids, podiums, microphones, and video screens, a presenter can ensure that the audience is able to see, hear, and understand the material properly. When determining the type of visual aids needed for a speech, the speaker needs to consider the subject matter, audience, and venue so that the right materials are used to enhance audience understanding.
13.3: Sample Informative Speech
13.3.1: Sample Informative Speech
On May 1, 2011, President Barack Obama delivered an informative speech to the international community on the death of Osama bin Laden.
Learning Objective
Identify ways in which President Obama’s speech about the death of Osama bin Laden was a good example of an informative speech
Key Points
In the late hours of May 1, 2011, President Barack Obama gathered in the East Room of the White House to address America and the world that Al Qaeda’s highest commander, Osama bin Laden, had been killed via military actions in Pakistan.
President Obama gives context by describing the events of September 11, 2001 and bin Laden’s instrumental role in that day’s events.
The President shares some details on international intelligence gathering on bin Laden’s current location as well as the decision-making process to proceed with the military operation on the bin Laden compound in Abbottabad, Pakistan.
The President’s speech is largely focused on events and processes, two examples of informative speeches. He describes the events of September 11, 2001 and the military operation on May 1, 2011 as well as the process of how that military operation was carried out.
The President concludes his speech by thanking the many people involved in the locating and killing of Osama bin Laden, as well as the patience and resolve of the American people in the years since September 11, 2001.
Key Terms
excerpt
A clip, snippet, passage or extract from a larger work such as a news article, a film, a literary composition, or other media.
intelligence
A political or military department, agency or unit designed to gather information, usually secret, about the enemy or about hostile activities.
firefight
A skirmish involving an exchange of gunfire.
Sample Informative Speech
The following excerpts are taken from President Barack Obama’s informative remarks to the American people of the death of Osama bin Laden, given on May 1, 2011.
Good evening. Tonight, I can report to the American people and to the world that the United States has conducted an operation that killed Osama bin Laden, the leader of al Qaeda, and a terrorist who’s responsible for the murder of thousands of innocent men, women, and children.
It was nearly 10 years ago that a bright September day was darkened by the worst attack on the American people in our history. The images of 9/11 are seared into our national
memory
— hijacked planes cutting through a cloudless September sky; the Twin Towers collapsing to the ground; black smoke billowing up from the Pentagon; the wreckage of Flight 93 in Shanksville, Pennsylvania, where the actions of heroic citizens saved even more heartbreak and destruction…
…We were also united in our resolve to protect our nation and to bring those who committed this vicious attack to justice. We quickly learned that the 9/11 attacks were carried out by al Qaeda — an organization headed by Osama bin Laden, which had openly declared war on the United States and was committed to killing innocents in our country and around the globe. And so we went to war against al Qaeda to protect our citizens, our friends, and our allies.
Over the last 10 years, thanks to the tireless and heroic work of our military and our counterterrorism professionals, we’ve made great strides in that effort. We’ve disrupted terrorist attacks and strengthened our homeland defense. In Afghanistan, we removed the Taliban government, which had given bin Laden and al Qaeda safe haven and support. And around the globe, we worked with our friends and allies to capture or kill scores of al Qaeda terrorists, including several who were a part of the 9/11 plot.
Yet Osama bin Laden avoided capture and escaped across the Afghan border into Pakistan. Meanwhile, al Qaeda continued to operate from along that border and operate through its affiliates across the world.
And so shortly after taking office, I directed Leon Panetta, the director of the CIA, to make the killing or capture of bin Laden the top priority of our war against al Qaeda, even as we continued our broader efforts to disrupt, dismantle, and defeat his network.
Then, last August, after years of painstaking work by our intelligence community, I was briefed on a possible lead to bin Laden. It was far from certain, and it took many months to run this thread to ground. I met repeatedly with my national security team as we developed more
information
about the possibility that we had located bin Laden hiding within a compound deep inside of Pakistan. And finally, last week, I determined that we had enough intelligence to take action, and authorized an operation to get Osama bin Laden and bring him to justice.
Today, at my direction, the United States launched a targeted operation against that compound in Abbottabad, Pakistan. A small team of Americans carried out the operation with extraordinary courage and capability. No Americans were harmed. They took care to avoid civilian casualties. After a
firefight
, they killed Osama bin Laden and took custody of his body.
For over two decades, bin Laden has been al Qaeda’s leader and symbol, and has continued to plot attacks against our country and our friends and allies. The death of bin Laden marks the most significant achievement to date in our nation’s effort to defeat al Qaeda…
…Tonight, I called President Zardari, and my team has also spoken with their Pakistani counterparts. They agree that this is a good and historic day for both of our nations. And going forward, it is essential that Pakistan continue to join us in the fight against al Qaeda and its affiliates…
…We give thanks for the men who carried out this operation, for they exemplify the professionalism, patriotism, and unparalleled courage of those who serve our country. And they are part of a
generation
that has borne the heaviest share of the burden since that September day.
Finally, let me say to the families who lost loved ones on 9/11 that we have never forgotten your loss, nor wavered in our commitment to see that we do whatever it takes to prevent another attack on our shores.
And tonight, let us think back to the sense of unity that prevailed on 9/11. I know that it has, at times, frayed. Yet today’s achievement is a testament to the greatness of our country and the determination of the American people…
…Thank you. May God bless you. And may God bless the United States of America.
While leadership styles vary, effective group leaders are characterized by group involvement, mutual respect, and excellent communication.
Learning Objective
Describe the qualities of effective leadership in groups
Key Points
There are three main leadership styles: Laissez-faire, Democratic, and Authoritarian. A leader’s style and involvement may fall anywhere along the continuum.
It is the group leader’s job to unite group members in working toward a common goal, keep them motivated, diffuse conflict, and ultimately deliver success.
Excellent communication can be the key to successful group work. When messages are properly understood and all group members feel they are being heard, the group’s goal can more easily be accomplished and conflict is less likely.
Key Terms
continuum
a continuous series or whole, no part of which is noticeably different from its adjacent parts, although the ends or extremes of it are very different from each other
rapport
a relationship of mutual trust and respect
Example
This photo of civil rights leaders with President Johnson shows several examples of leadership.
Leadership Overview
There are many essential elements to being an effective leader. A group leader must be responsible for not only participating in the group and ensuring that the group’s goal is attained, but also for motivating the team, delivering success, and being a resource that group members can reach out to for help.
Leadership Continuum
Leaders are usually categorized along a continuum, at one end of which lies the Laissez-faire leader, in the middle the Democratic leader, and at the other end the Authoritarian leader.
Laissez-faire is French for “let do.” A Laissez-faire leader takes a laid back or hands-off approach. This style may be most effective in a highly skilled and motivated group, or in order to foster creativity and participation. However, if a group is in need of direction, then a laissez-faire style may result in frustration and inefficiency.
An Authoritarian leader is one in which a leader attempts to exert maximum control over a group. This leadership style may be beneficial when a group is lost and disorganized or there are significant time pressures. However total control can also lead to group tensions or resentment of the leader and group members are also not likely to stay committed to the project as they feel they have no part in the decision making process.
The Democratic style of leadership falls somewhere in between Laissez-faire and Authoritarian styles. A Democratic leader will allow the decision-making power to be shared amongst group members and not only themselves. At the same time, a Democratic leader will facilitate discussions and lead the group in right direction.
Recently, leadership theories have emphasized the importance of leaders who cultivate positive, mutual relationships within their groups rather than step back too much from the team or dictate the flow of work. The leader must know each member of the team as well as the team as a whole in order to bring them all together. An effective leader uses each member’s contributions and energy to focus on a common goal.
Group Leadership
General Petraeus talks with U.S. soldiers serving in Afghanistan.
Group Leadership
Communication is one of the most important aspects of working successfully in a group setting. Therefore, good communication skills are an essential quality for a good leader. Communicating is always difficult in a group, but these difficulties can be magnified by factors such as large group sizes, strong personalities, or differences in opinion.
When working in a group, it is important to have a common goal around which group members can unite. This is something on which all group members can agree and which they all desire to work toward. When leaders find that they have particularly strong-willed group members who seem to dominate the conversations, or several group members who do not seem to get along, communication can often be the key to resolving the conflict.
In these situations, effective communication techniques include discussing the conflict openly with the members involved, providing a more structured discussion forum so all members can be heard, or even engaging group members in non-project related bonding activities such as ice-breaking games, a group lunch, or a fun outing.
Technology is now a great resource for effective group communication. Technology is a great way for large groups to share their ideas. Often, groups can become so large that it is difficult for all the members to meet at the same time and place. Additionally, in large groups it can be difficult to allow everyone’s ideas to be heard. Through various platforms such as email, Google Groups, Blackboard, Facebook, and others, it is possible for group members to share their ideas in an organized manner so they can be read by others at their own leisure.
While leadership styles may vary with person and situation, it is always important for leaders to remember their role in the group. Effective leaders both participate in the group and work to achieve the overall goal of the group, guiding members in the right direction. Effective leaders will build mutually respectful relationships with their group members. Having a rapport with group members allows leaders to better understand members’ actions and increase their cooperation. Finally, effective leaders facilitate excellent communication amongst the group. Great communication leads to better and more effective idea generation and less conflict overall.
18.1.2: Responsibilities in Group Work
When all member assume their expected responsibilities, working in groups can be enjoyable and effective.
Learning Objective
Describe the typical roles and responsibilities of group members
Key Points
Assigning group members roles can help alleviate uncertainty about expected responsibilities and help keep the group on task such as leader, scribe, devil’s advocate, and tracking lessons learned.
Group member responsibilities include holding themselves accountable, participating in group activities to achieve the overall goal, and respecting all members of the group.
Each group member has something uniquely valuable to bring to the table. Allowing group members to use their strengths and bring their individual knowledge and backgrounds to the project will allow the group to function to its full potential.
Key Term
group think
A process of reasoning or decision – making by a group, especially one characterized by uncritical acceptance or conformity to a perceived majority view.
Responsibilities in Group Work
When participating in group work, every member of the team has a responsibility to the group and the project. If each member does not participate, contribute, and deliver results, the group will ultimately fail to achieve their goal. Collaboration becomes effective only when group member participation is balanced .
Group Work
Assigning roles can make groups more effective.
Everyone in a group must learn to hold themselves accountable and be accountable to the other people in their group. Without accountability, work will not get done, deadlines will not be met, and the group will not be able to reach its goal. Individual and group accountability means that no one student has to do all the work. Accountability means not only being accountable for the physical work that a group member must deliver, but also attendance to group meetings, conduct, and behavior towards other group members, etc. It is also important to remember that group members are diverse and each one has a different strength and perspective to bring to the project based on their backgrounds, learning style, experiences, and aspirations.
Typical Roles in a Group
While everyone should be responsible for brain storming, problem solving, and providing their experience and knowledge, sometimes it can be helpful to assign group member specific roles. That way, members know exactly what they are responsible for. Four roles that are commonly found in groups are: a leader, a scribe, a lessons learned tracker, and a devil’s advocate.
Leader – In the event there is no clear chain of command, a team must be prepared to assign the role of leader. A leader can keep the team focused, mediate conflicts, and ensure that individuals are held accountable.
Note taker or scribe – again, a simple idea, but documenting every meeting is an important step in developing a productive team. A scribe can quickly get a team up to date with past notes so little time is wasted remembering where you left off. Documenting and distributing notes from each meeting will equally inform all team members.
Lessons Learned tracker – Identify one person to track both positive and negative outcomes of meetings and projects. This individual can solicit input from other members. By documenting what everyone thinks went well and why and what did not go well and why, can keep a team productive by not repeating past mistakes.
Devil’s Advocate – Teams need to embrace conflict and different points of view. By assigning a devil’s advocate, this person can freely bring up alternatives or objections, making the team more objective.
By assigning these roles to members of the group, it can increase efficiency and productivity. The group now has people in specific roles to help them stay on track and the group members can now clearly outline their responsibilities in regards to the group work.
Characteristics of Great Group Members
Characteristics of great group members are those who actively participate, respect all other members, can both learn from other members and teach them, values other’s contributions, draws on their own unique past experience and knowledge, and feels a sense of ownership over the project. To strive to embody all of these characteristics is the responsibility of all group members, regardless of their assigned role.
Responsibilities of Group Members
Group members are not only responsible for creating positive productivity within their group, but they must also avoid falling into the trap of unproductive behaviors that also arise in group settings. Group think and social loafing are two incredibly common negative phenomena that arise in group collaboration.
Groupthink is simply going along with the team on a decision because that seems to be the consensus and they want to avoid conflict. Having a strong devil’s advocate will help reduce the chances of groupthink.
Social loafing is someone that is putting forth less effort as a member of a group than they would as an individual. They are allowing the other members of the group to do the majority of the work with the intention of still reaping equal benefits. Again, leadership and holding people accountable is a great tool to deal with social loafing.
Working in groups can be challenging. Blending people from many different backgrounds, with different personalities styles and work ethics can make consensus difficult. However, when all group members take on their expected responsibilities, group work can become much more enjoyable and effective.
18.1.3: Reflective Thinking
Reflective thinking about group work allows students to evaluate both successes and failures of the project and work towards improvement.
Learning Objective
Explain how reflective thinking is used in group settings
Key Points
Reflective thinking requires scientific analysis of a problem and using empirical knowledge to make decisions.
According to John Dewey, a disciplined mind is necessary to gain knowledge and obtain true intellectual freedom.
When group members use reflective thinking, they are able to use the scientific method to reach logical decisions and understand the strength of the group based on individual competencies.
Key Term
scientific method
A method of discovering knowledge about the natural world based in making falsifiable predictions (hypotheses), testing them empirically, and developing peer-reviewed theories that best explain the known data.
Reflective Thinking
Reflective thinking is using the scientific method to make a decision. This helps to create deep learning, which will enable the growth of an individual in many different aspects, including morally, emotionally, and cognitively. Reflective thinking helps to determine an individual’s strengths and weaknesses by allowing individuals to question values and beliefs, challenge assumptions, recognize biases, acknowledge fears, and find areas of improvement.
John Dewey and Critical Thinking
Dewey’s method of critical thinking involves a disciplined mind in order to gain knowledge . A disciplined mind needs intellectual control of the thinking process, which is so often emotionally based. This disciplined mind offers intellectual freedom, and discipline shouldn’t be viewed as a negative aspect as many individuals believe it to be.
John Dewey
Public speaking students are often taught John Dewey’s methods of reflective thinking.
Reflective Thinking in a Group Setting
Using reflective thinking in a group setting can allow for intellectual decisions based on defining a problem and using concepts based in logic to select the best solution. Group members will then be able to compare and contrast their colleagues’ interpretations of the project experience with their own. They can learn about the strengths and weaknesses of the group, as it is comprised of the competencies and assumptions of the individuals.
Reflective thinking about group work should cover ideas such as:
What did I do well? What did the group do well?
What could I improve on? What could the group improve on?
What was one of the largest obstacles the group faced? Did did we overcome it? How?
Was there group conflict? Was it resolved? How?
Was our group successful? Did we complete our objective? Why or why not?
What would we do differently if we were given the opportunity to repeat the project?
Reflective thinking is an excellent tool for identifying positive and negative aspects of a group work experience. By spending time seriously contemplating the overall process, both during and after the project, it is possible for group members to learn from their experience and work toward improving their group work skills for the future.
18.2: Presenting Group Thinking
18.2.1: Group Presentation Formats
Group presentations can be structured around a set format or can borrow components from different formats.
Learning Objective
Define four formats of group presentations
Key Points
A panel format is a discussion between group members led by a moderator.
A divided presentation is a sequence of individual presentations by group members.
A debate format presents two sides of an issue and reasons for and against each side.
Key Terms
forum
A form of discussion involving a panel of presenters and often participation by members of the audience.
symposium
A conference or other meeting for discussion of a topic, especially one in which the participants make presentations.
format
The form of presentation of something.
Group presentations can take place in different formats. These formats give a group an idea of how to structure their presentation, though different components can be taken from several formats and combined according to a group’s particular needs and goals.
Panel Presentation
A panel is a format in which the presenters talk to each other in addition to the audience. Typically the panel will consist of several group members to whom a moderator poses questions. The panel members then present their views on the question and discuss their different answers. The audience has the benefit of viewing this dynamic discussion play out before them. Often questions will also be taken from the audience, so audience members can become involved in the discussion as well. However, with such loose organization, the moderator must maintain control over the presentation and keep the group on topic .
Panel Discussion
In an panel discussion, the panel members talk to one another as well as the audience.
Symposium
A symposium presentation is a group presentation that is essentially a collection of individual presentations covering a broad topic. The topic is broken up into subtopics, and each group member, one after another, makes a presentation on his or her subtopic. All together, the group covers the topic in its entirety. This format is very easy to organize and coordinate as long as each group member remains cognizant of not addressing a different member’s subtopic. Since this method can make for a long presentation, the group members must concentrate on engaging the audience and keeping their attention.
Public Forum
Public forum debate can be compared to a nationally-televised debate, such as ‘Crossfire’ in which the debaters argue a topic. The debate in a public forum is conducted by teams of two people alternating speeches for their side, either affirming or negating their topic. Successful public forum debaters must make persuasive and logical arguments in a manner that is accessible to a wide variety of audiences. Public forum debate also focuses on not only logical, but research based arguments.
Oral Report by Group Leader
In this format, the designated leader of a group makes an individual presentation of the group’s thoughts and findings on a topic. The leader may summarize views from several different group members and present points of agreement and disagreement.
18.2.2: Thoughts for Group and Individual Presenters
Each individual in a group presentation should know their role and stay consistent and cooperative with the other members.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate how to each individual in a group should participate in a group presentation
Key Points
The first speaker should introduce the entire presentation. After that, each speaker should introduce the next and transition with a preview of their topic.
Each presenter should make eye contact with the audience and move to the front of the group when it is his or her turn to speak. The last speaker should then conclude the entire presentation.
When preparing the presentation, the group should check each individual’s work for consistency of information and formatting. Group members should answer audience questions as a team with no one member dominating.
Key Terms
transition
The process of change from one form, state, style, or place to another.
consistency
correspondence or compatibility
There are several important considerations for an individual to keep in mind to help a group presentation succeed.
Choosing Roles
The instructor may require every person to speak during the presentation. However, if you are given a choice of how many speakers to include, decide which group members will speak and which ones will not. Because it is important for every student to develop strong knowledge of presenting, every member could benefit from speaking. Any members who do not present should be given other significant responsibilities .
Group Presentation
In a group presentation, all of the members will have a specific role.
Members of a group speak during a Tuskegee Airmen presentation.
Group Introduction
The first speaker should open with an introduction to the whole presentation rather than an introduction to only his or her part. This group introduction makes the presentation as a whole accessible to the audience. It introduces the group members, establishes goodwill between speakers and the audience, motivates them to listen, and previews all the talks.
Transitions between Speakers
Each speaker should identify the next speaker by name and signal that person’s topic. Changing speakers without such a spoken transition can break the flow of the presentation, and it may leave the impression that you are unprepared or that your presentation is unorganized. A transition should remind the audience of the sequence the group introduction promised. It should help listeners know where they are in the presentation as a whole. Transitions may also emphasize any special qualifications of the next speaker.
Internal Previews
Each individual speaker except the first should connect his or her part to the overall argument and tell the audience what topics he or she will discuss. Such statements identify the structure of the talk and help the audience follow along.
Group Conclusion
The last speaker should present a conclusion for the whole presentation rather than just a conclusion for his or her part. The last speaker is responsible for ensuring that the series of talks is comprehensible as a whole. He or she should summarize briefly the key points, motivate the audience to act, or reinforce the group’s interpretation of the issue with a memorable closing statement.
Move to the Front to Speak
If all the group members remain standing during the presentation, each one should move to the front of the room when it is his or her time to speak. Moving to the front will non-verbally draw the audience’s attention to the speaker.
Connect with the Audience through Eye Contact
In a team presentation, every individual speaker needs to develop rapport with the audience. Since each person has only a short time to connect with the audience, eye contact and introductions are especially important. Speakers should stand where they can see the computer screen, the audience, and, if possible, other team members.
Check for Overlaps, Accuracy, and Consistency
Since group members often prepare their parts of the presentation individually, it is necessary to check for overlapping or contradictory information once the individual parts are assembled. Although the first and last speakers cover the presentation as a whole, the speakers in the middle should not re-present evidence unless new analysis is involved. A speaker should build on what the previous speaker said—not merely repeat it.
Check for Consistent Formatting
All handouts or visuals should use the same formatting. A patchwork of different fonts, font sizes, and other formatting conventions may negatively impress the audience, distract or mislead them, and undermine the group’s credibility.
Answering Questions as a Team
The person who speaks first should act as the leader during Q&A. He or she should direct questions to the team member who knows most about the topic of the question and should therefore answer first. The leader should not dominate Q&A. Other team members may unobtrusively signal that they would like to contribute to the answer when the first person finishes.
18.2.3: Preparing for Team Presentations
The way a team functions while preparing for a presentation can be broken down into formal processes and interactions.
Learning Objective
Define the processes that describe the dynamics of group thinking and team presentations
Key Points
The model for understanding team processes can be grouped into three categories: transition, action, and interpersonal.
Teamwork processes examine interpersonal interactions between group members, which can be used as strategies for successful presentations.
Another approach to the dynamics of a team presentation involves looking specifically at the strategies that guide interactions between group members throughout the team effort.
Establishing ground rules, coordinating meeting times, and effectively resolving disputes are some methods used to build effective teams and group presentations.
Key Terms
process
A series of events to produce a result, especially as contrasted to product.
strategy
A plan of action intended to accomplish a specific goal.
Preparing for Team Presentations
The way a team prepares for a presentation can be broken down into formal processes and interactions. This is not a strict distinction, but two different ways of analyzing how a team achieves its goals while building, practicing, and delivering a presentation.
Processes
Researchers have identified ten teamwork processes divided into three categories, which can be used to describe the dynamics of group thinking and team presentations.
Transition processes are reflective in nature, and take place between periods of action. They serve to assess previous actions and outline future actions. In team and group presentations, these processes can serve to:
Determine what the team is trying to achieve, and what steps will lead there.
Specify the incremental goals and accomplishments that will lead to overall mission success.
Formulate an approach to achieving the goals and mission.
Action processes embody the steps that the group takes to move forward. Whether during preparation or delivery of a presentation, these actions are crucial to working effectively in a team. Team members within groups must:
Monitor progress toward goals and make sure the team is on track, rather than veering off course.
Assure that roles and responsibilities are being fulfilled.
Monitor and backup behavior to ensure that all members remain engaged.
Coordinate roles to keep things organized and working smoothly.
Interpersonal processes apply during the delivery of group presentations, while team member both present and transition between roles (e.g., speaker and observer). They include:
Identifying and resolving disputes.
Motivating and building confidence, while maintaining high member performance.
Making sure group member participation steers rather than stalls the development and delivery of the presentation.
Interactions
Another approach to the dynamics of a team presentation involves looking specifically at the strategies that guide interactions between group members throughout the team effort. Examples of strategies for interaction include:
Group Interactions
Timing transitions between slides and other breaks is crucial to a well-prepared group presentation.
Three members of a group stand together and give a presentation.
Establishing ground rules: Establishing ground rules sets expectations for each group member on how the group plans to achieve its end goal (e.g, educate students, sell a product to prospects, etc). Making these rules explicit helps avoid miscommunication at the beginning of the project.
Mission analysis:This strategy ensures every team member has contact information for the others, and that everyone’s schedule is coordinated for meeting times. At a higher level, it means achieving consensus on how group decisions will be made and how group information will be shared with all team members.
Managing team cooperation: This strategy applies to group meetings. It focuses on outlining an intention for each meeting, and reviewing meeting activities and actions to ensure the intention has been met.
Resolving conflict: Resolving conflict requires the group to acknowledge that there is a legitimate conflict. The group must then agree on an approach to address it, and determine how to proceed. Possible solutions include discussing a compromise, referring to previously established group decisions, or deciding to address the issue later.
Preparing Back-ups: Practicing transitions between group members’ sections, preparing extra copies of handouts and other visual aids, and reviewing group members’ roles are all part of this strategy. This helps improve preparation and the delegation of tasks within the group.
Introductory speeches may not be the main event, but they are key for getting an audience acquainted with their main speaker.
Learning Objective
Define an introduction speech
Key Points
Introduction speeches are usually brief and always prepared in advance.
If you know the person you’re introducing, it certainly makes it easier to prepare your remarks. However, be mindful of the context of your relationship to the speaker, and the context of the event itself. For example, avoid an overly casual tone when speaking at a formal event.
If you don’t know the speaker, conduct some research to get a basic understanding of who they are, as well as any relevant work that applies to their keynote. To help you prepare, consider contacting the speaker in advance to request their professional biography or their curriculum vitae (CV).
Key Terms
curriculum vitae
A detailed written account of one’s education and experience used to seek positions in academic or educational environments, typically including academic credentials, publications, courses taught, etc.
introduction
A means of presenting one person to another.
keynote
A speech that sets the main theme of a conference or other gathering; a keynote speech or keynote address.
The Introduction Speech
Introduction
You might not be the headliner, but you may get to introduce the keynote speaker.
A woman stands at a podium and looks over at another presenter.
Sometimes you may be asked to speak at an event or occasion before the headlining speech, or be called upon to introduce a keynote speaker or panelist.
The introduction speech is no less significant than the keynote. It’s important because you’re getting your audience warmed up and accustomed to who will be speaking about the topics and issues they care about. Just as we appreciate when friends introduce us to new acquaintances, your audience appreciates being introduced to their main speaker.
There may be times when you know the person that you’re introducing, so it might be easier to talk about them. Just be mindful of the context of both your relationship and the event itself. You might be buddies with a leading scientist in biology at a biology conference, but that doesn’t mean you should introduce him by the nicknames you call each other on Facebook.
Knowing the person you need to introduce is also helpful as you can ask them directly what information they would or would not like shared about them.
There will also be times where you may only have passing knowledge about the person you’re introducing, or perhaps you might not know anything about them at all. But in the age of the Internet and the Google search, it shouldn’t take very long to find out some basic information about them that is relevant to their speech, such as their professional experience or publications.
You may also be able to contact them to see if they can provide you with a professional bio or curriculum vitae (CV). In the latter instance, you may want to distill that into your own prepared remarks.
The good news is that speeches of introduction are usually brief and always prepared. Whether you’re reading from a script or teleprompter, you typically won’t be asked to introduce someone you don’t know without preparation.
17.1.2: The Speech of Presentation or Acceptance
Acceptance and presentation speeches both occur at events where awards and honors are distributed, but have different focuses.
Learning Objective
Discuss how to prepare an acceptance speech
Key Points
If you’ve been nominated or won a particular award or honor, always prepare an acceptance speech so you don’t fumble your words once on stage.
In an acceptance speech, always thank the award-giver, be they an individual or an organization. Don’t forget to thank anyone who helped you achieve your honor, either.
Speeches of presentation introduce the award itself, tell a little about its history and meaning, and introduce and name the actual awardee.
Key Term
humble
Not proud, arrogant, or assuming; modest.
The Speech of Presentation or Acceptance
Accepting an Award
Whenever someone is nominated for an award, they should prepare an acceptance speech.
American film producer Darryl F. Zanuck accepts an Academy Award for his work.
When you think of an acceptance speech, you might think of actress Sally Field clutching her Oscar award shouting into the microphone: “You like me! You really, really like me! “
Often, these speeches are far more humble.
Acceptance Speech
If you’ve been nominated for an award or honor, you may be asked to prepare some remarks in the event you win the award. Other times, you may know that you have won, making it substantially easier to prepare. Acceptance speeches may vary in length. For a multi-award event, such as the Academy Awards, winners are given a brief ninety seconds to make their remarks. At other times, a person could be the single awardee of the evening and have substantially more time to speak, often doubling as keynote speaker.
Acceptance speeches thank the awarding individual or organization. Depending on the award, the awardee may speak about their experience and emotions of getting that award or the work to achieve that award. If others have helped you in your endeavors, you may give them a quick thanks by name as well. If you’re partnered, you may thank your spouse, partner, or children. And if it’s a benefit for the Humane Society, it might even be appropriate to thank your pets!
Like any speech, consider your audience and the context of the speech. While being mindful of your time, get your thanks in while being gracious and humble.
Even if you are one of many in a field of nominees, it’s always a good idea to prepare an acceptance speech so that if you are named the winner, you won’t be fumbling for your words on stage.
Presentation Speech
Similar to the introductory speech, presentation speeches are typically prepared in advance and may describe the awardee before naming them, or describe the circumstances for their awarding.
If the award is named or in memory of someone, you may describe why that award was named in that person’s honor, such as the Pulitzer or Nobel Prize. You may talk about the criteria for selecting the award and how the awardee met that criteria for their specific work.
The speech of presentation is one that is particularly enjoyable to give, as the awardee is often honored to have received the award in the first place!
17.1.3: The Speech to Secure Goodwill
Speeches to secure goodwill seek to forge new relationships between previously unknown, antagonistic, or unfamiliar entities.
Learning Objective
Define a speech to secure goodwill
Key Points
Goodwill speeches are both informative and persuasive. You seek to persuade your audience to be in favor of you and who or what you represent.
Goodwill speeches highlight shared values, customs, beliefs, and morals.
Goodwill speeches do not make assumptions or judgments about their audience and are not meant to intimidate, embarrass, or offend.
One of the best examples of a goodwill speech is “Ich bin ein Berliner” (I am a Berliner) delivered by President John F. Kennedy in 1963.
Key Term
goodwill
A favorably disposed attitude toward someone or something.
The Speech to Secure Goodwill
Goodwill speeches seek to introduce oneself or an entity to another group, organization, or even country, while building a goodwill relationship with that audience. They may occur on a small scale such as through a maiden speech by the new CEO to a company, or on a large scale, e.g. a world leader touring another country.
Goodwill speeches are informative and persuasive. You are persuading your audience to consider you favorably. You will want to make the case about what makes you qualified or relevant to them. Goodwill speeches also often highlight shared customs, values, morals, and beliefs. Goodwill speeches do not make assumptions or judgments about their audience and do not intimidate, embarrass, or offend them.
Speech to Secure Goodwill
John F. Kennedy’s famous “Ich bin ein Berliner” (I am a Berliner) is a prime example of a speech to secure goodwill.
Perhaps one of the most famous goodwill speeches was made by President John F. Kennedy in 1963 in Berlin, Germany. Often referred to as “Ich bin ein Berliner” speech (“I am a Berliner”), the speech discusses how to build rapport and favorable attitudes between two differing nations (as excerpted below):
I am proud to come to this city as the guest of your distinguished Mayor, who has symbolized throughout the world the fighting spirit of West Berlin. And I am proud to visit the Federal Republic with your distinguished Chancellor who for so many years has committed Germany to democracy and freedom and progress, and to come here in the company of my fellow American, General Clay, who has been in this city during its great moments of crisis and will come again if ever needed…
…You live in a defended island of freedom, but your life is part of the main. So let me ask you, as I close, to lift your eyes beyond the dangers of today, to the hopes of tomorrow, beyond the freedom merely of this city of Berlin, or your country of Germany, to the advance of freedom everywhere, beyond the wall to the day of peace with justice, beyond yourselves and ourselves to all mankind.
Freedom is indivisible, and when one man is enslaved, all are not free. When all are free, then we can look forward to that day when this city will be joined as one and this country and this great Continent of Europe in a peaceful and hopeful globe. When that day finally comes, as it will, the people of West Berlin can take sober satisfaction in the fact that they were in the front lines for almost two decades.
All free men, wherever they may live, are citizens of Berlin.
And, therefore, as a free man, I take pride in the words, “Ich bin ein Berliner. “
17.1.4: Commemorative Speeches: Dedications and Eulogies
Dedications and eulogies are two types of commemorative speeches that memorialize people and/or events.
Learning Objective
Identify types of commemorative speeches
Key Points
Dedications may honor an individual, a group of individuals, or a specific event.
Eulogies honor a specific deceased person, celebrating the life he lived rather than mulling on the manner or circumstances of their death.
It is entirely acceptable for speech givers to become emotional when delivering these types of speeches (especially eulogies) as they can evoke strong emotions with both speaker and audience.
Key Terms
dedication
A ceremony marking an official completion or opening.
eulogy
An oration to honor a deceased person, usually at a funeral.
commemorate
To honor the memory of someone or something with a ceremony.
The Commemorative Speech
Commemorative speeches are those that celebrate and honor the memory of someone or something. If you consider various memorial holidays and observances throughout the year, such a Memorial Day in the United States, many people commemorate the occasion by remembering fallen veterans. In England, the English commemorate their fallen heroes by wearing poppies on Remembrance Day.
The Dedication
The dedication is a very specific type of commemorative speech. It is often accompanied by a ceremony accompanying an official opening or completion of something. The speech honors the event, individual or groups of people to which the items are being dedicated. Take for example, the dedication of the National Cemetery in Gettysburg, Pennsylvania in 1863, by then President Abraham Lincoln:
Fourscore and seven years ago our fathers brought forth on this continent a new nation, conceived in Liberty, and dedicated to the proposition that all men are created equal. Now we are engaged in a great civil war, testing whether that nation, or any nation so conceived and so dedicated, can long endure. We are met on a great battlefield of that war. We have come to dedicate a portion of that field, as a final resting-place for those who here gave their lives that that nation might live. It is altogether fitting and proper that we should do this. But, in a larger sense, we cannot dedicate—we cannot consecrate—we cannot hallow—this ground. The brave men, living and dead, who struggled here, have consecrated it far above our poor power to add or detract. The world will little note nor long remember what we say here, but it can never forget what they did here. It is for us, the living, rather, to be dedicated here to the unfinished work which they who fought here have thus far so nobly advanced. It is rather for us to be here dedicated to the great task remaining before us—that from these honored dead we take increased devotion to that cause for which they gave the last full measure of devotion; that we here highly resolve that these dead shall not have died in vain; that this nation, under God, shall have a new birth of freedom; and that government of the people, by the people, for the people, shall not perish from the earth.
The Eulogy
A eulogy is a very specific type of commemorative speech that occurs at a person’s funeral. Where a dedication may commemorate an event, an eulogy commemorates a specific deceased person. Eulogies may include memories and anecdotes of that person’s life. Rather than focusing on how or why a person died, the eulogy celebrates the life he lived. It can be extremely emotionally difficult to deliver a eulogy for a friend or family member. In many circles, it is often expected that the eulogy reader may cry or become upset while speaking as they remember their loved one.
President Lincoln was remembered by Josiah Gilbert Holland, on the occasion of his funeral in 1865:
Giving a Eulogy
President Abraham Lincoln’s funeral procession on Pennsylvania Avenue on April 19, 1865.
Our President is dead. He has served us faithfully and well. He has kept the faith; he has finished his course. Henceforth there is laid up for him a crown of glory, which the Lord, the righteous Judge, shall give him in that day. And He who gave him to us, and who so abundantly blest his labors, and helped him to accomplish so much for his country and his race, will not permit the country which He saved to perish. I believe in the overruling providence of God, and that, in permitting the life of our Chief Magistrate to be extinguished, He only closed one volume of the history of His dealings with this nation, to open another whose pages shall be illustrated with fresh developments of His love and sweeter signs of His mercy. What Mr. Lincoln achieved he achieved for us; but he left as a choice a legacy in his Christian example, in his incorruptible integrity, and in his unaffected simplicity, if we will appropriate it, as in his public deeds. So we take this excellent life and its results, and, thanking God for them, cease all complaining and press forward under new leaders to now achievements, and the completion of the great work which he who has gone left as a sacred trust upon our hands.
17.1.5: The Inspirational Speech
Inspirational speeches are ones that are memorable, truly inspiring, and ones that can stand the test of time.
Learning Objective
Define an inspirational speech
Key Points
Inspirational speakers are often characterized as warm, encouraging and able to connect and engage almost instantly with their audiences.
Inspirational speeches elicit strong emotional responses from their audiences.
Not all inspirational speeches must be geared toward positive or happy messages; many times, these speeches are often used in “rally the troops” situations.
Key Term
inspire
To infuse into the mind; to communicate to the spirit; to convey, as by a divine or supernatural influence; to disclose preternaturally; to produce in, as by inspiration.
Example
In the movie Braveheart, William Wallace (played by Mel Gibson) delivers this rousing and classic inspirational speech to Scots about to fight the English troops: “I AM William Wallace. And I see a whole army of my countrymen here in defiance of tyranny. You have come to fight as free men, and free men you are. What would you do without freedom? Will you fight? Aye, fight and you may die. Run and you’ll live — at least a while. And dying in your beds many years from now, would you be willing to trade all the days from this day to that for one chance, just one chance to come back here and tell our enemies that they may take our lives, but they’ll never take our freedom! “
The Inspirational Speech
“They may take our lives, but they’ll never take our freedom!”
An inspirational speech straight out of Hollywood in the Mel Gibson classic, Braveheart.
A statue of Braveheart at Edinburgh Castle.
When we think of the word “inspire,” we typically think of motivational and rousing ideas and imagery. In a very literal sense, inspiration is a synonym of the biological function of inhalation: by inspiring, we take air into our lungs.
It only makes sense then, that inspirational words, images and situations cause our chests to swell with pride, excitement or even anger. Inspiration can elicit extreme emotional responses within us. As such, the inspirational speech is one that can elicit those same strong emotional responses within our audiences, no matter their size.
Some of the most famous inspirational speeches in history include Martin Luther King Jr.’s “I Have a Dream” and President John F. Kennedy’s inauguration speech. A modern day example could be President Barack Obama’s “Yes We Can” campaign stump speech made in 2008.
The power of these speeches lies in the rousing words and imagery that capitalize on the emotional response of their audiences. Inspirational speakers are often characterized as warm, encouraging, and able to instantly connect and engage with their audiences.
But not all messages are necessarily warm and fuzzy; take for example, the speech made popular by actor Mel Gibson as William Wallace in the film, Braveheart, as he motivates his ragtag band of Scotsmen to fight against the English troops:
Wallace: Sons of Scotland, I am William Wallace.
Young soldier: William Wallace is 7 feet tall.
Wallace: Yes, I’ve heard. Kills men by the hundreds, and if he were here he’d consume the English with fireballs from his eyes and bolts of lightning from his arse. I AM William Wallace. And I see a whole army of my countrymen here in defiance of tyranny. You have come to fight as free men, and free men you are. What would you do without freedom? Will you fight?
Veteran soldier: Fight? Against that? No, we will run; and we will live.
Wallace: Aye, fight and you may die. Run and you’ll live–at least a while. And dying in your beds many years from now, would you be willing to trade all the days from this day to that for one chance, just one chance to come back here and tell our enemies that they may take our lives, but they’ll never take our freedom!
Wallace and Soldiers: Alba gu bra! (Scotland forever! )
The successful inspirational speech is one that is memorable, truly inspiring, and one that can stand the test of time.
17.1.6: Other Speeches: Farewells, Toasts, and After-Dinner Remarks
Farewells, toasts, and after dinner remarks are often the lightest fare when it comes to public speaking.
Learning Objective
Distinguish a light speech such as a farewell, toast, or after dinner remark from other types of public speaking
Key Points
Farewells, toasts, and after dinner remarks typically require much less preparation than formal speeches.
Farewells, toasts, and after dinner remarks often use humor and anecdote to entertain a crowd and/or celebrate a guest or guests of honor.
It’s okay to poke fun at the guest of honor, but the goal is to entertain, not humiliate.
Brevity is an artform and a gift when it comes to informal speeches like these.
Key Terms
farewell
a wish of happiness or welfare at parting, especially a permanent departure; the parting compliment; a goodbye; adieu.
roast
(Originally fraternal) a comical event where a person is subjected to verbal attack, yet may be praised by sarcasm and jokes.
toast
to engage in a salutation and/or accompanying raising of glasses while drinking alcohol (or other appropriate beverage) in honor of someone or something.
Farewells, Toasts, and After-Dinner Remarks
After-Dinner Speeches
Maid and Matron of Honor, as well as Bridesmaids’ speeches, are becoming the norm at wedding receptions.
A woman in a wedding party gives an after-dinner speech.
Special occasion speeches are, to put it lightly, the “life of the party” when it comes to public speaking. Farewells, toasts, and after dinner remarks are often the lightest of public speaking fare, requiring little in preparation or execution. Humor, anecdote, and brevity are notable qualities of these types of speeches. Still, like any public speaking experience, it helps to be familiar with your subject and able to prepare, even if briefly beforehand.
Many times, these speeches are not written extensively prior to the speaking engagement. You may jot down a few key talking points or maybe a specific joke or anecdote that you wish to include.
Like preparing for any speech, regardless of formality, consider the audience, venue, and occasion for which you’re speaking. It’s also particularly helpful, especially for wedding toasts, to consider the span of ages in the room. If there is a particularly older or younger crowd, you may need to tailor your material accordingly so that all audience members can relate.
Many times, farewells, toasts, and after dinner speeches are made in honor or in celebration of someone else: a guest or guests of honor, or perhaps the event host or hostess themselves. While it’s acceptable to poke fun, make sure you do so in a way that’s kind and not cruel. Unless you’re specifically giving remarks for a full on roast, you shouldn’t overly embarrass your guest of honor. You’re there to entertain, not humiliate.
It’s important to remember that brevity is your friend in all of these situations: no one likes a toast that goes on forever while the champagne bubbles go flat. To quote Esenwein and Carnagey, authors of The Art of Public Speaking:
Blessed is the man that maketh short speeches, for he shall be invited to speak again.
16.1.1: Improve Listener Engagement, Comprehension, and Memory
Sensory enhancements may help your audience to become more engaged and to better understand and remember your presentation.
Learning Objective
Discuss how sensory enhancements can improve listener engagement, comprehension, and memory
Key Points
Listeners will be more engaged if you tailor your sensory enhancements to them and add value with pictures, graphs, and other visually appealing items.
Sensory enhancements improve comprehension through the process of repeating the information both visually and audibly.
The repetition of information through a sensory enhancement and in your speech will help the audience remember your presentation.
Key Term
engage
To engross or hold the attention of (someone); to keep busy or occupied.
Example
Engage your audience by taking into account their goals and motivations. For example, the details that you share about an organization’s financial status will differ depending on whether your audience is a tax inspector, an external auditor, the community of beneficiaries or the new employees.
Improving engagement, comprehension, and memory of your presentation can be accomplished by using sensory enhancements, or visual aids. Sensory enhancements allow the audience members to break up the presentation into memorable chunks that are more easily understood than if the presentation had not included visual aids.
Improving Listener Engagement through Sensory Enhancements
Listeners will be more engaged if you understand your audience and tailor your sensory enhancements to them. For example, if you are presenting to a group that may have a shorter attention span, such as teenagers or young adults, you will want to use sensory enhancements with pictures and colors rather than additional text.
Visual aids help audience members follow the structure and flow of your presentation. They will also help audience members pay attention, as it is easier to engage with visuals rather than simply with words .
Use engaging anecdotes, quotes, and examples as a part of your visual aid. Stories and quotes help to break up your presentation, and will also help audience members to maintain their engagement in your presentation. Outlining these stories in your visual aids will help the audience remember and apply these stories.
Improving Listener Comprehension through Repetition and Sensory Enhancements
Listener comprehension can be greatly improved through repetition, as it allows the audience to mentally rehearse and process information a second time, both visually and audibly. This is most effective when a sensory enhancement is used as a method of repeating an idea. For example, if a speaker uses a story to explain a concept and has a visual aid related to the story, the audience member will process both the visual aid and the story, and will be more likely to understand the concepts the speaker is presenting.
Improving Listener Memory through Sensory Enhancements
Sensory enhancements are also a powerful way of enhancing the memory of your audience. This is accomplished through the repetition of the information presented to the audience member. If a speaker discusses the idea and then uses a visual aid to help the audience understand that idea, the audience member will think about and process this idea twice rather than just once. This will result in the audience member being more likely to remember the idea. Similarly, a visual aid will act as a cue for the audience to remember a story or concept that the speaker is explaining. The visual cue will more easily remind the audience of the concept than a simple explanation in words.
Making an Impression
Graphs, images, and other sensory enhancements help the audience to understand and remember a presentation.
A scientific graph
16.1.2: Choosing the Right Visual Aid
One way to make your presentation memorable is through the use of visual aids; select aids that are appropriate to the point that you wish to illustrate.
Learning Objective
Discuss how to choose the appropriate visual aid for presentations
Key Points
Visual aids should support, clarify, and amplify, not repeat what you are saying. In order to make sure that the intent of your visual aid is clear try to use only important or memorable words or phrases.
It is important to consider if your visual can be seen and understood by the member of your audience who is farthest from the screen when choosing to use it. In order to do this test out your visual aids in different environments.
Visual Communication relies on vision, and is primarily presented or expressed with two dimensional images. A visual message accompanying text has a greater power to inform, educate, or persuade a person or audience.
Key Term
Visual Communication
The communication through visual aid and the conveyance of ideas and information in forms that can be read or looked upon.
Example
Avoid passing hard copies of your visual aids around to the audience. Do try to provide interactive aspects into your visual aids that involve the audience such as polls, feedback requests, and interactive activities.
Choosing the Right Visual Aid
Visual Communication relies on vision, and is primarily presented or expressed with two dimensional images. These may include the following:
Typography
Drawing
Graphic design
Illustration
Color
Electronic resources
Using Visual Aids
A chart is an example of a visual aid that a speaker can use during a speech.
It also explores the idea that a visual message accompanying text has a greater power to inform, educate, or persuade a person or audience. One way to make your presentation vivid and memorable is through the use of visual aids. Although computer generated and projected visual—and presentation—aids are commonly used, it is still important to understand how to use them or any other type of visual aids in your presentation.
There are many different types of visual aids. The type of visual aid a speaker uses depends on his preference and the information he is trying to present. In order to determine the type of visual aid to use, begin by writing your outline first, focusing on the main points of your presentation and taking into consideration your audience and any cultural contexts. Select visual aids that are appropriate to the point that you wish to illustrate or clarify. Visual aids should support, clarify, and amplify, not repeat what you are saying. In order to make sure that the intent of your visual aid is clear, try to use only important or memorable words or phrases. For example, eliminate any unnecessary word slides or overcrowding of visual aids. Pictorial slides and appropriate color usage have the biggest impact.
It is important to consider if your visual aid can be seen and understood by the member of your audience who is farthest from the screen when choosing to use it. In order to do this, test out your visual aids in different environments. Practice with your visual aid when going through your presentation for timing and familiarity. Try to avoid beginning or ending your presentation with a visual aid unless it is key in opening your presentation or making a significant point. Introduce visual aids so that they blend smoothly with your speech and highlight your main points or provide clarity to examples. It is important to maintain eye contact; talk to your audience, not the visual aid throughout your presentation. Practice going through your presentation and coordinating your points with your visual aids when discussing them. Avoid passing hard copies of your visual aids around to the audience as it is often a distraction. Do try to provide interactive aspects into your visual aids that involve the audience such as polls, feedback requests, and interactive activities.
Here are some examples of visual aids:
Photographs
Drawings or diagrams
Graphs
Display charts
Video excerpts
16.1.3: The Importance of Preparation
Preparing and understanding your visual aids is essential to improving the engagement, understanding, and memory of your audience.
Learning Objective
Indicate what factors speakers should consider when selecting and preparing visual aids
Key Points
In preparing your visual aids, you should consider three important components: Are your visual aids appropriate for your audience? Are your visual aids easy to understand and easy to read or view? Do you know what is on your visual aids and can you present them effectively?
When creating a visual aid, make sure to consider the knowledge base, demographic background, occupation, and values of your audience.
Be sure to use text that is large enough (size 16 point font is a suggested minimum) and colors that do not conflict with one another. This ensures that words are legible.
An essential component of using visual aids effectively is to prepare yourself in understanding what is on them and determining how you want to explain them.
Key Term
demographic
A characteristic used to classify people for statistical purposes, such as age, race, or gender.
Example
Make sure to consider the knowledge base, demographic background, occupation, and values of your audience when creating a visual aid. For example, you may not want to use examples and images that one generation or age group may not understand.
Appropriate preparation of your visual aids is essential in making sure that they are effective in helping to improve the engagement, memory, and comprehension of your audience. In preparing your visual aids, you should consider three important components:
Are your visual aids appropriate for your audience?
Are your visual aids easy to understand and easy to read or view?
Do you know what is on your visual aids and can you present them effectively?
Are your visual aids appropriate for your audience?
Once your topic has been decided upon and your research is underway, it’s time to think about how you plan to present your information in visual aids. Of the several angles that need to be addressed in regards to delivering a speech, the most important thing to keep in mind is, “Who is my audience? ” Never underestimate the importance of knowing your audience. If your audience can’t understand your visuals, you’ll find it much harder to accomplish your objective.
Make sure to consider the knowledge base, demographic background, occupation, and values of your audience when creating a visual aid. For example, you may not want to use examples and images that one generation or age group may not understand. Your decision to use visual aids such as PowerPoint, charts, or any kind of demonstrative props will have a sizable impact on your audience, so they should be given careful thought.
Choosing Visual Aids
The speaker should carefully select visual aids that are relevant to the topic and the audience.
A polar area diagram by Florence Nightingale (1820–1910). It’s titled “Diagram of the causes of mortality in the army in the East.”
Are your visual aids easy to understand and easy to read or view?
When you are preparing your visual aids, you should make sure that your audience will be able to read and understand what they are saying. Be sure to use text that is large enough (size 16 point font is a suggested minimum) and colors that do not conflict with one another. This ensures that words are legible. Make sure that any photos, charts, and diagrams are easily understood within the first few seconds of looking at them. If they are not easily understood, be sure to spend time during your presentation explaining what the photos or charts mean.
Additionally, one way to make sure that people in the back of the presentation can read your visual aids is to print off a full page slide of your presentation, place it on the floor and stand up and see if you can read the entire slide. If you cannot read it, people in the back of the room during your presentation will also likely not be able to read your slide. One other consideration is to be sure that you are comfortable using any technology that you will use to assist the presentation of your visual aids. You must also make sure that the location of your presentation has this working technology available to you.
Do you know what is on your visual aids and can you present them effectively?
An essential component of using visual aids effectively is to prepare yourself in understanding what is on them and determining how you want to explain them. If you are using pictures, graphs, or charts to help you explain a point, be sure that you understand the graph or picture and you are comfortable explaining this to an audience. If you are confused about a graph during your presentation, or do not do an adequate job of explaining a graph, your audience will also likely be confused about the graph as well. Such confusion will detract from audience engagement and comprehension.
Before you present, go through your graph, charts, and pictures. In your notes, write where each visual aid is presented in your presentation, what they mean, and how you plan to present them. Be sure to rehearse this before your presentation so your visual aids can be as effective in helping your audience be engaged, understand your presentation, and remember your key points.
16.2: Types of Sensory Enhancements
16.2.1: Physical Objects and Animations
Physical and animate objects can help to integrate the verbal and visual elements of a presentation into one unified message.
Learning Objective
Indicate when using physical and animate objects is appropriate in presentations
Key Points
Choosing the appropriate object for a presentation depends on the speaker’s preference, as well as the content and setting of the presentation.
Ultimately, objects should enhance rather than detract from a presentation.
Using physical objects is often necessary when demonstrating how to do something so that the audience can fully understand the procedure or process.
Key Terms
LCD
A flat panel display, electronic visual display, or video display that uses the light modulating properties of liquid crystals. Liquid crystals do not emit light directly.
prop
An item placed on a stage or set to create a scene or scenario in which actors perform. Contraction of “property”.
Physical and Animate Objects
In today’s media-driven world, public speakers have a plethora of visual aids to choose from when augmenting their presentations. From LCD projections to flip charts, visual aids help presenters inform and persuade audiences, as well as help them understand the presentation topic. Physical and animate objects can also help integrate the verbal and visual elements of the speaker’s presentation into one unified and memorable message.
Using Objects
Physical and animate objects can help audiences better understand the topics being presented.
Ron Davis holds a lightbulb box at the EcoCampus Dedication.
Objects as Visual Aids
Ultimately, objects should enhance rather than detract from a presentation. The use of objects as visual aids involves using actual objects as live demonstrations or props for the audience. For example, a speech about tying knots would be more effective by bringing a rope. Using physical objects is often necessary when demonstrating how to do something so that the audience can fully understand the procedure or process.
The use of physical and animate objects in formal presentations is the same as in stage acting where actors use still and animated props. For the objects to be as effective as possible, they must be positioned in a way where they are quickly detected and easily understood by the audience. A common mistake involves placing an object where it is obstructed or hidden from view, or in front of a more interesting object that divides the audience’s attention. Speakers must also be cognizant of objects that are too large or inconvenient for stage use.
Choosing Objects for Presentations
There are many physical and animate objects available for presentations. Choosing the appropriate visual aids depends on the speaker’s preference, as well as the content and setting of the presentation. Objects can be both beneficial or distracting during speeches. Therefore, presenters should prepare and plan ahead accordingly to ensure that objects are appropriate for the audience and material being presented.
16.2.2: Chalkboards, Flip Charts, and Transparencies
Visual aids including chalkboards, flipcharts, and transparencies help presenters weave words and images together into a cohesive message.
Learning Objective
Distinguish between the use of chalkboards, dry boards, whiteboards and flipcharts during presentations
Key Points
While chalkboards are typically used in academic settings, universities and organizations employ dry boards for presentations and record-keeping.
Chalkboards, dry boards, and flipcharts allow for fast, simple and easy use by presenters who may not be familiar or comfortable with presentation software tools.
Transparencies are used across a wide variety of organizations, allowing for easy note-taking and steady eye contact during presentations.
Despite its heavy use in academia, transparencies are quickly becoming outdated and being replaced by computer-based presentation tools.
Key Term
transparency
specifically, a transparent material with an image on it, that is viewable by shining light through it.
Chalkboards, Flipcharts, and Transparencies
Visual aids such as chalkboards, flipcharts, and transparencies are used by presenters to help weave their words and images together into a cohesive message. Using visual tools effectively during a presentation helps speakers appear prepared, professional, interesting, and credible. Writing tools and imagery also help audience members focus on and remember the presenter’s major points, as well as better understand the presenter’s argument.
Choosing Visual Aids
Modern chalkboards are often made with green slate stone so that the writing is easier to read.
Chalkboards: From School to the Workplace
Although we often think of chalkboards in academic or teaching settings, chalkboards (or dry boards) are also commonly used in business environments. Chalkboards are reusable writing surfaces where text and drawings are made using sticks of calcium sulfate or calcium carbonate known as chalk. Chalkboards were originally made of smooth, thin sheets of black or dark grey slate stone. Modern versions are often green because the color is considered easier for reading.
Organizations typically use dry boards, which use dry erase markers for easy application and removal. These boards can be used for presentations, as well as advertisements or record-keeping.
In presentations, chalkboards and dry boards provide significant flexibility for recording audience responses and jumpstarting discussions. This spontaneity allows for fast, simple and easy use by presenters who may not be familiar or comfortable with presentation software tools.
On the other hand, writing on a chalkboard or dry board can delay presentations. Presenters may be tempted to speak to the board instead of the audience. Also, the chalkboard’s size limits visibility for large groups. Presenters with poor spelling or illegible handwriting can also pose problems for audience members.
Flipcharts in Presentations
Like chalkboards and dry boards, flipcharts have a low learning curve, allowing anyone with the ability to write to quickly convey information to audience members. Flipcharts are typically stationary items consisting of pads of large paper sheets fixed to the upper edge of a whiteboard. These are typically supported on a tripod or four-legged easel. Invented by Peter Kent, who built one to help him in a presentation, flipcharts are commonly used for presentations.
Flipcharts come in various forms, including:
Stand-alone flipcharts
Metallic tripod (or easel) stands
Metallic mounts on wheels
Recently, scientists have developed a digital self-writing flipchart which writes word-for-word everything it is instructed to record. Self-heightening flipcharts such as the POGO system are also being introduced into public use. However, traditional flipcharts where text is usually hand-written with marker pens are still widely used in organizations.
Transparencies in Business, Academia, and the Church
In today’s information age, digital presentations and slideshows are by far some of the most widely used visual aids in public speaking. However, transparencies are still used by a variety of organizations. A transparency, also known in industrial settings as a “viewfoil” or “foil”, is a thin sheet of transparent flexible material, typically cellulose acetate, onto which figures can be drawn. These are then placed on an overhead projector to display to an audience.
Many companies and small organizations use a system of projectors and transparencies in meetings and other groupings of people; though this system is being largely replaced by LCD projectors and interactive whiteboards. In academia, mathematics and history classes traditionally used transparencies to illustrate a point or problem. Math classes in particular used a roll of acetate to illustrate sufficiently long problems and create illustrations that were difficult to do on computers due to a lack of math symbols on standard computer keyboards.
Nevertheless, more colleges are switching to digital projectors and PowerPoint presentations. In churches and other religious organizations, religious leaders used transparencies to show sermon outlines and illustrate certain topics such as Old Testament battles and Jewish artifacts during worship services.
While transparencies allow presenters to maintain eye contact with the audience, and multitask (e.g. take notes), they often appear plain looking with no motion or sound. Moreover, transparencies must be shown in dim lighting, which may potentially cause visibility problems for viewers. As a result, overhead projectors are quickly becoming outdated and being replaced by computer-based presentation tools.
16.2.3: Static Representations: Images, Drawings, and Graphs
Physical cues such as images can help to reinforce a speaker’s message.
Learning Objective
Discuss the appropriate placement of images, graphs, and drawings in presentations
Key Points
Static imagery can either serve as a useful visual tool to further emphasize or support a speaker’s point, or confuse audiences and detract from the speaker’s message.
Photographs, maps, and handouts are all examples of visual aids that employ static imagery.
Bar graphs, line graphs, and other types of graphs are used in both static and electronic presentations to visualize relationships between different quantities.
Drawings or diagrams can be used when photographs do not show exactly what the speaker wants to show or explain.
Key Term
typography
The appearance and style of typeset matter.
Static Presentations: Images, Drawings, and Graphs
Visual communication, as the name suggests, conveys ideas and information in forms that can be read or looked upon. Audiences partially rely on vision to receive a speaker’s message, using physical cues, signs, typography, drawing, graphic design, illustration, color, and electronic resources. Public speakers often employ a variety of presentation tools—including drawings, paintings, and graphs—to inform, educate or persuade a person or audience. Although static in nature, non-electronic imagery has both advantages and disadvantages when used as visual aids in presentations.
Drawings
Drawings can be used in place of complex or detailed photographs.
A drawing that’s labeled with hand-written notes to add clarity.
The Many Uses of Images in Presentations
Images can be any two-dimensional figure such as a map, a graph, a pie chart, or an abstract painting. In this wider sense, images can also be rendered manually (e.g., by drawing, painting, carving) or automatically (e.g., by printing, computer graphics technology). Static images such as photographs, paintings, and illustrations can serve as useful visual tools to further emphasize or support a speaker’s point. However, if the images appear unrealistic, too small, or confusing, they can hinder the presentation and dilute the speaker’s message.
Examples of static images used in presentations include:
Photographs – Photographs are helpful tools to make or emphasize a point, or to explain a topic when the actual object cannot be viewed. For example, photographs are particularly useful for displaying historical places and sites that no longer exist.
Maps – Maps show geographical areas of interest. They are often used as aids when speaking of differences between geographical areas or showing the location of something.
Handouts – Charts, graphs, pictures, illustrations, and other images can be printed on handouts for distribution before, during, or after a presentation. An important aspect of the use of a handout is that a person can keep the handout long after the presentation is over. This helps the person better remember what was discussed.
Graphs and Data
Graphs are used in both static and electronic presentations to visualize relationships between different quantities. Various types of graphs are used as visual aids, including bar graphs, line graphs, pie graphs, and scatter plots. Graphs are particularly helpful for visualizing statistics that might be overlooked if just presented verbally. However, it is graphs’ complexity—detailed calculations, complex data and large figures—that cause them to become cluttered during use in a speech. Graphs often include too much detail, overwhelming the audience and making the graph ineffective.
Drawings in Presentations
Drawings or diagrams can be used when photographs do not show exactly what the speaker wants to show or explain. It could also be used when a photograph is too detailed. For example, a drawing or diagram of the circulatory system throughout the body is a lot more effective than a picture of a cadaver showing the circulatory system.
Nevertheless, talent and skills are usually needed for professional drawings that require significant detail or realism. If not done correctly, drawings can look sloppy, be ineffective, and appear unprofessional.
16.2.4: Dynamic Representations: Video and Multimedia
For speakers, multimedia allows dynamic customization and increased chances for audience engagement during presentations.
Learning Objective
Illustrate how multimedia tools can enhance audiences’ experience
Key Points
Presenters may use navigation devices such as text links, picture thumbnails, or miniature screenshots to move around spontaneously within and between large collections of interconnected content.
Although studies have revealed that audiences are more engaged during presentations that employ dynamic elements, there have been no assessments as to whether using multimedia improves learning and retention of presentation material.
Multimedia such as video enhances the experience of the audience member, and can help presenters convey information more easily and quickly than static presentations.
Integrating multimedia with online applications and hardware elements can ease the job of presenters by adding emphasis and bringing attention to specific points in the presentation.
Key Term
multimedia
The use of different media to convey information; text together with audio, graphics and animation, often packaged on CD-ROM with links to the Internet.
Dynamic Representations: Video and Multimedia
Presenters may use navigation devices such as text links, picture thumbnails, or miniature screenshots to move around spontaneously within and between large collections of interconnected content. Using these relational presentation techniques allows presenters to interact with rather than “talk at” audiences .
Multimedia in Presentations
Presenters often use multimedia in presentations to make the content more engaging for audiences.
Audience Reception of Dynamic Content
Although studies have revealed that audiences are more engaged during presentations that employ dynamic elements, there have been no assessments as to whether using multimedia improves learning and retention of presentation material. Regardless of whether speakers use static or dynamic content, all presentations must present consistent and compelling information within a limited time frame. The various formats of technological or digital multimedia available to presenters may be intended to enhance the users’ experience, quickly and easily convey information, or transcend everyday experiences.
Software Presentation Programs
Presentation software programs provide public speakers with the ability to display video, photography, and other dynamic content in slideshow formats suitable for small and large audiences. For example, Apple’s iPhoto allows groups of digital photos to be displayed in a slideshow with options including transitions, looping functions, and the integration of music and digital photos. Zooming presentation programs such as Prezi present content on one infinite canvas. This allows for non-linear presentations where presenters can present richer detail of content, as well as provide a better overview and understanding of complex visual messages and relations.
Multimedia Tools in Presentation Software
Many presentation programs come with pre-designed images (clip art) and/or have the ability to import graphic images. Some tools also have the ability to search and import images from Flickr or Google directly from the tool. Custom graphics can also be created in other programs such as Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator and then exported.
Similar to programming extensions for an operating system or web browser, plugins for presentation programs can be used to enhance their capabilities. For example, it would be useful to export a PowerPoint presentation as a PDF document. This would make delivery through removable media or sharing over the Internet easier. Since PDF files are designed to be shared regardless of the platform, this format would allow presentations to be more widely accessible.
Certain presentation programs also offer an interactive, integrated hardware element designed to engage an audience (e.g., audience response systems) or facilitate presentations across different geographical locations (e.g., web conferencing). Integrated hardware devices such as laser pointers and interactive whiteboards can ease the job of the presenter by adding emphasis and bringing attention to specific points in the presentation.
16.2.5: Slideshows
A slideshow is an on-screen presentation of information and/or ideas presented using overhead projectors, photos, or presentation software.
Learning Objective
Explain how slideshows are used for personal and business purposes
Key Points
Presentation software is most commonly used for instructional purposes, usually with the intention of creating a dynamic, audiovisual presentation.
Before the introduction of motion pictures and computer software, slides originally were projected onto a theater screen via magic lanterns.
In addition to business presentations, slideshows are used to provide dynamic imagery for museum presentations and installation art, and for saving personal memories as digital photo albums.
Key Terms
annotation
The process of writing comments or commentary.
phenomenological
Using the method of phenomenology, by which the observer examines the data without trying to provide an explanation of them.
magic lantern
An early form of slide projector that could achieve simple animation by moving and merging images.
Slideshows
A slideshow is an on-screen presentation of information and/or ideas presented on slides. Since the late 1960s, visual artists in museums and galleries have used slideshows as a device for presenting specific information about an action or research, or as a phenomenological form in itself. Before the advent of motion pictures, slides originally were projected onto a theater screen by magic lanterns. This practice later evolved into moving picture shows .
Building a Slideshow
Consumers can use online programs such as Flickr to assemble photo slideshows.
A screenshot of Flickr’s login page.
Even after the introduction of motion pictures, slides continued to be used between film showings to advertise for local businesses or advise on theater decorum—for example, by requesting that gentlemen remove their hats and refrain from smoking, and urging mothers to remove crying infants from the auditorium.
Slideshows were later conducted using apparatuses such as a carousel slide or overhead projector. Most recently, modern slideshows are commonly assembled using presentation software such as Microsoft PowerPoint or Prezi.
Personal and Business Uses
Presentation software is most commonly used for instructional purposes, usually with the intention of creating a dynamic, audiovisual presentation. The relevant points and imagery of the entire presentation are placed on slides and accompanied by a spoken monologue. The old adage “a picture is worth a thousand words” holds true, in that a single image can save a presenter from speaking a paragraph of descriptive details. As with any public speaking or lecturing, a certain amount of talent, experience, and rehearsal is required to make a successful slideshow presentation.
Slideshows have artistic uses as well. They are often used to provide dynamic imagery for museum presentations and installation art. Consumer uses of slideshows include personal screensavers, and digital photo slides for display. Vendors or consumers can custom make slideshows using their using photos, music, wedding invitations, birth announcements, or other digital files. The slideshows are typically placed onto DVDs, converted into HD video format, or saved in an executable file for computer use. Ultimately, photo slideshow software—coupled with digital cameras and computer technology—has made it easier to create photo slideshows, eliminating the need for expensive color reversal film.
Common Slideshow Features
Photo slideshow software often provides a wide range of editing features. For example, users can add transitions, pan and zoom effects, video clips, background music, narrations, and captions.
Slideshows created using presentation software result in a file sometimes referred to as a “slide deck” or simply a “deck” in business settings. Some key features useful in desktop or cloud-based presentation software include screen capturing, image editing and annotation tools, and slide transition and text effects.
Web-based slideshows are slideshows that can be viewed or presented using a web browser. Some web-based slideshows are generated from presentation software, but may be difficult to modify. Others offer templates where slideshows can be easily edited and changed. Web-based slideshows are typically generated or authored in HTML, JavaScript, and CSS code (files). However, compared with desktop presentation programs, web-based slideshows are usually limited in features.
16.3: Preparing Sensory Enhancements
16.3.1: The Do’s of Using Sensory Enhancements
Using sensory enhancements correctly will make your presentation come to life.
Learning Objective
Discuss the best practices of using text, video, sound, graphics and animation in presentations
Key Points
During your presentation, your audience will see you and your visual aids.
It is important to pay attention to the quality of the text as well as what is actually said.
Learners are attracted to colors and may find programs without color to be boring.
Video is a great attention grabber but may distract the audience from more important information.
Key Terms
color-blind
Of a person or animal, unable to distinguish between two or more primary colors (usually red and green).
animation
The technique of making inanimate objects or drawings appear to move in motion pictures or computer graphics.
Introduction
When you give a presentation, you are truly alive, as being on stage activates all of your senses. You see your audience waiting to receive your wisdom. You hear the noise they make as they shift in their places. You smell the scent of success that accompanies a job well done. You taste the nervousness bubbling in your gut. You feel your heart beating faster, your legs shaking.
Shouldn’t your presentation make your audience come alive, too?
Sight
During your presentation, your audience will see you and any visual aids you may include.
You
The audience is going to have to look at you throughout the the entire presentation. You want to keep them engaged by:
Dressing in a way that suits your personality (Could you imagine Steve Jobs giving a presentation wearing a suit and tie? )
Wearing colors that suit the setting and appeal to the audience
Showing confidence through your body movements (Even when Steve Jobs was speaking about iPhone 4 “defects,” you knew that he was in control)
Using gestures that go with your message
Text
Some useful suggestions for using text as a video presentation are:
Text should be read from left to right, top to bottom
Use consistent indentation and spacing
End sentences or paragraphs on the same display screen
Text Quality
According to Alessi and Trollip (2001), the five important factors that should be used in determining the quality of text are:
Leanness: Say the bare minimum
Transitions: Should be used when moving from one topic to another to facilitate the flow of ideas
Clarity: Use language that is comprehensible by your target audience as well as consistent words for defining terms
Reading level: Ensure that the reading level is suitable to the learners intended to use it
Mechanics: Always remember to correct grammar, spelling and punctuation
Color
Color should draw attention to the important terms or concepts in your presentation. Color should be consistently used throughout the design of the presentation. Learners are more attracted to colors and may find programs without color to be boring.
Power of Color
Using color in a presentation catches the audience’s attention and highlights important facts.
Colored pencils arranged in a circle.
One of the disadvantages of using color is that color-blind individuals may miss out on some information in certain colors.
Useful suggestions for using color:
Be consistent with use of colors
Use color to indicate a difference or change
Try to keep color use to a minimum
Make sure that there is a good contrast between the background and the color of the text to allow the audience to read it easily
Video
Video is a great attention grabber, but may distract the audience from more important information.
Here are some useful suggestions for using video:
Use video to emphasize important information
Pay careful attention to where video is placed in the presentation
Make sure the length of the video is appropriate
Ensure that you have control over the video as far as pausing, ending and repeating
Sound
Your voice can serve as a sensory enhancement. To make it effective:
Add variety to your tone
Speak loudly and clearly
Use proper enunciation and pronunciation
If you use sound other than your own voice:
Use sound as an attention grabber if it makes sense to do so
Use high quality sound
Graphics and Animation
Graphics and animation should enhance the presentation.
Useful suggestions for using graphics and animation:
Use graphics that are consistent throughout presentation
Sometimes less is better
Decide if a realistic picture is necessary or not
Some graphics may need to be broken into smaller pictures
When using text and graphics, present both simultaneously
An effective presentation or speech will touch your audience; an alive audience is likely to take action.
16.3.2: The Don’ts of Using Sensory Enhancements
Using visuals in presentations is a good way to make sure people remember them, but it is important to do so in the proper manner.
Learning Objective
Identify the common missteps presenters make when using sensory enhancements in presentations
Key Points
According to research carried out at UCLA, a visual presentation is five times more likely to be remembered after three days than a presentation using bullet points.
When using objects in a presentation, set aside time for the audience to examine the object so it doesn’t detract from the speech.
If using audio to enhance a speech, make sure it is loud enough to be heard without distracting the audience.
Be careful with scents in a presentation, so as not to offend or distract the audience.
A presentation with sensory enhancements should be practiced, so you can make sure that any problems are rectified ahead of time.
Key Terms
acoustics
The physical quality of a space for performing music.
clip art
A set of images, distributed as files with other software, that may be copied and pasted into documents or other files.
Don’ts of Using Sensory Enhancements
If sensory enhancements aren’t used properly, they can detract or distract from a presentation.
Awakening the Senses
Sensory enhancements are good in presentations, but they can be a distraction if they aren’t used correctly.
A drawing of a man’s head that shows all of the senses – sight, hearing, smell, and taste.
Visual Missteps
The famous psychologist Albert Mehrabian showed that the way people take in information during a presentation is 55% visual, compared to 38% vocal and only 7% through text. Yet simply adding a few visuals into a presentation may not be the solution. There are a number of traps that people fall into.
Using Bullet Points: According to research carried out at UCLA, a visual presentation is five times more likely to be remembered after three days than a presentation using bullet points.
Corny Images: These often have actors showing emotions such as surprise or happiness. The difficulty is that they can look very corny. Additionally, if the photos are a few years old, the fashions can look very dated.
Using Clip Art: An idea behind its time. Clip Art used to be a great way of making a presentation visual—particularly when computers were less powerful and every presentation had be small enough to fit onto a floppy disk. The problem now is that clip art looks very dated compared to a color photograph.
Grainy Pictures: Generally these images are taken from a web page and increased in size. The problem is that, since they were saved as small files to make them load quickly, they do not enlarge well .
Copyright Theft: It’s easy and tempting to just lift an image off the web, but you must obtain the permission of the copyright owner before you can use any image.
Images Purely for Decoration: A picture is worth a thousand words. So why would you slap down any old image just to fill up a bit of space? Instead of an image showing how their products could suit a wide range of businesses, their graphic design agency had added a picture of a horse! Relevance is everything.
Long Video Clips: It can be helpful to add a video clip into a visual presentation, but be aware that an audience’s attention will dwindle if the clip is too long.
Audio Missteps
If you are going to use sound in a presentation, make sure that it is appropriate to the setting and subject matter. Don’t have the audio so loud that people can’t hear the speech properly or that it distracts the audience from your speech. You should also make sure that it isn’t so soft that it can’t be heard properly by everyone in the room.
Touch Missteps
If you bring objects for the audience to touch and examine during the presentation, you will want to bring more than one item so that you can have the objects pass around the venue quickly. You’ll also want to schedule a period of time during your speech for the examination, otherwise people will be paying more attention to the object and miss important elements of the speech.
Sense Missteps
Some people are sensitive to smells, so if you are including this aspect into your presentation, make sure the scent isn’t too strong or cloying. You want to be able to enhance your speech without distracting or offending your audience.
The Important of Preparation
Preparation is the most important part of sensory enhancements. Make sure that you practice your presentation in the same room in which it will be delivered. Check acoustics, visibility, and the ability to deliver objects and scents in the room without distraction. Have people listen and experience your presentation beforehand, so you can adjust any mistakes before the final presentation and ensure that your speech goes as smoothly as possible.
16.3.3: Design Tips
Designing an effective and engaging presentation in PowerPoint or other presentation program requires simple graphics, fonts, and structure.
Learning Objective
State the design best practices that should be incorporated into PowerPoint presentations
Key Points
Do not write your entire presentation on your PowerPoint. Rather, use bullets and sub-bullets to break up the text into manageable, easy-to-read chunks.
Be consistent with your color themes.
Use at least 18-point font for main points and smaller font sizes for sub-points.
Use a font color that is readable and stands out against the background.
Use graphics.
Key Terms
PowerPoint
(noun) an electronic slide presentation created and presented using the program (verb) to communicate to (an audience) by electronic slides
design
To plan and carry out (a picture, work of art, construction etc. ).
Introduction
Let’s face it. Love it or hate it, PowerPoint, or PowerPoint type slides, are the most common form of visual aid seen during a presentation. We all know that we have encountered boring power points presentations with an overload of information and lack of creativity. Developed by Microsoft, PowerPoint is a presentation software that enables users to communicate text, graphics, video, and other content via electronic slides.
The following design tips can help users develop effective PowerPoint presentations, while keeping in mind PowerPoint etiquette.
PowerPoint Presentation
Using software, like PowerPoint, allows the speaker to create an engaging presentation.
PowerPoint Tips
Do not write the entire presentation on your PowerPoint. Instead, create bullet points and headings no longer than three to five words that give the main points.
Present no more than five to seven lines per slide.
Use two slides rather than cramming too much information into one.
Be consistent with your “theme” throughout the presentation (i.e., do not use a different theme for each slide).
Do not overuse transitions. They are meant to enhance, not overwhelm your presentation.
Be careful with your color scheme. Again, this is meant to enhance your presentation. Make sure the audience can read the text.
Make an outline of what you will be talking about so listeners can know what to expect from the presentation.
Use at least an 18-point font for main points and a smaller sized font for sub-points. Avoid using complicated and unreadable font.
Use a font color that stands out against the background.
Easy-to-Read Text and Graphics
Use graphics! People identify items more quickly with images rather than just text alone. When creating your visual aids, however, make sure your text and graphics are readable.
Labeling
Use headlines and sub-headlines in a larger font.
Bold, italicize, or CAPITALIZE important information.
Use bullet points or create lists to organize material. Make sure this is “nice” to look at (i.e., easy-to-read).
Charts and graphs
Make sure the information is clear and supports your presentation. Color coordinate charts/graphs if necessary.
Use text to support/explain your charts and graphs (be brief but cover the high points).
Avoid charts and graphs that can be misleading to your readers.
Wording and Lettering
Use large, easy-to-read fonts.
Be concise, using as little text as possible. Also use simple language to avoid confusion.
Limit your text to one or two fonts.
Think of the demographic (e.g., age) of your audience when setting font size and type.
Minimize the number of lines to no more than six lines per slide with six words per line.
→Overcrowding slides is common and can be easily avoided by limiting the amount of text.
Color
Use color for clarity and emphasis, not for decoration.
Use color schemes.
Keep a similar color scheme throughout the entire presentation.
Use contracting colors to highlight main points.
16.3.4: The Role of Color
When properly used color should draw attention to the important terms or concepts in your presentation.
Learning Objective
Describe how color can be used to enhance presentations
Key Points
One of the disadvantages of using color is that individuals who are colorblind may miss out on some information in certain colors.
Do not “waste” information by using unnecessary colors.
It may also be useful to apply some color psychology when choosing which colors to use.
Key Term
color-blind
Of a person or animal, unable to distinguish between two or more primary colors (usually red and green).
Introduction
When properly used color should draw attention to the important terms or concepts in your presentation. They can also create emotion. Color should be consistently used throughout the design of the visuals to achieve these goals.
Learners and audiences are more attracted to colors and may find presentations without color to be boring. Some presenters change up their color schemes regularly to prevent their presentations from becoming too monotonous. You can also change the shades of your colors.
Using Color Effectively
Color can be used in a presentation to get the audience’s attention.
The sun shines through stained glass windows at the Nasir ol Molk Mosque located in Shiraz, Iran.
One disadvantage of using color is that individuals who are color-blind may miss out on some information in certain colors. Using certain shades, and using them consistently, can eliminate this problem.
Useful Suggestions for Using Color
Be consistent with the use of colors.
Use color to highlight a difference or change.
Try to keep color use to a minimum; each color should communicate necessary information.
Make sure that there is a good contrast between the background and the color of the text to allow the learner to read the text easily.
Use color for clarity and emphasis, not for decoration.
The Psychology of Colors
It may also be useful to apply some color psychology when choosing which colors to use. Basic internet research uncovers a whole host of analysis on the meanings of different colors.
Something else to consider is that on flip charts, blue, black, and green inks have the best visibility. People say that blue is the most pleasing color to view. Red comes in second, even though it is not the most visible. But too much red can be too strong. Avoid using purple, yellow, pink, and brown, which can be more difficult to see.
When creating graphs, bright colors will bring focus to a small graph while subtle colors will keep a large graph from overwhelming the audience.
16.4: Presenting with Sensory Enhancements
16.4.1: The Do’s of Using Visual Aids
Visual aids should be easily understood, aesthetically pleasing, easy to move, easily seen and heard, and act as a supplement to the speech.
Learning Objective
List best practices for presenting visual aids in a speech
Key Points
Presentation aids must be easily understood by the audience. Graphic elements should be large enough to be easily seen and/or read.
Presentation aids must be easy to transport. In addition, you should make sure you know to use presentation equipment ahead of time.
The design of your presentation should not detract from the content of your speech.
Consider whether you can understand if each visual aid is addressing and furthering the key point of your presentation.
Visual aids are useful to help the audience better understand your topic if they are used as a supplement to your presentation.
Key Terms
extraneous
Not essential or intrinsic.
verbatim
A word-for-word report of a speech.
Visual aids are essential to helping your audience better understand the key points of your presentation. Visual aids will also help to improve the attention span of audience members during the presentation. However, it is important that presenters use visual aids in a manner that does not distract from the overall presentation. An effective visual aid will include the following attributes:
Easily seen or heard by the audience
Easily handled
Aesthetically pleasing
Easy to understand the key point
Act as a supplement to the speaker’s message and not a replacement
Easily Seen or Heard by the Audience
Presentation aids must be easily understood by the audience, even those sitting at the very back of the room. Graphic elements in presentation aids must be large enough to be easily seen and/or read. Similarly, audio elements must be loud enough to hear.
Easily Handled
Your presentation aids should be easy to transport. In addition, you should make sure you know how to use presentation equipment ahead of time. You should seamlessly incorporate presentation aids into your speech. You don’t want your audience to be distracted by these elements.
Aesthetically Pleasing
Your visual aids should not detract from the content of your speech. Keep your presentation simple so people can focus on the content rather than the aesthetics. The decisions you make when you design your visual aids should be very deliberate. If you add color to a visual aid, for example, use it for a clear purpose.
PowerPoint Presentation
The
audience should be able to quickly understand the key point of each slide in a PowerPoint presentation.
An audience views a PowerPoint presentation.
Easy to Understand the Key Point
If your PowerPoint slides or handouts have too much extraneous information, then the audience may not be able to understand the takeaway message of the presentation. A way to test if your visual aids are addressing the key point is to ask someone who is unfamiliar with your presentation if they can understand what the key point is. If they cannot determine the key point, it may be a good idea to revise your visual aids to include less non-essential information.
Supplement not Replace, the Presentation
Visual aids are useful to help the audience better understand your topic if they are used as a supplement to, and not a replacement for, your presentation. For example, a visual aid that replaces a presentation could be a PowerPoint that includes big blocks of text that the presenter reads verbatim. While this will be an accurate presentation, it will likely bore the audience members who will not gain much from the presentation. However, if the visual aid acts as a supplement, it will enhance the audience member’s understanding through diagrams, graphs, charts, and summaries.
16.4.2: The Don’ts of Using Visual Aids
Some “don’ts” of visual aids include inconsistent themes, small fonts, too much information, and distracting noises and animation.
Learning Objective
Discuss the missteps presenters should avoid when using visual aids
Key Points
If your visual aid has inconsistencies in color scheme or theme, the audience may become confused since color change may indicate a change in topic.
Avoiding small font is essential to making sure that the audience can read your visual aids. A general standard is to make sure that all PowerPoint slides are at least 18-point font to ensure that audience members in the back row will be able to read your presentation.
Try to keep the amount of information on each slide to a minimum and use only what is necessary to convey the key point of the visual aid or slide.
Avoid distracting animation and noises. These will take the focus of the audience away from your presentation and shift it toward the noise or animation instead.
Key Term
Detract
Take away the value of.
Visual aids can be effective at enhancing your presentation and helping the audience better understand the key points of your presentation. However, if visual aids do not help your message or are too confusing, they may actually detract from the presentation and hinder understanding. Some key “don’ts” of using visual aids include:
Inconsistency in color scheme or theme
Small or complicated font or overwhelming text or graphics
Too much information or too many slides
Distracting animation or noises
Inconsistency in Color Scheme or Theme
If your visual aid has inconsistencies in color scheme or theme, the audience may become confused since color change may indicate a change in topic. Consistency in theme and color will help coordinate all of the information in your presentation and will help the audience understand the topics in relation to one another. There are a number of default themes that Microsoft PowerPoint offers that can help unify your color scheme and theme.
Small or Complicated Font or Overwhelming Text and Graphics
Avoiding small font is essential to making sure that the audience can read your visual aids. A general standard is to make sure that all PowerPoint slides are at least 18-point font to ensure that audience members in the back row will be able to read your presentation. Additionally, you should avoid overwhelming text and graphics as they will distract from the main topics and points of your presentation.
Complicated Graphics
The speaker should avoid using complicated graphics in a presentation.
The “aggregate supply” and “aggregate demand” curves for the AS-AD model.
Too Much Information or Too Many Slides
Try to keep the amount of information on each slide to a minimum and use only what is necessary to convey the key point of the visual aid or slide. Additionally, try to keep the number of slides or visual aids in your presentation to a minimum. A rule of thumb is to use each slide in a PowerPoint for 30 seconds to a minute of your presentation. Remember that the majority of your presentation should come across in what you are speaking about rather than through the text on your visual aids.
Distracting Animation or Noises
Avoid distracting animation and noises. These will take the focus of the audience away from your presentation and shift it toward the noise or animation instead.
16.5: Using PowerPoint and Alternatives Successfully
16.5.1: The Advantages and Disadvantages of PowerPoint
PowerPoint is a quick and easy way to organize ideas and information, but can encourage the creation of presentations that lack substance.
Learning Objective
Name the advantages and disadvantages of using PowerPoint
Key Points
PowerPoint is regarded as the most useful, accessible way to create and present visual aids; others believe it has its own mind-set which forces presenters to spend countless hours thinking in PowerPoint and developing slides.
Advantage—easy to create colorful, attractive designs using the standard templates and themes; easy to modify compared to other visual aids, such as charts, and easy to drag and drop slides to re-order presentation.
Advantage—easy to present and maintain eye contact with a large audience by simply advancing the slides with a keystroke, eliminating the need for handouts to follow the message.
Disadvantage—speakers create slides so they have something to present rather than outlining, organizing, and focusing on their message.
Disadvantage—the linear nature of PowerPoint slides forces the presenter to reduce complex subjects to a set of bullet items which are too weak to support decision-making or show the complexity of an issue.
Disadvantage—basic equipment required to present. You will need to have a computer and projection equipment in place to display the slides to the audience.
Key Terms
PowerPoint
(noun) an electronic slide presentation created and presented using the program (verb) to communicate to (an audience) by electronic slides
bullet points
Bulleted items – known as bullet points – may be short phrases, single sentences, or of paragraph length; used to introduce items in a list.
Advantages and Disadvantages of PowerPoint
PowerPoint—Advantage or Disadvantage for the Presenter?
PowerPoint is the most popular presentation software. It is regarded by many as the most useful and accessible way to create and present visual aids to the audience.
On the other hand, others believe it has created its own mind-set which forces presenters to spend countless hours thinking in PowerPoint and developing slides. A political party has even formed to ban PowerPoint in Switzerland. Depending on one’s perspective, it seems that many advantages could easily be viewed as disadvantages.
Using PowerPoint
When used correctly, PowerPoint is a helpful program for creating an engaging presentation.
A screenshot of a slide in Microsoft PowerPoint.
Look over the list below to see where you stand—with or against PowerPoint.
Advantages
Design
Quick and easy: the basic features are easy to master and can make you appear to be organized, even if you are not.
Simple bullet points: it can reduce complicated messages to simple bullet points. Bullet points are a good basis for a presentation and remind the speaker of main points and the organization of the message.
Easy to create a colorful, attractive design: using the standard templates and themes, you can create something visually appealing,even if you do not have much knowledge of basic graphic design principles .
Easy to modify: when compared to other visual aids such as charts, posters, or objects, it is easy to modify.
Easily re-order presentation: with a simple drag and drop or using key strokes, you can move slides to re-order the presentation.
Finally, PowerPoint is integrated with other products that allow you to include parts of documents, spread sheets, and graphics.
Delivery
Audience Size: PowerPoint slides are generally easier to see by a large audience when projected than other visual aids.
Easy to present: you can easily advance the slides in the presentation one after another with a simple key stroke while still maintaining eye contact with the audience.
No need for Handouts: they look good visually and can be easily read if you have a projector and screen that is large enough for the entire room.
Disadvantages
Design
Design power pointless: gives the illusion of content and coherence, when in fact there is really not much substance or connection between the different points on the slides.
PowerPoint excess: some speakers create presentations so they have slides to present rather than outlining, organizing, and focusing on the message.
Replaces planning and preparation: PowerPoint is a convenient prop for poor speakers, as it can reduce complicated messages to simple bullet points and elevates style over substance.
Oversimplification of topic: the linear nature of PowerPoint forces the presenter to reduce complex subjects to a set of bullet items that are too weak to support decision-making or show the complexity of an issue.
Feature abundance: while the basic features are easy to use and apply, a speaker can get carried away and try to use all the features at once rather than simply supporting a message. Too many flying letters, animations, and sound effects without seeing much original thought or analysis can be a real issue. In many cases, the medium shoves the message aside.
Delivery
Basic equipment required: you will need to have a computer and projection equipment in place to display the slides to the audience.
Focus on medium, not message: Too many people forget that they are making a presentation first and that PowerPoint is just a tool.
16.5.2: An Overview of PowerPoint
Microsoft PowerPoint is a computer software package that displays information in the form of a slide show.
Learning Objective
State the arguments for and against using PowerPoint as a visual aid
Key Points
PowerPoint presentations consist of a number of individual pages or “slides,” with individual slides containing text, graphics, sound, video, or other objects that can be arranged by the presenter.
A PowerPoint presentation can be automatically controlled by pre-programming transitions from one slide to another, or manually controlled by a user.
Supporters of PowerPoint say the presentation software is easy to use and can save a lot of time for by replacing the need for a variety of different visual aids.
Some opponents of PowerPoint argue that the program encourages the reduction of complex ideas into simplified points, while others contend that the program encourages overstuffing presentations with too much information, both of which negatively effect the audience’s experience.
Key Term
PowerPoint
(noun) an electronic slide presentation created and presented using the program (verb) to communicate to (an audience) by electronic slides
An Overview of PowerPoint
PowerPoint is a presentation software program . A presentation program (also called a presentation graphics program) is a computer software package used to display information, normally in the form of a slide show. It typically includes three major functions: an editor that allows text to be inserted and formatted, a method for inserting and manipulating graphic images, and a slide-show system to display the content.
PowerPoint
PowerPoint software runs on Microsoft and Mac operating systems. It allows users to
create visual presentations comprised of individual slides.
Commander Naval Reserve Force, Vice Adm. John G. Cotton, stands in front of a PowerPoint presentation at the Naval Station North Island’s theater.
Microsoft PowerPoint 9 is easy-to-use presentation software that runs on Microsoft Windows and Mac OS operating systems. PowerPoint is commonly used by business people and students to create slide show presentations. The ease of use is demonstrated by the fact that the program can be used by junior high and high school students. PowerPoint can accommodate a range of uses, with intermediate to more technical options. Microsoft estimates that thirty million presentations are made each day using the PowerPoint program. As of 2012, various versions of PowerPoint claim approximately 95% of the presentation software market share, having been installed on at least 1 billion computers.
PowerPoint Logo
With 95% market share, PowerPoint presentation software is one of the most widely used programs for developing visual presentations.
PowerPoint has almost become a generic term similar to Xerox or Coke or Google and is often used when one is referring to any computer supported presentation, thus demonstrating how ubiquitous the program has become.
The Use of Slides in PowerPoint Presentations
PowerPoint presentations are comprised of a number of individual pages, or “slides. ” The “slide” analogy is a reference to slide projectors. Unlike slide projectors however, which only projected static images, slides in PowerPoint are more dynamic. They can include text, graphics, sound, movies, and other objects, which can be arranged by the presenter. The PowerPoint presentation can be printed, displayed live on a computer, or navigated through at the command of the presenter. For larger audiences the computer display is often projected using projection equipment. The slides can also be used as the basis for a webcast.
After designing the individual slides for your presentation, you can control the presentation by pre-programming the transitions from one slide to another with the exact timing you want. Or, you can advance the slides manually as you speak about each.
Supporters and Critics
Supporters of the software say the PowerPoint can save people time by circumventing the need for other types of visual aids, such as hand-drawn or mechanically typeset slides, blackboards, whiteboards, or overhead projections. Because the software is easy to use, it encourages people to give presentations that contain visual aids who otherwise may not have even given a presentation.
PowerPoint does have its critics, and the benefits of the software are continually debated. Some critics of PowerPoint argue that condensing complex issues into simplified bullet points is detrimental, and compromises the quality of information provided to the audience. This view finds that audience do not receive enough detailed information to make informed decisions about presentation topics. Additionally, there are also some critics who say that rather than providing too little information, PowerPoint allows users to put too much information into presentations. This can lead to “death by PowerPoint,” which is a state of bordem or fatigue as a result of sitting through a presentation that contains too much information.
As is clear from the debate about its merits, PowerPoint can present many benefits and challenges to a user who develops a slideshow to accompany a speech or presentation.
16.5.3: The Elements of a Slide
PowerPoint is a multi-media platform that incorporates elements of written, audio, video, and graphical communication.
Learning Objective
Break down the elements that comprise a PowerPoint slide
Key Points
The most basic element of a PowerPoint presentation is the slide.
Slides are comprised of a combination of textual and visual elements.
Text may be organized as captions, paragraphs, or bulleted points.
Add graphics such as shapes, pictures stored on your computer, pictures retrieved online, and charts or tables from other programs such as Excel.
To add video clips, search for them from within the PowerPoint platform using Bing, Flickr, and Youtube, and import them directly into a slide.
Key Term
slide
A single page of a presentation, developed using a presentation program such as Microsoft PowerPoint. Collectively, a group of slides may be known as a slide deck or slide show.
Elements of a Slide
The basic element of the presentation is the slide. The new default aspect ratio of the slide is 16:9 for wide screens, but the previous aspect of 4:3 is still available. Some basic example elements used to compose a slide are as follows:
Titles and sub-titles: After first opening PowerPoint to start a new presentation using the Blank Presentation Template, the user can select a title and sub-title for the presentation, using one of a variety of fonts and colors.
Text: Users can enter the content as bullets on the slide along with a title for the slide. They can also select the font style, size, and content to support their message.
Shapes: PowerPoint can merge two shapes together to create a custom shape.
Pictures: Users can search for and insert their own photographs. Remember to re-size the photo to fit the slide.
Charts/Graphs: Create custom charts or move relevant charts from Excel spreadsheets.
Audio/Video Clips: Download videos, images, and audio files directly into a slide for a presentation without first downloading to the computer. Search for audio and video from within PowerPoint to find images using Bing or Flickr and videos on You Tube. After locating the desired supporting media, incorporate it into the slide. By default, the results show images that are licensed under Creative Common, so the images can be used in presentations without violating an owner’s copyright, but users can also view all results.
Transitions: Transitions move the presentation gracefully from one slide to the next or build the side dynamically. There are many standard transitions available, or users can program their own special effects to animate the movement of the sides.
PowerPoint Slide
PowerPoint allows users to create slides and add animation, transitions, and video and audio clips.
A screenshot of an empty slide in PowerPoint 2013.
16.5.4: Formatting Tips
Formatting choices, including layout, font selection, transitions and use of space and color, are important components of a presentation.
Learning Objective
Give examples of how to best format a PowerPoint presentation
Key Points
The blank template provides an initial format that allows a user to clearly distinguish main points from subpoints and supporting material.
In the body of a slide, use keywords and phrases instead of sentences as listed bullet items to help the audience skim the slide and see relationships between main and sub-points.
Insert and re-size visuals such as WordArt, shapes, charts, graphs, images, or pictures from your own computer or from the internet, into a slide to provide support for claims.
Audio and video clips of a high quality not only clarify or provide support an idea, but also improve the quality of a presentation. Avoid videos with low resolution or poor quality audio clips, as they may affect audience perception.
When using effects to transition from one slide to another, avoid slow moving or fancy effects such as crawl in, swivel and spiral. Don’t overuse special effects and keep transition choices consistent.
After the Presentation – you can format and export your slides to a Word Document for handouts or share by email, pdf, or internet.
Key Term
Placeholder
dotted or hatch-marked borders for entering text, charts, tables, or images on a slide.
PowerPoint Features
PowerPoint incorporates elements of written, oral, and visual communication. By focusing on decisions regarding blank space or color, contrast, and font, you can design a presentation that is not only aesthetically appealing, but also enhances and underscores key content and objectives. The following tips will help you and your audience get the most from your presentation.
Formatting the Slide
Templates: You may either select an existing template or design your own. The blank template allows you to modify colors, themes, and the style of different elements to best suit your needs.
Normal view – Blank Presentation template: The blank presentation template provides placeholders for title and sub-title on the first slide, and additional placeholders for the title on each blank slide. This allows you to distinguish your main points from sub-points. Follow basic design rules:
Use blank space to group or separate items.
Use visual balance to please the eye.
Create contrast to make objects stand out. Contrast occurs when any two elements are different.
Colors: Choose colors so that text is clearly legible. In addition, consider how the colors will look in the space where the slideshow will be presented. For example:
Picking Colors
In a presentation, there can be different colors and fonts, but all of the text must be easy to read for the audience.
A graphic that uses colors to show the interrelationships between main areas of sustainable development.
Strong light reduces contrast on dark background.
In a well-lit room, use light background with dark text and visuals.
In a dimly-lit room, use dark background with light text and visuals.
Avoid vibrating colors. Bright complementary colors that are close to each other in intensity “vibrate” or reduce legibility.
Adding Content
Text: Use text properly.
Use keywords and phrases instead of sentences.
Be consistent in your use of capitalization.
Put similar ideas in the same formatting by using the same parts of speech, same clauses, phrases, or all complete sentences.
Organization
On a slide, information can be organized using bullet points or lists.
A screenshot from the Rice University website that illustrates how to use bullet points.
Use bullet points. Bullets help the audience skim the slide and see relationships between main and sub-points. Here is how to use bullets:
Select the “bulleted list” or “two-column list” slide (from the pre-designed slide formats).
Type a phrase then hit “return.”
Type a second phrase, hit “return” then hit “tab” to indent.
OR use “promote” or “demote” arrows at top to create a bulleted hierarchy, in order to distinguish main claims from subclaims.
Creating a Contrast
A speaker can create contrast in a presentation changing the font, color, or size.
A heading that uses contrasts and says “Principles of Design.”
Fonts: Choose easy-to-read fonts.
Select fonts that are good for projecting, not ones that are just good for printing.
Pay attention to the legibility of the font you choose, such as the contrast between background and text, size of the font, and any type treatment such as shadowing that may reduce legibility.
Graphics: Insert needed visuals such as WordArt, shapes, or images. Make sure to re-size the images to best fit the slide. Here is how to re-size images:
Click on the visual you wish to resize.
Go to “format” and then “object” or “autoshape.”
Select “size.”
Change size and scale.
OR, simply click and drag the corners of the image.
You can also combine two different shapes by selecting one and then selecting and dragging another into it for a custom image.
Video and Audio: You can search and select video in different media formats. Just click to select the video/audio and insert where you want them to play on the slide. You can also record your own audio to add to a slide. When choosing video or audio to add to your presentation, make sure that it is of a high quality. This enhances the authority of the presenter as well as improves audience receptivity.
Moving Between Slides
Effects and transitions: PowerPoint comes with a preset collection of transitions. You can choose different types of transitions to move between slides. Newer versions of PowerPoint even have some 3D transitions. In addition, there are many free transition templates available from Microsoft and open sources.
Effects between slides: Effects should have a point and support the overall concept of the presentation. Avoid slow moving or fancy effects such as crawl in, swivel, and spiral. Don’t overuse special effects as they can distract your audience from your main points. To avoid this from happening, keep effects and transitions consistent.
After the Presentation
Handouts: You can export your PowerPoint presentation to a Word Document. When you do this, there are different choices available for how slides and notes are positioned. In the latest version of PowerPoint you can go to File—-> Export and then click on the {Create Handouts} button. Your presentation will then be exported to a Word document for formatting.
Share: You can also share your PowerPoint presentation by email, through web access. or publish your slides so that others can access them electronically rather than having to distribute handouts.
16.5.5: Delivery Tips
PowerPoint presentation software is your assistant and should help you by supporting your presentation, not taking over the show.
Learning Objective
Illustrate how PowerPoint features can be used to communicate to audiences
Key Points
Rehearse the show to see what it will really look like when it is presented to an audience; try controlling the movement from one slide to next or preprogramming the amount of time for each slide to appear on the screen.
The content of the slides serves as a guide or outline for you and the audience, so you want to make sure you talk about each slide, not read the content to the audience who can read what is projected.
Presenter View allows you to see your notes on your monitor while the audience only sees the slide. While you move from one slide to the next you can also zoom in on a particular part of the slide or use a pen or laser pointer to call attention to specific details.
Relational presentation practitioners structure small message units that are rather self-contained and can be pulled together as the speaker interacts with the audience.
Key Terms
Relational
A type of interactive presentation using presentation software that is structured to allow dynamic customization of the message while presenting.
linear
Pertaining to or resembling a line; step-by-step in order.
PowerPoint Software Is Your Assistant
PowerPoint presentation software is your assistant and should help you, not take over the show. Nothing can substitute for a carefully prepared message, whether that message is a standard linear message or a relational interactive message. The delivery of the message is guided by the best practices that you have been using throughout your speeches; however, there are some special considerations when working with PowerPoint.
Practice and Rehearsal
After putting together a PowerPoint slide show, you will want to get a “reality check” by actually running the show to see what it will look like when you present it. You may control the movement from one slide to the next as you speak, or you may preprogram the amount of time that each slide appears on the screen and speak only for that amount of time.
If at all possible, rehearse with the same display equipment in a similar space. If you are speaking to a colocated audience, make sure that your projected slides are large enough for all members of the audience to see (usually about 1 inch high for each 10 feet that separates the audience from the projected slide). Additionally, if you are speaking to a remote audience, check your display so that you can see the presentation in the same way that the audience will see it on their screens.
Basic Delivery
One critical aspect of delivery is avoiding the temptation to read the content to the audience; the audience can read what is projected themselves. The content of the slides serves as a guide or outline for you and the audience. Stand to the left of the screen . For the English speaker who reads from left to right, the audience will see you as their eyes move across the screen in one continuous left to right eye movement. And remember to speak WITH the audience, not AT them .
Delivering a Speech
The speaker delivers the speech with assistance from PowerPoint slides in the background.
Vice Adm. John G. Cotton, is silhouetted during PowerPoint Presentation.
Using Views
Using PowerPoint Views allows you to follow a linear path or relational interactive paths for delivery.
Slide Show View
You can use the Slide Show view to deliver your presentation. The slide occupies the full screen and displays the way your presentation will look when you project it. You can use the Slide Show view to see the slide show on your computer screen one slide at a time. You can move to the next slide by clicking the mouse or using the up and down arrow keys.
Presenter View
You can see your notes on your monitor while the audience only sees the slide. You can also zoom in on a particular part of the slide or use a pen or laser pointer to call attention to details. In Presenter view, you can display the current slide on the left side, the next slide on the right, and the notes at the bottom right of the screen.
Interactive Relational Delivery
Relational presentation (also known as visually interactive presentation) uses standard presentation software such as PowerPoint in a way that allows for dynamic customization of messages while presenting.
Relational presentation practitioners structure their material using a combination of strategies to develop and access small message units. Each small message unit is rather self-contained and can be pulled together as the speaker interacts with the audience. While presenting, you interact with the audience rather than “talk at” them. You can use the Presenter view to quickly select and navigate to each message unit spontaneously within and between collections of interconnected shows. Some of these navigation devices use text links and others incorporate picture thumbnails or miniature screenshots as link sources.
Navigation in a Presentation
Whether you are delivering a traditional, linear message or an interactive, relational presentation, it is helpful to gain control of the basic movements for the slide show.
Interact with the Audience
It’s important that the speaker maintains eye contact with the audience while projecting the slides.
A man sitting at a desk with a laptop. He is speaking to the audience.
Move to the last slide: Drag the scroll box to the bottom of the scroll bar or press [Ctrl] and [End]
Move to the first slide: Drag the scroll box to the top of the scroll bar or press [Ctrl] and [Home]
Move to the next slide: Click in the scroll bar below the scroll box or press [Page Down]
Move to the previous slide: Click in the scroll bar above the scroll box or press [Page Up]
Move to a specific slide: Drag the scroll box up or down until you displays the slide you want
Delivery Wrap-Up
So to wrap it up, you should prepare your lecture before firing up your software. Remember that the technology is your assistant and should help you, not take over the show. You may creatively deliver a linear presentation, but you can also use PowerPoint to craft a highly interactive relationship experience with the audience.
16.5.6: Other Presentation Software Options
Microsoft PowerPoint dominates the presentation software market, but other options include Mind Maps, SlideRocket, and Prezi.
Learning Objective
Describe the different software programs available as an alternative to PowerPoint
Key Points
Presentation software’s three major functions: an editor allowing text to be inserted and formatted; a method for inserting and manipulating graphic images; and a slide-show system to display the content.
Mind Maps break away from the linear format by using graphic symbols to show connections between different ideas.
SlideRocket is an online presentation platform that lets users create, manage, share and measure presentations.
Prezi is a free, web- based application allowing users to create visual presentations by zooming in, out and around a visual work space.
Google Docs is a free SaaS part of Google Drive, and includes its own presentation software.
There is a move at present away from traditional presentation software towards mobile-friendly solutions developed for tablets and smartphones such as Haiku Deck or Explain Everywhere.
Key Term
Presentation Software
A computer software package used to display information; typically includes text editor, method for inserting and manipulating graphic images and a slide show system to display content
Alternatives to PowerPoint Presentation Software
Presentation software is a computer software package used to display information, normally in the form of a slide show. The software typically includes three major functions:
an editor that allows text to be inserted and formatted;
a method for inserting and manipulating graphic images, and;
a slide-show system to display the content.
Microsoft PowerPoint dominates the market with 95% of the presentation software market share. However, there are other presentation graphic programs with different features and approaches. Some of the alternatives to PowerPoint include:
Mind Maps You can use mind maps to plan and modify your presentation. Mind Maps break away from the linear format of PowerPoint by using graphic symbols to show connections between different ideas, allowing the presenter to show a top level map and then drill down to show details for different connecting ideas. For presentation slides, you can start with a general, top level map and then create additional slides to drill down to the subtopics. You can summarize the sub points and then go back to the main, top-level mind map to show the connection to the whole.
Mind Map Software
A graphic and conceptual layout that can be used for non-linear presentation.
A sample layout using Mind Map software.
SlideRocket is an online presentation platform that lets users create, manage, share and measure presentations. SlideRocket is provided via a monthly SaaS model or an annual subscription plan. You can also import your PowerPoint presentations or Google Presenter presentations into SlideRocket.
Users initially sign up for a free 14-day trial then decide which plan to subscribe to. Users can also use a free, basic version of the software. In addition, SlideRocket premiered the presentation resume with a variety of templates for users to promote themselves to different companies.
Prezi is a free application which allows you to create visual presentations by zooming in, out and around your visual workspace.Instead of individual slides, these ZUI’s (zoom user interface) are based on one infinite canvas on which all content is presented. This allows for non-linear presentations, richer detail of content, and a better overview of complex visual messages. Prezi also has a mobile app for tablet users.
Prezi
Prezi is web-based presentation software that uses zoom interface rather than individual slides.
Google Docs is now a part of Google Drive’s “software as a service” office suite. The free service includes it own presentation software that can be exported in open office format as well as Microsoft Office. Google Docs are automatically saved to a Google server, which prevents loss while also offering”anytime, anywhere” access.
Internet based collaboration
Another option with all these different packages is internet based collaboration. Using this method, several people revise content or review the changes as they are made by others.
In theory, people tend to select specific aspects of exposed information based on their pre-existing perspective, beliefs, attitudes, and decisions.
Learning Objective
Define selective exposure and explain its relation to persuasive speaking
Key Points
The selective exposure theory is a concept that refers to individuals’ tendency to favor information that reinforces pre-existing views while avoiding contradictory information.
Selective exposure operates by reinforcing beliefs rather than exposing individuals to a diverse array of viewpoints.
Perceived usefulness of information, perceived norm of fairness, and curiosity regarding valuable information are three factors that can counteract selective exposure.
Key Terms
selective exposure
The selective exposure theory is a concept in media and communication research that refers to individuals’ tendency to favor information that reinforces pre-existing views while avoiding contradictory information.
audience
A group of people within hearing; specifically a group of people listening to a performance, speech etc.; the crowd seeing a stage performance.
Introduction
Does It Conform?
Similar to an audience enjoying a concert, the success of a persuasive speech can depend on people’s pre-existing views.
Benjamin Zander plays a piano on stage and connects with the audience.
The selective exposure theory is a concept in media and communication research that refers to individuals’ tendency to favor information that reinforces preexisting views while avoiding contradictory information. This theory suggests that people tend to select specific aspects of exposed information based on their perspective, beliefs, attitudes, and decisions. People can determine the information exposed to them and select favorable evidence, while ignoring the unfavorable.
This theory has been explored using the cognitive dissonance theory, which suggests information consumers strive for results of cognitive equilibrium. In order to attain this equilibrium, individuals may either reinterpret the information they are exposed to or select information that is consonant with their view.
The premise of selective exposure relies on the assumption that information-seeking behavior continues even after an individual has taken a stance on an issue. Previous information-seeking behavior will be colored by various factors of the issue that is activated during the decision-making process. Thus, selective exposure operates by reinforcing beliefs rather than exposing individuals to a diverse array of viewpoints, which is considered an important aspect of a functioning democracy.
There are several factors that persuade one when making decisions. Physical characteristics, age, and more hold power to sway perception, luring people into habits of selective exposure. People often stray away from new information because it conflicts with their own beliefs; because information and resources are critical to learning this habit cripples the ability to learn new concepts and skills.
Selective exposure influences and family, friends, co-workers, even skilled professionals like doctors. Media forms such as the internet, television, and paper sources are also inclined to selective bias.
Selective exposure has been demonstrated in various contexts such as self-serving situations and situations where people hold prejudices regarding out-groups, particular opinions, and personal and group-related issues. The perceived usefulness of information, perceived norms of fairness, and curiosity regarding valuable information are three factors that can counteract selective exposure. Remember this as your prepare your persuasive speech.
How does selective exposure theory affect decision-making?
Selective exposure can affect the decisions people make because people may not be willing to change their views and beliefs. Changing beliefs about one’s self, other people, and the world are all challenges that cause people to fear new information.
A variety of studies have shown that selective exposure effects can occur in context of both individual and group decision making.
Selective exposure can interfere or prevent the gathering of new information. Selective exposure is prevalent in both groups of people and individually. In Jonas et al. (2001) empirical studies were done on four different experiments investigating individuals’ and groups’ decision making. This article suggests that confirmation bias is prevalent in decision making.
Those who find new information often draw their attention to areas where they hold some personal attachment. Thus, information that supports the expectations or beliefs held by the person draw greater attention, in keeping with selective exposure theory. Throughout the four experiments, generalization was reliably considered valid and confirmation bias was always present when test subjects sought new information and made decisions.
Tips for the Speaker
Be prepared. Like it or not, you are going to face selective exposure from your audience as you try to persuade them to accept your stance. When preparing your speech, remember that perceived usefulness of information, perceived norm of fairness, and curiosity regarding valuable information can counteract selective exposure.
15.1.2: Don’t Expect Too Much
The expectations for both the speaker and the effectiveness of the speech should be tailored for each speech.
Learning Objective
Modify your expectations for your speech and your performance
Key Points
The expected effectiveness of each speech depends on a number of factors, such as the audience, venue, time allotted, and the speaker’s experience.
The expected quality of the delivery depends on the speaker’s experience and comfort. Even the most gifted speakers make mistakes, so expecting perfection from a novice is unreasonable.
Anxiety of public speaking sometimes is derived from the idea that the audience expects perfection. In reality, most audiences are sympathetic and want the speaker to succeed.
Key Term
persuasion
the process aimed at changing a person’s (or a group’s) attitude or behavior
Persuasion is the influence of beliefs, attitudes, intentions, motivations, or behaviors to convince an audience of something. A persuasive speech should move the audience further along the pathway to believing that the espoused point of view is correct, but not all views can be explained in one speech and not every audience can be swayed at once.
The expectations of each persuasive speech should be tailored to the context of the speech. Factors such as the speech itself, the audience, the venue, the time allotted, and the speaker’s experience all need to be considered. For example, if you are not a doctor but are asked to give a five minute speech to the American Heart Association about why fast food is the best food for heart health, your chances of persuading everyone is pretty low. Even if you are the expert in the room, not everyone will be persuaded because each person requires different processes to be convinced. The purpose of the persuasive speech is to get the audience to think about your point of view and to accept some of the vital points, not necessarily to make them buy everything you’re selling.
Setting Expectations
Martin Luther King’s “I Have a Dream” speech is one of the most historic and powerful speeches in history.
Similarly, the expectations for the delivery of the speech should not be set too high. For a novice speaker to expect that he/she will never mispronounce a word, get nervous, or skip a paragraph is unreasonable. Every speaker goes through the process of making mistakes, and few, if any, speakers ever deliver a perfect speech. The expected quality of the delivery of the speech depends on each individual speaker’s experience and comfort level, though even the most gifted orators make mistakes.
Some of the anxiousness that often accompanies preparing for a speech is derived from the idea that the audience expects perfection. However, the surprising truth is that, in most cases, the audience is a sympathetic friend. Whether or not the audience knows who you are, human nature dictates that they are very sympathetic to you and what you have to say. Most people appreciate the difficulty of your role, understand that you have something to say, and want the time they spend listening to you to be worthwhile. In other words, before you start speaking, most audiences have a vested interest in wanting you to succeed, and that translates into an attentive, supportive group.
15.1.3: Employ Empathy and Sensitivity
Appeals to empathy and sensitivity can be exceedingly effective, but only if used correctly.
Learning Objective
List the benefits and drawbacks of using an emotional appeal in your speech
Key Points
Appeals to empathy and sensitivity are called emotional appeals. Emotional appeals seek to impart certain feelings in the audience so that they will act a certain way. They can be much more powerful than logical arguments in some situations.
To deploy an emotional appeal you need to share carefully selected information that naturally makes your audience feel a certain way.
Audiences can sense inauthentic emotional appeals and react negatively because they feel that they are being negatively. Poorly used emotional appeals can have the exact opposite effect than intended.
Key Term
emotional appeal
An an attempt to make the audience feel certain emotions so that they will be more likely to be engaged by the speech. Also known as pathos.
Appealing to the empathy and sensitivity of the audience is broadly termed an emotional appeal. Emotional appeals can be a powerful rhetorical element of a persuasive speech. They are an attempt to make the audience feel something, and in the process, be persuaded by the speech . A crowd that is feeling something is much more likely to be engaged, give consideration to your arguments, and remember the speech.
Tapping into Emotions
A speaker can use emotional appeals in an attempt to get audience members to feel a certain way.
Appeals to empathy and sensitivity can create a sense of connection and trust between you and the audience. Since trust and connection are vital elements of being able to persuade an audience, emotional appeals can be incredibly useful.
However, emotional appeals can also backfire if used incorrectly. If taken too far, an appeal to emotion can seem to be forced. Audiences can tell the difference between an honest emotional appeal and an attempt is to manipulate how they feel. Audiences loathe feeling manipulated, so an audience that senses inauthentic motives will strongly reject both the appeal and the speaker.
When the emotional appeal is both authentic and appropriately used, you can develop a much stronger connection to your audience than by using logic alone. However, to misuse an emotional appeal is to completely alienate your audience, and even foster negative feelings.
15.1.4: Using Different Kinds of Appeals
The two primary kinds of appeals are evidential and emotional appeals.
Learning Objective
Identify the two most prevalent kinds of appeals
Key Points
Aristotle defined 3 types of appeals: logos (evidential), pathos (emotional), and ethos (based on moral standing). Logos and pathos are the two most common contemporary categories.
Evidential appeals (logical appeals, logos) are based entirely on evidence that is then shown to cause a certain outcome based on rationality alone. This is the type of appeal allowed in scientific research and in courts of law.
Emotional appeals (pathos) attempt to cause the audience to feel certain emotions in order to persuade them. Stories and metaphors are examples of emotional appeals.
Key Terms
evidential appeal
An attempt to show the logical connection between a set of evidence and a consequence. Also known as logical appeal or logos.
emotional appeal
An an attempt to make the audience feel certain emotions so that they will be more likely to be engaged by the speech. Also known as pathos.
Use Different Kinds of Appeals
According to Aristotle, there are three primary types of appeals:
Logos: A logical appeal. Also known as an evidential appeal.
Pathos: An appeal to the audience’s emotions.
Ethos: Moral expertise and knowledge.
For the purposes of this section, we will explore the two broadest and prevalent appeals, logos and pathos.
Logos (Evidential or Logical Appeal)
From a rationalist’s point of view, evidential appeals are the only type of appeal that truly matter. Evidential appeals are formed by defining the evidence and then explaining how the evidence must logically prove that a certain conclusion must be true. Evidential appeals are the only type of persuasive speech allowed in a court of law; the evidence must prove that the defendant has committed the crime in order for that person to be found guilty .
Evidential Appeal
The only type of rhetorical appeal accepted in a courtroom in an evidential appeal.
An empty courtroom.
Evidential appeals are also the basis for scientific research. A scientist must be able to show the connection between evidence and a conclusion in order for his/her work to be accepted. In persuasive speaking, the speaker must first explain the evidence in a way that is comprehensible to the audience, yet complete. Then the scientist must explain how that evidence logically leads to a consequence that supports his/her proposal.
Pathos (Emotional Appeal)
An emotional appeal is intended to cause the audience to feel a certain way so that they will be convinced by the speaker. Emotional appeals can manifest in a number of ways. Metaphors, stories, and passionate delivery are all emotional appeals because their effectiveness lies not only in the words, but in the emotions they evoke in the audience. Ultimately, the effectiveness of an emotional appeal is determined only by the audience. If the audience does not feel the intended emotions, by definition, the appeal has failed.
15.2: Credibility Appeals
15.2.1: Defining Credibility
Credibility is defined as the objective and subjective components of the believability of a source or message.
Learning Objective
Give examples of how to boost subjective and objective credibility
Key Points
Credibility is a composite of subjective and objective factors, so it relates to feelings and opinions, as well as facts and evidence.
The subjective component of a public speaker’s credibility centers on the speaker’s self-presentation.
The objective aspect of a public speaker’s credibility is based on the speaker’s expertise.
Key Terms
Objective
not influenced by irrational emotions or prejudices; based on facts or evidence.
subjective
formed, as in opinions, based upon a person’s feelings or intuition, not upon observation or reasoning; coming more from within the observer than from observations of the external environment.
credibility
The objective and subjective components of the believability of a source or message.
Defining Credibility
Unmasking Credibility
Credibility is personal. In order to establish credibility, unmask yourself and show the audience who you really are.
A picture of a person dressed in black spandex. All that’s visible is a white face mask.
What is credibility? Credibility is defined as the objective and subjective components of the believability of a source or message. Credibility is both objective, or based on facts and evidence, and subjective, based on opinions and feelings. This quality encompasses everything from your college degree or professional certification to the immediate “gut feeling” people get when they walk into the room.
Subjective Credibility: Self-Presentation
The subjective aspect of a public speaker’s credibility is based on the speaker’s self-presentation. Here are some tips for earning credibility on a subjective level:
Dress the part. Show the audience that you take the speaking engagement seriously, and that you hope to earn their respect. If you’re not sure how to dress, professional attire is always a safe bet.
Look at the audience. Establishing eye contact will make you seem open and trustworthy.
Speak loudly, clearly, and confidently. If you have confidence in yourself, the audience will too.
Objective Credibility: Expertise
Mark Twain once said that an expert is just “an ordinary fellow from another town. ” If only it were that easy! In reality, if you want to convince the audience that you are an expert, you will have to show some credentials. Here are three ways to establish objective credibility:
State your credentials. Audiences will trust you more readily if you can prove that other people value your expertise. Credentials include relevant degrees, certifications, testimonials, recommendations, work experience, volunteer experience, and informally, other types of personal experience.
Reveal a personal connection to your topic. Your input will have more weight if you can demonstrate that the topic means something to you.
Establish common ground with your audience. If you can explain that, ultimately, you all want the same thing, the audience will be much more likely to trust you and accept your message.
15.2.2: Types and Elements of Credibility
Experience, training, and associations and connections are all important factors that can boost credibility.
Learning Objective
Identify types of credibility and describe their use
Key Points
Personal experience in the workplace, at home, in a hobby, or volunteering situations can bolster your credibility. You can support the validity of your experience with testimonials and personal recommendations.
Formal or informal training that relates to your topic can also support your credibility.
If you connect yourself and your message to credible people, your own credibility will benefit from the association.
Key Term
credibility
The objective and subjective components of the believability of a source or message.
Types and Elements of Credibility
Credibility from Experience
Experience Is Important
These mountain climbers are scaling a sheer cliff in the Rhone-Alps of France. They have credibility due to their experience.
Imagine this scenario: you, a veteran mountain climber, are slated to give a speech about climbing safety to a group of mountaineers that is about to set off on a dangerous expedition. What would be the best source of credibility in that situation? Experience! The mountaineers would probably not be very impressed to hear that you read a book about climbing safety once, or that some of your best friends are mountaineers. However, if you bring in stories, photographs, and examples from your own climbing experience, you will assure them that you really know what you’re talking about. Drawing from your work experience, volunteering experience, hobbies, and informally, other types of personal experience can do a lot to boost your credibility as a speaker.
Credibility from Training
Do you have any formal or informal training that relates to your topic? If so, mention it during your speech to build your credibility. Relevant training programs and credentials include academic degrees, professional certifications, classes, conferences, and personal research. Even if your training isn’t directly related to your topic, there may be an indirect connection. Don’t feel obligated to stretch your story if it really doesn’t fit, but also don’t rule out training experiences that are out of your current field.
Credibility by Association
The first method for estimating the intelligence of a ruler is to look at the men he has around him.
-Niccolo Machiavelli
Machiavelli’s maxim teaches a valuable lesson: people will not only judge you on your own merits alone, but also on the merits of your associates. This rule isn’t only for rulers, it applies to public speakers too. If you want to be seen as a credible person, align yourself with other credible people. You can do this by citing testimonials from respected figures or mentioning personal recommendations that validate your expertise. Another approach is to quote prominent figures in your field, demonstrating an awareness of the issues and conversations that are current trends in that field.
15.2.3: Building Credibility
If you want to build credibility with your audience, you must demonstrate that you are a person of character.
Learning Objective
List ways to display personal character in order to build credibility with an audience
Key Points
Establishing your good character is a crucial part of winning the audience’s trust.
For a public speaker, character is not only about being a good person or a law-abiding citizen; speakers should also be looking out for the needs of their listeners.
To show your listeners that you care about their needs and interests, find common ground with the audience, appeal to shared beliefs and goals, and entertain potential objections.
Key Term
character
Moral strength; consistency of values and principles.
Character may almost be called the most effective means of persuasion. –Aristotle
You can not dream yourself into a character; you must hammer and forge yourself one. –James A. Froude
Greek philosopher Heraclitus’s famous maxim, “Character is destiny,” has echoed through the ages: if you want to win the audience’s trust, you must demonstrate that you are a person of character. Aristotle argues that establishing good character is one of the most important means of persuasion. Roman orator Quintillian defines persuasive rhetoric as essentially “the good man speaking well. ” British historian James A. Froude takes the colloquial idea of “building character” one step further, leading us to imagine a laborious undertaking in a blacksmith’s forge, shaping “character” with a hammer. The literature surrounding public speaking emphasizes the importance of establishing good character, but also admits that it is not easy.
Credibility, Character, and Caring
Personal character is an important addition to the elements of credibility we discussed in the last segment . However, it is important to note that, for a public speaker, character is not as simple as being a nice person or a law-abiding citizen. Public speakers are responsible for communicating something of value to a large group of people. A public speaker of character should listen to the needs of the audience, entertain potential objections, walk the audience through opposing viewpoints, and respond to questions. Show your listeners that you’re looking out for them. After all, why should they trust you if you don’t care about them? To bring the audience’s needs and interests to the forefront of your speech, follow these steps:
Building Credibility
Credibility is built through character, trustworthiness, experience, expertise, and associations/connections.
A room filled with oversized building blocks for children.
Find common ground with your audience.
Appeal to shared beliefs and values.
Identify a shared goal.
Return to this shared goal throughout the speech.
Demonstrate that you have considered other perspectives on the issue.
Show that you understand the appeal of opposing positions.
Make a case for your own position.
15.2.4: Ethical Usage
Credibility appeals, while an effective form of persuasive speaking, carry a unique set of ethical challenges and considerations.
Learning Objective
Explain the ethical challenges of using credibility appeals in persuasive speaking
Key Points
There are three types of appeal techniques in persuasive speaking: logos, pathos and ethos. Ethos is focused on the credibility appeal, that is, a rhetorical appeal to an audience based on the speaker’s credibility.
It is unethical to lie to your audience about who you are and what you bring to the table in terms of experience, credibility and authority.
When it comes to ethical usage of credibility appeals, stick to authenticity and speaking honestly about who you are.
Key Term
ethos
A rhetorical appeal to an audience based on the speaker/writer’s credibility.
Example
A job interview represents a persuasive speaking opportunity on a much smaller scale, one that relies heavily on the use of ethos. You are, in essence, persuading a potential employer to hire you on the merits of your abilities, skills and experience. An ethical job candidate will deliver a résumé and interview responses that are truthful, honest and complete about who they are and what they would bring to the job. An unethical use of ethos by a job candidate would be when one “pads” their résumé with experiences and honors that may not actually have happened or been achieved.
Ethical Usage of Credibility Appeals
Appeal Techniques
The three types of appeal techniques in persuasive speaking are logos, ethos, and pathos.
The words “logos,” “ethos,” and “pathos.”
Speeches grounded in the principles of rhetoric focus on three types of rhetorical appeals: logos, pathos, and ethos. While logos and pathos appeal to reason and emotion, respectively, ethos takes on a decidedly different approach entirely. Speakers using ethos seek to persuade their audience by demonstrating their own credibility and authority.
To elaborate, the construction of authority is reflected in how a speaker presents themselves, what diction they use, how they phrases their ideas, what other authorities to which they refer, how they composes themselves under stress, their experience within the context of their message, as well as their personal or academic background.
Ethical Considerations
Obviously, if you elucidate a persuasive portrait of your personal credibility and authority, you make a more persuasive case on the credibility and authority of your words. However, when building a persuasive case using ethos, it may be tempting to stray into territory that borders on the unethical. Consider the following example:
You might not realize it at first, but interviewing for a job is an abbreviated form of persuasive speaking. You’re trying to persuade an employer to offer you a job. This method of persuasion relies heavily on the use of ethos, as you’re trying to make your case as to why you’re the best person for the job.
When you submit your résumé and cover letter, you provide your potential employer with an overview of your skills, experiences and background and how they best fit with the position and company with whom you seek employment.
While many employers complete extensive background reviews and reference checks, they may not follow up with every single bullet point on your résumé. While it might be tempting to beef up your list of achievements by stretching the truth: naming yourself a college club president as opposed to member, listing an award you may have nominated for but not having won (without clarifying that fact) – these are all unethical ways of padding your résumé, and thus, unethically using ethos to persuade your potential employer to hire you for the job.
This same example holds true in more formal scenarios of persuasive public speaking. It is unethical to lie to your audience about who you are and what you bring to the table in terms of experience, credibility and authority. It is equally unethical to even bend the truth on the slightest detail about what makes you a credible or authoratative speaker on your given subject.
Whether it’s a flat-out moment of dishonesty or a simple “little white lie,” disingenuousness, once discovered, will eradicate any credibility or authority you have as a speaker. When it comes to ethical usage of credibility appeals, stick to authenticity and speaking honestly about who you are.
15.3: Evidentiary Appeals
15.3.1: Defining Evidence
Evidence refers to the available body of facts or information indicating whether a belief or proposition is true.
Learning Objective
Explain how accuracy, audience understanding and relevant context assesses the strength of evidence in persuasive speaking
Key Points
Accurate, contextual, easily understandable evidence builds credibility to your persuasive argument.
The success or failure of an evidential appeal depends on how well the evidence has been defined and laid out for the audience.
Any information used as evidence must be complete enough that it strengthens the appeal. Otherwise, weak evidence will only erode the argument.
Name and define the evidence only as comprehensively as the scope of the speech allows; dense supporting materials can actually confuse your audience by overwhelming them with too much or too deeply defined evidence.
Key Term
evidence
The available body of facts or information indicating whether a belief or proposition is true or valid.
Finding Evidence
Sherlock Holmes (played here by actor Benedict Cumberbatch) always looked for a solid body of evidence to indicate a particular criminal.
Evidence refers to the available body of facts or information indicating whether a belief or proposition is true. The facts and information affirm the validity of the idea. To understand it in the opposite, to lack evidence is to lack the validity of a belief or idea. Evidence builds credibility.
As the name suggests, evidential appeals rely on the use of evidence to persuade the audience. Evidential appeals can be used in both emotional and logical appeals, though the method for delivery differs. The success or failure of the appeal depends on how well the evidence has been defined and laid out for the audience.
In the context of persuasive speaking, evidence can be evaluated for its persuasive ability in the following three ways:
Accuracy: The evidence must be truthfully constructed and defined. For example, if an argument hinges on the premise that grass is purple, no rhetorical technique will be able to persuade the audience. Evidence must be accurate to be credible, as its credibility rests on its accuracy.
Audience Understanding:Evidence must be presented completely, but in a manner that the audience can comprehend. For example, an evidential appeal that uses rising carbon dioxide levels as evidence for stricter pollution regulation will not be effective if the audience does not know what carbon dioxide is or why it is bad for the environment. The audience must be able to understand the evidence before it is used in an appeal.
Relevant Context: The evidence must be defined within the context of the appeal. A textbook definition of the different types of bonds between the atoms of carbon dioxide is not relevant information for why the tax rate should be lowered.
Information used in evidential appeals must serve two purposes at once. First, it must be complete enough that it strengthens the appeal. If the evidence is weak, incomplete, or irrelevant, it does not help the appeal, and may even hurt its persuasiveness. Secondly, the evidence must be defined only as comprehensively as necessary. The purpose of an evidential appeal is to persuade the audience; overwhelming the audience with too much information or evidence may only confuse them.
15.3.2: Deploying Evidence
Deploy accurate, relevant, and thorough evidence strategically in order to most effectively argue your point.
Learning Objective
Explain why speakers must consider accuracy, relevancy, and thoroughness when deploying evidence in public speaking
Key Points
When crafting your speech, consider the following three areas: accuracy, relevance, and thoroughness.
Make sure that your evidence, be it facts, statistics, personal testimony, or other pieces of information, comes from credible sources.
Make sure your evidence is directly related to the points you are trying to make while also anticipating competing evidence that may contradict your line of reasoning.
By thorough by fully explaining and defining your evidence to your audience, but don’t overwhelm them in the process.
Key Terms
thorough
painstaking and careful not to miss or omit any detail
evidence
The available body of facts or information indicating whether a belief or proposition is true or valid.
Accuracy
Exact conformity to truth, or to a rule or model; degree of conformity of a measure to a true or standard value.
When using evidential appeals in your persuasive speech, make sure to deploy evidence strategically in order to most effectively argue your point.
Gathering Evidence
In persuasive speaking, the speaker must gather and deploy evidence strategically.
Members of an FBI response team gather evidence.
Strategies for Deploying Evidence Effectively
As you craft your persuasive speech, ask yourself the following questions:
Is My Evidence Accurate?
It can’t hurt to double check. Make sure that your evidence, be it facts, statistics, personal testimony, or other pieces of information, comes from credible sources. How do you know if it’s a credible source? If they are well-known, respected leaders or sources of information in a given field, you can be fairly confident in their credibility. As for web sources, make sure the site you’re accessing is impartial and unbiased. It’s also helpful to anticipate any questions your audience may have about your evidence, including any challenges they may make to its credibility or accuracy.
Is My Evidence
Relevant
?
Just how well does your evidence actually back up your argument? Just because it might be believable to you does not mean it will be as compelling to another. That disconnect might occur when your evidence is not actually relevant to your argument. Make sure your evidence is directly related to the points you are trying to make. Likewise, your audience may have evidence of their own to contradict your line of reasoning; anticipate these contradictions and argue your point with evidence to counter their disagreements. In short, keep your evidence relevant, but make sure to have more up your sleeve if needed to further prove your point.
Is My Evidence Thorough?
Sometimes your case may not be compelling simply because you haven’t fully supported your thesis. Your evidence may only skim the surface. It’s a fine balance between thoroughly explaining and defining your evidence to your audience and overwhelming them in the process. In this regard, it’s important to have a comprehensive understanding about the knowledge base of your audience. Let the lowest level of understanding in your audience dictate how thorough you need to be; at the same time, don’t over-explain or get into so much depth that you lose more of your audience than you win over.
15.3.3: Ethical Usage: Considering Other Viewpoints
Persuasive speakers have an ethical duty to consider opposing viewpoints and evidence before being sure that theirs are correct.
Learning Objective
Explain why considering other viewpoints is considered ethical in public speaking
Key Points
The same evidence can be interpreted differently by different people.
Falsified evidence (intentionally or unintentionally) is unethical to use. Finding false evidence that is due to statistical fallacy can only be found after deep critique.
If an argument can withstand the honest critique of an opponent and is based on true and complete evidence, then the appeal is on sound ethical ground.
Key Term
fallacy
An error in reasoning often due to a misconception or a presumption; used in informal discourse to mean an argument which is problematic for any reason
The honest consideration of other viewpoints is an ethical duty if you are a persuasive speaker seeking to convince the audience of something you believe to be true. You may be making the wrong conclusion based on the evidence or your evidence may be flawed, both of which can be shown by examining other views. Perhaps you and your opponent are using the same evidence but come to different conclusions. If you are able to consider other viewpoints and still believe in your original view, then you are ethically able to attempt to persuade others.
Different Viewpoints
Political debates highlight how people can interpret the same evidence different ways and come to opposing views.
Four candidates take part in the Chilean Presidential Debate.
As a persuasive speaker, there is always an incentive to invent, or even just fudge evidence so as to strengthen your appeal and weaken opposing viewpoints. However, this is akin to lying, and clearly unethical.
Furthermore, evidence must generally be accepted only after intense scrutiny. Statistics, and many types of evidence, do not fall neatly into the category of “true” or “false.” While there are some undeniable truths, such as the fact that the earth is round, there are many more that fall into a gray area. This is due to the fact that evidence comes from a process which may be flawed. When the process is flawed, there may be a statistical fallacy. For example, if a survey asks skewed questions, the results may not reflect the truth. Though many researches, scientists, pollsters, and investigators do their best to avoid fallacies, the possibility always exists that one may be proven.
Since it is very easy to unintentionally lie by not explaining all the nuances of the evidence and it is very easy to use evidence that may contain fallacies, it is the duty of every speaker to consider the viability of opposing viewpoints before rejecting them. It is your ethical duty to allow others to criticize your viewpoints because if your argument is truly sound and you are truly making the appeal to convince the audience of something that you believe to be true based on all the evidence, then your evidence should be able to withstand the scrutiny.
15.4: Logical Appeals
15.4.1: Different Lines of Reasoning
Apply two different lines of reasoning—inductive and deductive—to consciously make sense of observations and reason with the audience.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate the use of inductive and deductive reasoning
Key Points
Inductive reasoning, also known as induction, is a kind of reasoning that constructs general propositions that are derived from specific examples.
Inductive reasoning is probabilistic; it only states that, given the premises, the conclusion is probable.
One important aspect of inductive reasoning is associative reasoning: seeing or noticing similarity among the different events or objects that you observe.
Deductive reasoning is the process of reasoning from one or more general statements, laws, or principles regarding what is known, in order to reach a logically certain conclusion.
Key Terms
inductive reasoning
A kind of reasoning that constructs or evaluates general propositions that are derived from specific examples. Inductive reasoning contrasts with deductive reasoning, in which specific examples are derived from general propositions.
syllogism
An inference in which one proposition (the conclusion) follows necessarily from two other propositions, known as the premises.
deductive reasoning
The process of reasoning that uses given true premises to reach a conclusion that is also true. Deductive reasoning contrasts with inductive reasoning.
Reason is the capacity for consciously making sense of things. Reason, or “reasoning,” is associated with thinking, cognition, and intelligence. It is the means by which rational beings understand cause and effect, truth and falsehood, validity, and what is good or bad. The result is a reason that could then be used to explain or justify some event, phenomenon, or behavior.
As you develop arguments for your persuasive speech, you are likely to engage in two different lines of reasoning: inductive, which uses associations, and deductive.
Inductive Reasoning and Associative Reasoning
Inductive reasoning, also known as induction, is a kind of reasoning that constructs general propositions that are derived from specific examples based on previous observations. One important aspect of inductive reasoning is associative reasoning: seeing or noticing similarity among the different events or objects that you observe. For example, if you throw a ball in the air and it comes back down, again and again, you observe the same event happening and are likely to conclude that when you kick a ball in the air, it will come back down.
Inductive reasoning is probabilistic; it only states that, given the premises, the conclusion is probable. Consider these simple logical statements, known as syllogisms. Here is a statistical syllogism to illustrate inductive reasoning:
90% of humans are right-handed.
Joe is a human.
Therefore, the probability that Joe is right-handed is 90%. If you were required to guess, you would choose “right-handed” in the absence of any other evidence.
Here is another stronger example:
100% of life forms that we know of depend on liquid water to exist. Therefore, if you discover a new life form, it will probably depend on liquid water to exist.
This argument could have been made every time a new life form was found, and would have been correct every time. While it is possible that in the future a life form that does not require water will be discovered, in the absence of other factors, the conclusion is probably correct, as it has been in the past.
Inductive reasoning is used to determine properties or relationships based on previous observations or experiences, and then to formulate general statements or laws based on limited observations of recurring phenomenal patterns. The conclusion of an inductive argument follows with some degree of probability.
Inductive reasoning involves association or analogical reasoning. In order to engage in inductive reasoning, we must observe, see similarities, and make associationsbetween conceptual entities. The ability to structure our perceptions relies on the associative network in our brain, which allows us see the likeness and form a concept, about the similarities.
Deductive and Inductive Reasoning
There are key differences between deductive and inductive reasoning.
A chart that shows the differences between deductive and inductive reasoning based on the premise, conclusion, validity, and usage.
Deductive Reasoning
Deductive reasoning, also called deductive logic, is the process of reasoning from one or more general statements, laws, or principles regarding what is known, in order to reach a logically certain conclusion. Deductive reasoning involves using given, true premises to reach a conclusion that is also true. If you accept or know the general principle as true, then you can apply it to the specific case to conclude that it is also true.
Consider the general principle of the law a gravity: what goes up must come down. Now, when you throw the ball in the air, you conclude that it will fall down based on your knowledge of the general law of gravity. Deductive reasoning contrasts with inductive reasoning in that a specific conclusion is arrived at from the general principle when reasoning deductively. If the rules and logic of deduction are followed, this procedure ensures an accurate conclusion. Here is a classic example of a deductive argument:
All men are mortal.
John is a man.
Therefore, John is mortal.
The first premise states that all objects classified as “men” have the attribute “mortal. ” The second premise states that “John” is classified as a “man”—a member of the class or group of “men. ” The conclusion then states that “John” must be “mortal” because he inherits this attribute from his classification as a “man. ” If both premises are true, the terms are clear, and the rules of deductive logic are followed, then the conclusion of the argument follows by logical necessity.
Conclusion
In summary, with inductive reasoning, you are making observations of specific or particular events and then drawing a general conclusion; whereas with deductive reasoning, you are starting with a general statement and applying it to particular instances when you draw your final conclusion about a particular instance, person, or object.
15.4.2: Deploying a Rational Appeal
A rational appeal uses logical arguments and factual evidence to persuade individuals.
Learning Objective
Explain how to construct a rational appeal
Key Points
Deploying rational appeals focuses on reasoning and how you use evidence to reason with your audience and invention, how arguments are formed based on the classical proof of logos–rational appeal and logic.
The burden of proof is on you the speaker to develop the right appeals for the particular audience.
When deploying deductive reasoning consider whether or not the audience is likely to accept the general premise as valid and true before you attempt to deduce other ideas or courses of action based on the general premise.
When deploying inductive reasoning consider if you have observed or collected enough evidence to draw a highly probable conclusion.
When deploying associative reasoning, you will want to make sure that the ideas are indeed similar and that there are not obvious or outstanding differences which would negate the association you propose.
As you deploy a rational appeal consider if your reasoning is sound, whether the audience will accept your evidence and reasoning, and what objections the audience might raise so you can address the most significant points of disagreement in your message.
Key Term
Invention
the formulation of arguments based on logos–rational appeal or logic.
Forming a Rational Appeal
A rational appeal uses logical arguments and factual evidence to persuade individuals that whatever thesis you are supporting is viable and likely to result in the obtainment of goals. When you focus on rational appeals you are dealing with the mind and cognition of the audience .
The Mind
When you focus on rational appeals, you are dealing with the audience’s mind and cognition.
A neon sign that has the word “mind” in an oval.
The study of rhetoric has historically focused on three types of persuasive appeals–ethos, pathos, and logos. Our focus on reasoning and how you to use evidence to reason with your audience is part of the study of logos. Additionally, you are concerned with invention, which is the first of the five canons of rhetoric identified by Cicero, the classical Roman rhetorician. Invention is how you formulate arguments based on logos–rational appeal or logic.
When you appeal to reason you use logically constructed arguments using your evidence to persuade your audience to agree with you. You might use many different forms of evidence to support your rational appeal. Basically, the burden of proof is on you the speaker as you develop your appeals to the audience. As you deploy a rational appeal consider: Is my reasoning sound, and what will the audience accept as a believable evidence?
Is Your Reasoning Sound?
Prior to your speech, it is important to consider the soundness of your evidence and reasoning.
Deductive reasoning: For example, if you are engaging in deductive reasoning, you will want to consider whether or not the audience is likely to accept the general premise as valid and true before you attempt to deduce other ideas or courses of action based on the general premise.
If you are quoting an authority and drawing conclusions from the authority, it is important to ask if the audience will accept or believe the authority. Remember to quote or use sources that the audience is familiar and will believe; using other authorities or sources will likely not be productive.
Inductive reasoning: If you are engaging in inductive reasoning, you will want to consider whether you have observed or collected enough evidence to draw a highly probable conclusion. Or, did you draw a hasty conclusion based on too few examples or observations?
If you are using statistical evidence as part of your inductive reasoning, it is important to consider how the data was collected and whether it is truly valid. If you do not have valid statistical data, then the inductions will not be valid. Before using any data, ask:
Is the source biased, or perceived as biased?
Is the source competent in the field being consulted?
Is the information current?
Associative reasoning (analogy): When engaging in associative reasoning, you will want to make sure that the ideas are indeed similar and that there are no obvious or outstanding differences which would negate the association in the mind of your audience.
Address Resistance and Concerns of the Audience
Finally, in persuasive situations it is important to anticipate the potential resistance and counterarguments your audience might feel. When you have a sense of what objections the audience might raise, you can and should address the most significant points of disagreement in your message.
Arguments from reason (logical arguments) have some advantages, namely that data are (ostensibly) difficult to manipulate, so it is harder to argue against such an argument; and such arguments make the speaker look prepared and knowledgeable to the audience, enhancing ethos. In addition, if you have built ethos with the audience then it will enhance your appeal with arguments from reason.
15.4.3: Logical Fallacies
A fallacy is an error in reasoning; there are two basic categories of fallacies–formal and informal.
Learning Objective
Give examples of formal and informal logical fallacies
Key Points
“Formal” refers to the form of the argument. An argument that contains a formal fallacy will always be invalid. However, even if a premise is not accurate, the formal conclusion could still be valid if the rules of logic are followed.
An informal fallacy is an error in reasoning that occurs due to a problem with the content, rather than mere structure, of the argument and is often due to a misconception or a presumption.
Common Fallacy–hasty generalization: argues from limited examples or a special case to a create general rule that applies to many cases.
Common Fallacy–Popular sentiment or bandwagon appeal (argumentum ad populum):—appeal to the majority; appeal to loyalty, “Everyone is doing it”.
Common Fallacy–If it comes before, it is the cause, post hoc ergo propter hoc: believing that temporal succession implies a causal relation.
Common Fallacy–Two events co-occurring is not causation, cum hoc ergo propter hoc: believing that correlation implies a causal relation.
Key Terms
fallacy
An error in reasoning often due to a misconception or a presumption; used in informal discourse to mean an argument which is problematic for any reason
straw man
An insubstantial concept, idea, endeavor or argument, particularly one deliberately set up to be weakly supported, so that it can be easily knocked down; especially to impugn the strength of any related thing or idea.
red herring
A clue or information that is or is intended to be misleading, that diverts attention from a question;often thought to relate to using smelly fish to train dogs to recognize the real scent of something they were suppose to be tracking.
Errors in reasoning–formal and informal
A fallacy is an error in reasoning. There are two basic categories of fallacies–formal and informal.
Formal Fallacies
Formal fallacies occur when there is a problem with the form, or structure, of the argument. “Formal” refers to the form of the argument. An argument that contains a formal fallacy will always be invalid.
Consider an example with a visualization of faulty reasoning involving categorical deduction.
Categorical Deduction
Deductive reasoning can be valid, while the major premise is not valid.
An example of a deduction that says “All flowers are animals. All animals can jump. Therefore, all flowers can jump.”
All flowers are animals.
All animals can jump.
Therefore, all flowers can jump.
Even though it is quite obvious that the first premise is not true and further that the conclusion is not true, the whole syllogism is still valid. By applying formal logic to the syllogism in the example, the conclusion is still valid.
Informal Fallacies
An informal fallacy is an error in reasoning that occurs due to a problem with the content, rather than mere structure, of the argument. In informal logic and rhetoric, a fallacy is usually an error in reasoning often due to a misconception or a presumption. Some of the more frequent common logical fallacies are:
Converse fallacy of accidental or hasty generalization: argues from limited examples or a special case to a general rule. Argument: Every person I’ve met has ten fingers, therefore, all people have ten fingers. Problem: Those, who have been met.are not a representative subset of the entire set.
Making the argument personal (argumentum ad hominem): attacking or discrediting the opposition’s character. Argument: What do you know about the U.S? You aren’t even a citizen. Problem: personal argument against an opponent, instead of against the opponent’s argument.
Popular sentiment or bandwagon appeal (argumentum ad populum): an appeal to the majority; appeal to loyalty. Argument: Everyone is doing it. Problem: Concludes a proposition to be true because many or most people believe it.
Red herring (Ignoratio Elenchi): intentionally or unintentionally misleading or distracting from the actual issue. Argument: I think that we should make the academic requirements stricter for students. I recommend that you support this because we are in a budget crisis and we do not want our salaries affected. Problem: Here the second sentence, though used to support the first, does not address the topic of the first sentence, instead switching the focus to the quite different topic.
Fallacy of false cause (non sequitur): incorrectly assumes one thing is the cause of another. Non Sequitur is Latin for “It does not follow. ” Argument: I hear the rain falling outside my window; therefore, the sun is not shining. Problem: The conclusion is false because the sun can shine while it is raining.
If it comes before it is the cause (post hoc ergo propter hoc): believing that temporal succession implies a causal relation. Argument: It rained just before the car died. The rain caused the car to break down. Problem: There may be no connection between the two events.
Two events co-occurring is not causation (cum hoc ergo propter hoc): believing that correlation implies a causal relation. Argument: More cows die in the summer. More ice cream is consumed in summer months. Therefore, the consumption of ice cream in the summer is killing cows. Problem: No premise suggests the ice cream consumption is causing the deaths. The deaths and consumption could be unrelated, or something else could be causing both, such as summer heat.
Fallacy of many questions or loaded question (Plurium Interrogationum): groups more than one question in the form of a single question. Argument: Have you stopped beating your wife? Problem: Either a yes or no answer is an admission of guilt to beating your wife.
Straw man: creates the illusion of having refuted a proposition by replacing it with a superficially similar proposition (the “straw man”), and refuting it, without ever actually refuting the original. Argument: Person A: Sunny days are good Person B: If all days were sunny, we’d never have rain, and without rain, we’d have famine and death. Therefore, you are wrong. Problem: B has misrepresented A’s claim by falsely suggesting that A claimed that only sunny days are good, and then B refuted the misrepresented version of the claim, rather than refuting A’s original assertion.
The false dilemma or either-or fallacy: the listener is forced to make a choice between two things which are not really related or relevant. Argument: If you are not with us, you are against us. Problem: The presentation of a false choice often reflects a deliberate attempt to eliminate any middle ground.
Card-stacking, or cherry picking: deliberate action is taken to bias an argument by selective use of facts with opposing evidence being buried or discredited. Argument: Learn new skills, become a leader and see the world. Problem: Only the positive benefits of military service are used to recruit , and not the hazards.
As a speaker you want to carefully consider your reasoning and how you draw your logical conclusions in order to avoid faulty reasoning.
15.5: Emotional Appeals
15.5.1: Defining Emotional Appeal
An emotional appeal is used to sway the emotions of an audience to make them support the speaker’s argument.
Learning Objective
Break down the components that make up an emotional appeal
Key Points
Pathos represents an appeal to the emotions of an audience.
An emotional appeal uses the manipulation of the emotions rather than valid logic to win an argument.
Emotional appeal is a logical fallacy, whereby a debater attempts to win an argument by trying to get an emotional reaction from the opponent and audience.
In debating terms, emotional appeals are often effective as a rhetorical device, but are generally considered naive or dishonest as a logical argument, since they often appeal to the prejudices of listeners rather than offer a sober assessment of a situation.
Key Term
logical fallacy
A fallacy; a clearly defined error in reasoning used to support or refute an argument, excluding simple unintended mistakes.
Emotional Appeal Defined
Pathos represents an appeal to the audience’s emotions. Pathos is a communication technique used most often in rhetoric (where it is considered one of the three modes of persuasion, alongside ethos and logos), and in literature, film, and other narrative art.
Emotional appeal can be accomplished in a multitude of ways:
By a metaphor or storytelling, common as a hook
By a general passion in the delivery
By an overall emotion
By the sympathies of the speech or writing as determined by the audience
The pathos of a speech or writing is only ultimately determined by the audience.
The Purpose of an Emotional Appeal
An emotional appeal is directed to sway an audience member’s emotions and uses the manipulation of the recipient’s emotions rather than valid logic to win an argument. An emotional appeal uses emotions as the basis of an argument’s position without factual evidence that logically supports the major ideas endorsed by the presenter. In an emotional appeal, persuasive language is used to develop the foundation of an appeal to emotion-based arguments instead of facts. Therefore, the validity of the premises that establish such an argument does not prove to be verifiable.
Emotional appeal is a logical fallacy, whereby a debater attempts to win an argument by trying to get an emotional reaction from the opponent and audience. It is generally characterized by the use of loaded language and concepts (God, country, and apple pie being good concepts; drugs and crime being bad ones). In debating terms, emotional appeals are often effective as a rhetorical device, but are generally considered naive or dishonest as a logical argument, since they often appeal to the prejudices of listeners rather than offer a sober assessment of a situation.
Examples of Emotional Appeals
Children are more often than not toddled out as an appeal to emotion. From pictures of starving children to motivate people to give to charity to using them as any excuse to ban things that children shouldn’t even be aware of (e.g., guns), they are repeatedly paraded in front of audiences to appeal to their emotional protective instincts, often overriding anyone’s sense of rationality . “For the children” or “think of the children” as emotional appeals have been used with success in passing political motions such as Proposition Hate in California.
Emotional Appeal
A picture like this could be used as an emotional appeal for a charity campaign to increase funding for soldiers’ families.
A US soldier holds his daughter and his son.
As with children, cute animals override most people’s logic. Even if the pictures of animal testing put out by PETA are 50 years out of date, they still provoke an emotional response rather than a reasoned one when trying to assess cruelty in animal testing.
15.5.2: Producing an Emotional Appeal
Finding words to match the speech context and audience’s disposition is essential to producing an effective emotional appeal.
Learning Objective
Identify the components that produce an emotional appeal in a speech
Key Points
Producing an emotional appeal requires an understanding of your audience and what may strike their emotions the most.
An effective way to create emotional appeal is to use words that have a lot of pathos associated with them. Pathos is an emotional appeal used in rhetoric that depicts certain emotional states.
An example of a speech that is particularly effective at producing an emotional response with its listeners is Martin Luther King, Jr.’s “I Have a Dream” speech. The speech uses rhetoric to convey the point of equal opportunity for all people.
Key Terms
pathos
An appeal to the audience’s emotions.
Disposition
A habit, a preparation, a state of readiness, or a tendency to act in a specified way.
rhetoric
The art of using language, especially public speaking, as a means to persuade.
Producing an Emotional Appeal
Producing an emotional appeal requires an understanding of your audience and what may strike their emotions the most.
For example, if you are giving a speech at an event to raise money for a children’s hospital, it would be appropriate to use an appeal to emotions relating to children. For instance, the speaker could use an emotionally charged anecdote about a child who was sick and was cured at this hospital. This story stresses the value that the hospital had on improving the child’s health.
In general, an effective way to create emotional appeal is to use words that have a lot of pathos associated with them. Pathos is an emotional appeal used in rhetoric that depicts certain emotional states. Some examples of “pathos” charged words include: strong, powerful, tragic, equality, freedom, and liberty. These words can be used in a speech to intensify an emotional appeal to an audience.
The Emotional Appeals in “I Have a Dream”
An example of a speech that is particularly effective at producing an emotional response with its listeners is Martin Luther King, Jr.’s “I Have a Dream” speech.
Emotional Appeals
Martin Luther King, Jr.’s speech “I Have a Dream” effectively produced an emotional response from the audience.
The speech uses rhetoric to convey the point of equal opportunity for all people. It is considered by many as a prime example of successful rhetoric and emotional appeal.
In the speech, Martin Luther King Jr. weaves current events into the fabric of American history, underscoring the tragedy with biblical rhetoric. King hinges his call for change on three refrains, or repeated phrases. He frames his vision for the future with the famous phrase, “I have a dream.”
As his speech draws to a close, he wills his vision to become reality across the country, moving on to the refrain, “Let freedom ring!” He closes his speech with the repeated line, “Free at last!” King articulates cruel injustices, leads us in imagining a world without those injustices, and then appeals to his audiences emotions through these phrases and the idea of a world with equal opportunity.
15.5.3: Ethical Usage
When you make emotional appeals avoid unethical tactics, such as exploitative manipulation.
Learning Objective
List the types of manipulative techniques used to emotionally appeal to audiences
Key Points
Ethos (plural: ethe) is an appeal to the authority or honesty of the presenter.
Emotional appeals will encourage the audience to identify with your message on a visceral level, bypassing intellectual filters, such as skepticism and logic.
It may be appealing to take a shortcut to making the audience sympathize with your point of view. However, emotional appeals don’t always hold up well after the fact–so fortify your emotional appeal by engaging the intellect, too.
Key Terms
ethos
A rhetorical appeal to an audience based on the speaker/writer’s credibility.
manipulation
The usage of psychological influence over a person or situation to gain a positive outcome.
ethics
The study of principles relating to right and wrong conduct.
Ethical Usage
Emotional appeals are very powerful. When you stir sympathy in your listeners, you encourage them to identify with your message on a visceral level, bypassing intellectual filters, such as skepticism and logic.
However, this may be unethical because you are not allowing your listeners to logically consider your argument and rationally determine how they would react to your argument in absence of an emotional appeal.
It may be appealing to take a shortcut toward making the audience sympathize with your point of view. An emotional appeal may save you the trouble of working out a good argument. However, emotional appeals don’t always hold up well after the fact when your audience has had a chance to process your message.
Therefore, be sure to substantiate your emotional appeal with both logic and facts.
Emotional Manipulation
Since emotional appeals are very strong, they can sometimes be used inappropriately in order to gain something from the audience members.
Manipulation
Adolf Hitler is an example of a political figure who used emotional manipulation.
For example, an emotional appeal could be used in a political rally to persuade people to vote for the candidate, especially if the vote will happen in the next few days. This emotional appeal may persuade audience members to vote for you or your candidate, but it may also be unethical or considered manipulative if the audience members do not have a chance to rationally process the message before the vote takes place.
This is especially critical for situations, such as politics, which people generally have emotionally charged opinions about.
Some inappropriate uses of manipulative techniques of emotional appeals include:
Lying or lying by omission: telling outright falsehoods or misleading by leaving out crucial pieces of information.
Denial: refusing to admit that you or your affiliates have done anything wrong.
Covert intimidation: using subtle, indirect or implied threats.
Guilt tripping: suggesting that the audience does not care enough, is too selfish, or has it easy. Guilt tripping encourages self-doubt and submissive behavior.
Shaming: using tactics, such as direct criticism, a fierce look or glance, an unpleasant tone of voice, rhetorical comments, and subtle sarcasm to undermine audience members.
Playing the victim: putting on the role of a victim of circumstances or the bad behavior of others in order to evoke sympathy.
Vilifying the victim: acting as though the victim of the bad behavior of your (or your associates) did something to deserve negative consequences.
Seduction: using charm, praise, and flattery to manipulate others.
In order to ethically portray an emotional appeal, be sure to avoid these inappropriate uses and manipulative techniques for emotional appeals. Emotional appeals can be effective if they are not manipulative and are used to further an honest message.
How to Prove that You are Ethical
Ethos (plural: ethe) is an appeal to the authority or honesty of the presenter. It is how well the presenter convinces the audience that he or she is qualified to present (speak) on the particular subject. It can be done in many ways:
By being a notable figure in the field in question, such as a college professor or an executive of a company whose business is that of the subject.
By having a vested interest in a matter, such as the person being related to the subject in question.
By using impressive logos that show the audience that the speaker is knowledgeable on the topic.
By appealing to a person’s ethics or character.
15.6: Motivational Appeals
15.6.1: Motivating Listeners
Motivational appeals arouse the audience to take action toward a desired goal to satisfy unmet needs or desires.
Learning Objective
Explain the steps that make up Alan Monroe’s motivated sequence for organizing persuasive speeches, and how Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs serves as a method for motivating listeners
Key Points
We can divide our motives into two basic types: internal, intrinsic and external or extrinsic motives. Some are more intrinsic than others, but basically a motive or motivator is external if someone controls the means for you to satisfy the need or desire.
It is important to understand the current state of unfulfilled desires or need states that exist in your audience in order to select the appropriate motives for your appeal.
You can use Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs to select an unsatisfied need for your motivational appeals. The lower level needs such as Physiological and Safety needs will have to be satisfied before higher level needs, such as achievement or self-actualization can be addressed.
Monroe’s Motivated Sequence is one method to organize your appeal to the listeners. The five steps in order are: Get Attention, Explain Need, Satisfaction (how your solution will met the need), Visualization (picture audience living with solution in place), and Action (what audience can do now).
Key Terms
Motivated sequence
a technique for organizing persuasive speeches that inspires people to take action, developed by Alan Monroe. Includes five steps—attention, need, satisfaction, visualization, and action.
motive
An incentive to act; a reason for doing something; anything that prompted a choice of action.
motivation
Willingness of action especially in behavior
Motivating Listeners
Motivation arouses us to action toward a desired goal
Motivation is the psychological feature that arouses us to action toward a desired goal and prompts us to want to continue behaviors toward the goal. If you have not eaten, then you are motivated by your hunger and you respond by seeking out food and eating. Motivation may be rooted in a basic need to minimize physical pain and maximize pleasure and it may also include specific physical, cognitive, and emotional needs or desires, too.
Internal, Intrinsic, and External Motives vs. Extrinsic Motives
We can divide our motives into two basic types: internal, intrinsic and external or extrinsic motives. There is no a clear cut distinction between intrinsic and extrinsic motives. Some are more intrinsic than others, but basically, a motive or motivator is extrinsic if someone controls the means or directs you to satisfy the need or desire. For example, if you are motivated to study because a professor says you will fail the class if you do not, then you are extrinsically motivated and passing the class is the desired reward.
Motivation
External motivation (the stick) directs one’s action to get the reward (the carrot).
An image of a man chasing a carrot. The man has a stick (baseball bat) behind him as motivation.
Sixteen Basic Motivators
Here are sixteen basic desires that motivate our actions and define our personalities:
Acceptance: the need for approval;
Curiosity: the need to learn;
Eating: the need for food;
Family: the need to raise children;
Honor: the need to be loyal to the traditional values of one’s clan/ethnic group;
Idealism: the need for social justice;
Independence: the need for individuality;
Order: the need for organized, stable, predictable environments;
Physical activity: the need for exercise;
Power: the need for influence of will;
Romance: the need for sex;
Saving: the need to collect;
Social contact: the need for friends (peer relationships);
Social status: the need for social standing/importance;
Tranquility: the need to be safe;
Vengeance: the need to strike back.
Unsatisfied Needs or Desires Can Motivate the Listener
It is important to remember that only an unsatisfied need or desire can be used to motivate the listener. You need to understand the current state of the audience to select the appropriate motives for your appeal.
Abraham H. Maslow developed a Hierarchy of Needs, consisting of five hierarchic classes that can be a useful method to selecting needs for motivational appeals. The lower level physiological and safety needs must be satisfied before higher level needs can be addressed. According to Maslow, if you are trying to motivate your listeners to satisfy a particular need, you want to make sure the lower level needs are being met before you can motivate them to address an upper level need. The basic requirements build on the first step in his pyramid. If there is any deficit on this level, the whole behavior of a human will be oriented to satisfy this deficit. The second level awakens a need for security; it is oriented on a future need for security. After securing those two levels, the motives shift to the social sphere, which form the third stage. Psychological requirements comprise the fourth level, while the top of the hierarchy is the need for self-realization. The needs, listed from basic (lowest-earliest) to most complex (highest-latest) are as follows :
Hierarchy of Needs
Employees are often motivated by their needs.
Physiology (hunger, thirst, sleep, etc.)
Safety/Security/Shelter/Health
Belongingness/Love/Friendship
Self-esteem/Recognition/Achievement
Self actualization—realizing one’s full potential
Monroe’s Motivated Sequence
Now we can apply this knowledge to motivate our listeners. This is a strategy for organizing a speech using motives. Alan Monroe’s motivated sequence is a method for organizing persuasive speeches. It consists of these steps on how to organize a motivational appeal to the audience:
Attention: get the attention of your audience using a detailed story, shocking example, dramatic statistic, quotations, etc.
Need: show how the topic applies to the psychological need of the audience members; audience needs are what motivates action. Go beyond establishing that there is a significant problem. Show the need will not go away by itself. Use statistics, examples, etc. Convince your audience that they each have a personal need to take action.
Satisfaction: you need to solve the issue. Provide specific and viable solutions that the government or communities can implement to solve the problem.
Visualization: tell the audience what will happen if the solution is implemented or does not take place. Picture the audience in the new world with the solution in place. Be visual and detailed.
Action: tell the audience what action they can take personally to solve the problem.
The advantage of Monroe’s Motivated Sequence is that it emphasizes what the audience can do. Too often the audience feels like a situation is hopeless; Monroe’s motivated sequence emphasizes the action the audience can take.
Persuasive speeches aim to convince the audience to believe a certain view.
Learning Objective
Identify the qualities of a persuasive speech
Key Points
Persuasive speeches can come in many forms, such as sales pitches, debates, and legal proceedings.
Persuasive speeches may utilize the three modes of persuasion: ethos, pathos and logos.
Ethos is the most important appeal in a persuasive speech.
Factors such as body language, the willingness of the audience, and the environment in which the speech is given, all affect the success of a persuasive speech.
Audience Analysis is important in a persuasive speech, as the audience will be convinced for their own reasons, not for the speaker’s reasons.
Key Terms
Audience Analysis
the speaker’s understanding of the audience’s knowledge, personal experience, and proximity to a topic
pathos
emotional appeal to the audience
Logos
logical appeal to the audience; does the speaker’s argument make sense?
persuasion
the process aimed at changing a person’s (or a group’s) attitude or behavior
ethos
credibility of the speaker, assigned to them by the audience
Definition
A persuasive speech is a specific type of speech in which the speaker has a goal of convincing the audience to accept his or her point of view. The speech is arranged in such a way as to hopefully cause the audience to accept all or part of the expressed view. Though the overarching goal of a persuasive speech is to convince the audience to accept a perspective, not all audiences can be convinced by a single speech and not all perspectives can persuade the audience. The success of a persuasive speech is often measured by the audience’s willingness to consider the speaker’s argument.
Persuasive Speech
President Gerald Ford and Jimmy Carter meet at the Walnut Street Theater in Philadelphia to debate domestic policy.
The Sales Pitch
An example of a persuasive speech is a sales pitch. During a sales pitch, the speaker is trying to convince the audience to buy his or her product or service. If the salesperson is successful, the audience (the person being sold to) will choose to purchase the product or service.
However, salespeople understand that just because someone does not make a purchase after the first sales pitch does not mean the pitch failed. Persuasion is often a process. People may need multiple persuasive pitches and a lot of outside information before they are ready to accept a new view.
Components of a Persuasive Speech
While ethos is an essential part of a persuasive speech, pathos and logos are usually combined to form the best possible argument.
While a speaker can attempt to establish ethos, or credibility, with an audience, it is ultimately assigned to them based on the audience’s perception. If the audience does not perceive the speaker as a credible source on the topic about which they are speaking, they will ultimately have a hard time considering the speaker’s argument.
The logos in a speech, or logical appeals, are arguments that present a set of information and show why a conclusion must rationally be true. For example, arguments heard in court are logical arguments.
Pathos, emotional appeals, are appeals that seek to make the audience feel a certain way so that they will accept a conclusion. Negative political ads, for example, often incorporate emotional appeals by juxtaposing an opponent with a negative emotion such as fear.
How to Succeed
Using an attention grabbing device is a powerful way to begin a persuasive speech. If you can make your audience laugh, think about a personal experience, or tell an anecdote that produces emotion, they are more likely to listen to the content of your argument. Additionally, keeping a speech within 6-8 minutes makes the audience less likely to let their mind wander away from what you are saying.
The effectiveness of a persuasive speech also depends on factors beyond the words of the speech. The willingness of the audience to accept a new view, the body language of the speaker, and the environment in which the speech is given all can affect the success of a persuasive speech.
A successful speaker will do their best to establish strong ethos with their audience, and combine pathos and logos to form the best possible argument. Audience analysis is an important factor when giving a persuasive speech. For example, if a speaker is trying to convince the audience not to tell their children about Santa Claus, using arguments that relate and resonate with them, such as encouraging them to remember how they felt when they discovered he wasn’t real, will be more successful than if the speaker shared a negative personal experience of their own.
14.1.2: The Goals of a Persuasive Speech: Convincing, Actuation, and Stimulation
Persuasive speeches can be designed to convince, incite action, or enhance belief by the audience.
Learning Objective
Define the three goals of a persuasive speech
Key Points
Convincing speeches aim to get the audience to change their mind to accept the view put forth in the speech.
Actuation speeches seek to incite a certain action in the audience.
Stimulation speeches are designed to get an audience to believe more enthusiastically in a view.
Key Terms
stimulation
An activity causing excitement or pleasure.
actuate
To incite to action; to motivate.
convince
To make someone believe, or feel sure about something, especially by using logic, argument or evidence.
The overall goal of a persuasive speech is for the audience to accept your viewpoint as the speaker. However, this is not a nuanced enough definition to capture the actual goals of different persuasive speeches. Persuasive speeches can be designed to convince, actuate, and/or stimulate the audience.
Convincing
A convincing speech is designed to cause the audience to internalize and believe a viewpoint that they did not previously hold. In a sense, a convincing argument changes the audience’s mind. For example, suppose you are giving a persuasive speech claiming that Coke is better than Pepsi. Your goal is not just for the audience to hear that you enjoy Coke more, but for Pepsi lovers to change their minds.
Actuation
An actuation speech has a slightly different goal. An actuation speech is designed to cause the audience to do something, to take some action. This type of speech is particularly useful if the audience already shares some or all of your view. For example, at the end of presidential campaigns, candidates begin to focus on convincing their supporters to actually vote. They are seeking to actuate the action of voting through their speeches .
Actuation
Political candidates use actuation speeches so that their supporters will cast their votes.
A man and woman standing in front of signs that say “Vote.”
Stimulation
Persuasive speeches can also be used to enhance how fervently the audience believes in an idea. In this instance, the speaker understands that the audience already believes in the viewpoint, but not to the degree that he or she would like. As a result, the speaker tries to stimulate the audience, making them more enthusiastic about the view. For example, religious services often utilize stimulation. They are not trying to convince those of another religion to switch religions necessarily; there is an understanding that the congregation already accepts part or all of the religion. Instead, they are trying to enhance the degree of belief.
14.1.3: Persuasive vs. Informative Speaking
Informative and persuasive speeches differ in what they want the audience to walk away with: facts or an opinion.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between informative and persuasive speeches
Key Points
Informative speeches (or informational speeches) seek to provide facts, statistics, or general evidence. They are primarily concerned with the transmission of knowledge to the audience.
Persuasive speeches are designed to convince the audience that a certain viewpoint is correct. In doing so, the speaker may utilize information.
Informative and persuasive speeches are exemplified by academic lectures and sales pitches, respectively.
Key Term
informative
Providing knowledge, especially useful or interesting information.
Informative (or informational) and persuasive speaking are related, but distinct, types of speeches. The difference between the two lies in the speaker’s end goal and what the speaker wants the audience to leave with.
Informative speeches are probably the most prevalent variety of speech. The goal is always to supply information and facts to the audience. This information can come in the form of statistics, facts, or other forms of evidence. Informational speeches do not tell people what to do with the information; their goal is for the audience to have and understand the information. Academic lectures are often informational speeches, because the professor is attempting to present facts so the students can understand them.
Informative Speeches
Journalists, like Walter Cronkite, generally use informative speeches to inform their viewers about news events.
Informational speeches may have a tendency to become overdrawn and boring. Their goal is not to excite the audience members, but rather to provide them with knowledge they did not have before the speech.
Like informational speeches, persuasive speeches use information. However, persuasive speeches are designed for the audience to not only hear and understand the information, but to use it to be convinced of a viewpoint. The end goal of a persuasive speech is not for the audience to have information, but rather for them to have a certain view. Persuasive speeches may use some of the same techniques as informational speeches, but can also use emotions to convince the audience. A sales pitch is one example of a persuasive speech.
A common cry against certain persuasive speeches is that they rely too much on emotion and not enough on facts. A persuasive speech that succeeds in convincing the audience to accept a view but is based on faulty or misleading information is unethical.
14.1.4: The Psychology of Persuasion
Each individual is persuaded by different things over different time-periods, so to be effective each pitch must be customized.
Learning Objective
Explain the two psychological theories of persuasion
Key Points
Each person is unique, so there is no single psychological key to persuasion.
Cialdini proposed six psychological persuasive techniques: reciprocity, commitment and consistency, social proof, authority, liking, and scarcity.
The Relationship Based Persuasion technique has four steps: survey the situation, confront the five barriers to a successful influence encounter, make the pitch, and secure the commitments.
Key Terms
social proof
People tend to do things that they see others are doing.
reciprocity
the responses of individuals to the actions of others
There is no single key to a successful persuasive speech. Some people take longer than others to be persuaded, and some respond to different persuasion techniques. Therefore, persuasive speakers should be cognizant of audience characteristics to customize the pitch.
Persuasion
A persuasive speech is given with the goal of influencing how the audience thinks about a certain topic.
An illustration from Jane Austen’s novel “Persuasion.” novel by Jane Austen. It shows Sir Walter Elliot talking to Mr. Shepherd.
The psychology of persuasion is best exemplified by two theories that try to explain how people are influenced.
Robert Cialdini, in his book on persuasion, defined six “weapons of influence:”
Reciprocity: People tend to return a favor. In Cialdini’s conferences, he often uses the example of Ethiopia providing thousands of dollars in humanitarian aid to Mexico just after the 1985 earthquake, despite Ethiopia suffering from a crippling famine and civil war at the time. Ethiopia had been reciprocating for the diplomatic support Mexico provided when Italy invaded Ethiopia in 1937.
Commitment and Consistency: Once people commit to what they think is right, they are more likely to honor that commitment even if the original motivation is subsequently removed. For example, in car sales, suddenly raising the price at the last moment works because buyers have already decided to buy.
Social Proof: People will do things they see other people are doing. In one experiment, if one or more person looked up into the sky, bystanders would then look up to see what they could see. This experiment was aborted, as so many people looked up that they stopped traffic.
Authority: People will tend to obey authority figures, even if they are asked to perform objectionable acts. Cialdini cites incidents like the Milgram experiments in the early 1960s and the My Lai massacre in 1968.
Liking: People are easily persuaded by other people whom they like. Cialdini cites the marketing of Tupperware, wherein people were more likely to buy from others they liked. Some of the biases favoring more attractive people are discussed, but generally more aesthetically pleasing people tend to use this influence over others.
Scarcity: Perceived scarcity will generate demand. For example, saying that offers are available for a “limited time only” encourages sales.
The second theory is called Relationship Based Persuasion. It was developed by Richard Shell and Mario Moussa. The overall theory is that persuasion is the art of winning over others. Their four step approach is:
Survey your situation: This step includes an analysis of the persuader’s situation, goals and challenges.
Confront the five barriers: Five obstacles pose the greatest risks to a successful influence encounter – relationships, credibility, communication mismatches, belief systems, and interest and needs.
Make your pitch: People need a solid reason to justify a decision, yet at the same time many decisions are made on basis of intuition. This step also deals with presentation skills.
Secure your commitments: In order to safeguard the longtime success of a persuasive decision, it is vital to deal with politics at both the individual and organizational level.
14.1.5: The Ethics of Persuasion
Persuasion is unethical if it is for personal gain at the expense of others, or for personal gain without the knowledge of the audience.
Learning Objective
Discuss the qualities that assure that persuasion is ethical
Key Points
Methods such as torture, coercion, and brainwashing are always unethical.
Ethical persuasion has three components: the exploration of the other person’s viewpoint, the explanation of your viewpoint, and the creation of resolutions.
Tests such as the TARES test and the Fitzpatrick & Gauthier test are used to determine if a persuasion attempt is ethical.
Key Term
coercion
Use of physical or moral force to compel a person to do something, or to abstain from doing something, thereby depriving that person of the exercise of free will.
Ethics of Persuasion
Not all persuasion is ethical. Persuasion is widely considered unethical if it is for the purpose of personal gain at the expense of others, or for personal gain without the knowledge of the audience. Furthermore, some methods of persuasion are wholly written off as unethical. For example, coercion, brainwashing, and torture are never considered ethical .
Understanding Ethics
Al Capone, an American gangster in the early 20th century, used coercion as a persuasive technique, which isn’t ethical.
Barring any of the persuasive methods that are easily distinguished as unethical (such as torture), the line between ethical and unethical is less clearly demarcated. Ethical persuasion has a series of common characteristics that are missing in unethical persuasion. Ethical persuasion seeks to achieve the following three goals:
Explore the other person’s viewpoint
Explain your viewpoint
Create resolutions
Notably, this approach involves input from the audience and an honest explanation of your viewpoint. If you have questions about the ethics of a persuasive attempt, there are a number of tests that can be done.
TARES Test
Sherry Baker and David Martinson proposed a five-part TARES test to help guide the PR practitioner to define ethical persuasion. An ethical persuasive speech must have all of the following components:
Truthfulness of the message
Authenticity of the persuader
Respect for the audience
Equity of the persuasive appeal
Fitzpatrick & Gauthier
Fitzpatrick and Gauthier developed a series of questions that must be honestly answered to determine how ethical a pitch is:
For what purpose is persuasion being employed?
Toward what choices and with what consequences for individual lives is persuasion being used?
Does the persuasion in this case contribute to or interfere with the decision-making process for its target audience?
14.2: Types of Persuasive Speeches
14.2.1: Persuasive Speeches on Questions of Fact
Speeches about question of fact (something is true, exists, or does not exist) propose that the speaker’s view is probably true.
Learning Objective
Explain how to present evidence to prove that a fact is true
Key Points
Questions of fact contrast with questions of policy (which state that something should be) and questions of value (which state that something is good, bad, beautiful, or worthwhile).
Three basic types of questions of fact are historical controversy, questions of current existence, and predictions.
The speaker presents competing evidence in topical order and uses inductive reasoning to draw a conclusion from the evidence. The conclusion asserts that the speaker’s view is most likely true.
The speaker has an ethical responsibility to provide reliable, valid evidence to the audience, and to be aware of and avoid bias in the selection of the evidence.
Key Term
evidence
The available body of facts or information indicating whether a belief or proposition is true or valid.
Example
To persuade an audience that the Loch Ness monster exists, a speech could cover unexplained sightings, factual evidence that many of the sightings cannot be explained, and collected testimony from people who have seen the Loch Ness monster and scientists who have studied the claims.
Questions of fact are one focus of persuasive speaking. They propose that something is a fact. Questions of fact (which are also called propositions of fact) basically state that something is, something exists, or something doesn’t exist. Questions of fact contrast with questions of policy, which state that something should be, and questions of value, which state that something is good, bad, beautiful, or worthwhile.
In a persuasive speech, the speaker answers a question by proposing an answer and attempting to convince the audience that the answer is true and that they can believe the speaker. In essence, the speaker wants to audience to accept the his or her view as the cold, hard facts.
Asking Questions
In a persuasive speech, the speaker will ask and answer questions with facts in order to convince the audience that the facts are true.
A sign that says “Cold, hard facts” with information about the steel industry.
The following are three basic types of questions of fact:
Historical controversy: Knowledge that an event did happen in the past or that an object actually did exist.
Questions of current existence: Knowledge that something is happening now in the present (such as global warming).
Predictions: Forecasting what will happen in the future. Based on past events, the speaker identifies a pattern and attempts to convince the audience that the event will happen again. For example, if someone observes that gasoline prices drop right before national elections, he or she could attempt to convince others that they will drop again before the next election.
Creating a Persuasive Speech on Questions of Fact
When creating a persuasive speech based around questions of fact, consider the following:
Thesis: When developing a persuasive speech, begin with a thesis that states that something is true, meaning that it happened or did not happen. exists or does not exist.
Organization and Evidence: In general, the evidence should be presented in topical order. It is important to consider the evidence carefully. The speaker must ask if it is possible that the observations actually occurred or could have occurred. Are the source of the evidence reliable, and were they in a position to actually observe what they reported? Is there reason to believe that a source may be biased, either personally or by the thinking prevalent at the time in history?
Reasoning: The speaker will usually be dealing with inductive reasoning, in which he or she asks the audience to agree with a conclusion after presenting all of the evidence. The speaker proves the position by presenting compelling evidence to support the thesis.
Ethics: As a speaker you have an ethical responsibility to provide reliable, valid evidence to the audience and be aware of and avoid your own bias in the selection of the evidence which you use.
Loch Ness Monster
The existence of the Loch Ness Monster is a question of fact.
14.2.2: Persuasive Speeches on Questions of Value
In persuasive speeches on questions of value, we argue something is right or wrong, moral or immoral, or better or worse than another thing.
Learning Objective
Define a persuasive speech of value
Key Points
Persuasive speeches on questions of value imply certain actions, but they are not a call to action.
Persuasive speeches of value depend on a judgement that something is right or wrong, moral or immoral, or better or worse than another thing.
The speech should include an appeal, criteria for judgement, and facts that support the appeal using the judgement criteria.
Key Term
policy
A principle of behavior, conduct, etc., thought to be desirable or necessary, especially as formally expressed by a government or other authoritative body.
Example
“To persuade my audience that it is wrong to drive over the speed limit. ” “To persuade my audience that Pepsi is better than Coke. ” “To persuade my audience that it is better to live together before marriage. ” “To persuade my audience that swimming is the best form of exercise. ” “To persuade my audience that bikes are the best form of transportation to get around town. “
Introduction
There are three types of persuasive speeches:
Persuasive speeches of fact
Persuasive speeches of value
Persuasive speeches of policy
In this unit, our focus will be on persuasive speeches of value. Here is where we argue something is right or wrong, moral or immoral, or better or worse than another thing. The appeals are made on value judgements .
Examples include speeches that attempt to persuade the audience that it is wrong to drive over the speed limit, that Pepsi is better than Coke, that it is better to live together before marriage, that swimming is the best form of exercise, or that bikes are the best form of transportation to get around town.
Persuasive speeches on questions of value imply certain actions, but they are not a call to action.
Questions to Ask Yourself
When analyzing any type of persuasive speech, you should ask yourself the following questions:
What is the speaker’s goal?
What are the main points?
How does the structure of the speech help the speaker to make the argument?
How does the speaker try to make you care?
How does the speaker use evidence?
What kinds of sources does the speaker use?
Creating a Persuasive Speech on Questions of Value
How should you go about creating such a speech?
Introduce appeals, information, and criteria.
Provide evidence that makes your audience arrive at your conclusion. (Your claims should agree with the current beliefs and feeling of your audience. )
Use facts to justify your claims.
Consider your audience’s feeling and values.
Pepsi vs. Coke
Persuading the audience that Pepsi is better than Coke is a question of value speech, as it hinges on a value judgement.
14.2.3: Persuasive Speeches on Questions of Policy
Persuasive speeches about questions of policy advocate for or against the status quo.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate how to structure a persuasive speech on a question of policy
Key Points
There are four basic organizational patterns for question of policy: problem-solution, problem-solution with cause, comparative advantage of solutions, and Monroe’s motivated sequence.
Problem-solution considers the need (or the problem to be solved), the plan (or the solution to the problem), and the practicality (how well the solution will work).
Problem-solution with causes considers the nature and extent of the problem and the direct relationship between the problem and its causes, and uses the causes as criteria to evaluate potential solutions.
Comparative advantages of solutions summarizes the problem briefly, compare different solutions to find the one that solves the most aspects of the problem, and ask the audience to accept and implement the most advantageous solution.
Monroe’s motivated sequence is Attention, Need, Satisfaction, Visualization, and Action.
Key Terms
Monroe’s Motivated Sequence
A method of persuasion developed by Alan H. Monroe, based on establishing a psychological need for action in the audience and demonstrating how to satisfy the need by taking action.
status quo
The state of things; the way things are, as opposed to the way they could be.
policy
A principle of behavior, conduct, etc., thought to be desirable or necessary, especially as formally expressed by a government or other authoritative body.
Questions of Policy
One focus of persuasive speaking is questions of policy, which advocates a change from the status quo, or the way things are today. There is a “should”, or at least an implied “should”, in the thesis statement. The speaker wants the plan proposed by the speech to become policy. Questions of policy contrast with questions of fact, which state than something is, exists or does not exist, and questions of value, which state that something is good, bad, beautiful, or perhaps worthwhile.
Rubik’s Cube
Organizing a persuasive speech is like solving a puzzle, all of the speaker’s points must be aligned correctly.
The following sections describe some different ways to organize persuasive speeches around questions of policy.
Problem-Solution
One way to organize a persuasive speech on a question of policy focuses on defining a problem and a solution by covering three basic points:
The Need: Convince the audience that there is a problem that must be addressed or a need for change. It is essential to get the audience to believe that a problem exists so they will implement a plan for a solution.
The Plan: Convince the audience that it is not good enough to just sit around and complain. Tell them what actions they must take. Be sure to address any aspects of the solution that might make the audience less willing to act.
The Practicality: Show the audience that the plan can succeed. Address the implications, cite expert testimony, and reference the successful implementation of similar plans in other places.
Problem-Solution with Cause
A common variation on the problem-solution organization includes consideration of the causes. Discussing the causes of the problem directs attention to specific points that the solution must address. The basic points of this organization are:
The Problem: Describe the nature and extent of the problem. Specifically, describe that the problem exists and how important or big the problem is.
The Causes: Consider the direct relationship between the problem and its causes. Think about the problem as an “effect,” and consider the causes that produced the effect. Show a direct relationship between the problem and causes, not just a correlation where one thing occurred before, after, or at the same time as another.
The Solution: Use the causes as criteria to evaluate the solutions. If the speech says that the problem was caused by x, y and z, then the solution or new policy needs to address x, y, and z in order to solve the problem.
Comparative Advantages of Solutions
When the audience is already aware of and accepts that there is a problem, the speech can focus primarily on comparing the advantages of one solution over another, as follows:
Summarize the Problem Briefly: Do not focus on convincing the audience to believe that there is a problem that needs to be solved.
Compare Different Solutions: Discuss different solutions, and find the one that solves the most aspects of the problem. Compare one solution with others to select and propose the best to the audience.
Final Appeal: Ask the audience to accept and implement that solution as the policy.
Monroe’s Motivated Sequence
Another powerful method of structuring a persuasive message is by using a motivated sequence. The organizational plan developed by Alan Monroe focuses on developing a psychological need in the audience and then illustrating how to satisfy that need by supporting the plan or policy advocated in the speech, as follows:
Attention: Get the audience’s attention using a detailed story, shocking example, dramatic statistic, or quotations.
Need: Show how the topic applies to the psychological need of the audience members. The premise is that action is motivated by audience needs. Go beyond establishing that there is a significant problem; show that the need will not go away by itself. Convince the audience members that they each have a personal need to take action.
Satisfaction: Solve the issue. Provide specific and viable solutions that the government or community can implement.
Visualization: Tell the audience what will happen if the solution is or is not implemented. Be visual and detailed. Paint a picture for the audience of what they will experience and what the world will look like when the need is satisfied through the speech’s plan.
Action: Tell the audience members what specific action they can take to solve the problem and change existing policy.
The advantage of Monroe’s motivated sequence is that it emphasizes what the audience can do. Too often, the audience feels like a situation is hopeless; Monroe’s motivated sequence emphasizes the actions the audience can take.
14.3: Sample Persuasive Speech
14.3.1: Sample Persuasive Speech
Persuasion encourages a person to behave in a certain manner, or embrace a point of view related to specific values, attitudes, and beliefs.
Learning Objective
Identify the strengths of Eisenhower’s persuasive speech about military spending
Key Points
Most persuasive speeches are based on policies that require the acknowledgement and support of governments, public bodies, and constituents.
President Eisenhower takes a clear stance against increased military spending, and attempts to change the audience’s attitudes and beliefs by drawing comparisons.
Ending with a strong conclusion that restates the argument and main points, or proposes a call-to-action as Eisenhower does in “Chance for Peace,” is another tool used in persuasive speaking.
Ending with a strong conclusion that re-states the argument and main points, which illustrate the drawbacks of corn ethanol production, is another persuasive tool used in the sample speech.
Key Terms
constituent
A resident of a place represented by an elected official.
simile
A figure of speech in which one thing is compared to another, in the case of English generally using like or as.
Sample Speech: Persuasive Speaking
The main purpose of persuasive speaking is to change, reinforce, or instill the attitudes, beliefs, and values of the audience. There are no formal rules on what topics, formats, or viewpoints qualify as persuasion. However, most persuasive speeches are based on policies that require the acknowledgement and support of governments, public bodies, organizations, and constituents .
Power of Persuasion
President Eisenhower attempted to change prevailing attitudes on the cost of an arms race in his speech “Chance for Peace.”
Just three months into his presidency, U.S. President Dwight D. Eisenhower delivered the speech entitled “Chance for Peace” on April 16th, 1953. The speech was given shortly after the death of Soviet dictator Joseph Stalin. In his speech, Eisenhower likened arms spending to stealing from the people, using similes, and spoke against increased military spending in spite of continued tensions and rivalry with the Soviet Union.
The following is an excerpt from Eisenhower’s address:
Every gun that is made, every warship launched, every rocket fired signifies, in the final sense, a theft from those who hunger and are not fed, those who are cold and are not clothed.
This world in arms is not spending money alone. It is spending the sweat of its laborers, the genius of its scientists, the hopes of its children. The cost of one modern heavy bomber is this: a modern brick school in more than 30 cities. It is two electric power plants, each serving a town of 60,000 population. It is two fine, fully equipped hospitals. It is some fifty miles of concrete pavement. We pay for a single fighter with a half-million bushels of wheat. We pay for a single destroyer with new homes that could have housed more than 8,000 people. . . . This is not a way of life at all, in any true sense. Under the cloud of threatening war, it is humanity hanging from a cross of iron.
Eisenhower attempted to sway his audience by describing what was at stake–exorbitant spending, wasted worker talent, unsafe borders–if the United States pursued an arms race. Although his speech is often described as one of the greatest persuasive speeches of modern times, the large peacetime military budgets established during his administration have continued for half a century.
You can listen to the full audio of Eisenhower’s speech here:
Delivery is “real” when the speaker is honest and talks with the audience without acting.
Learning Objective
List the four main qualities that make a speech “real” and describe their use
Key Points
Ethical–Audiences expect a public speaker’s life to be a reflection of his or her message.
Conversation–Audiences in North America seem to respond more favorably to public speaking that is a natural conversation.
Interactivity–Audiences feel connected to speakers who talk with them, rather than at them.
Eye contact–North American audiences expect the speaker to look them in the eye.
Voice–Each audience member expects a conversational tone but also wants to hear and understand the speaker. Public speakers should always use a microphone to make sure everyone can hear.
Gestures–Audiences expect to see gestures that feel natural, maintain interest, and help convey the message. Gestures may include movements of the hands, face, or other parts of the body.
Key Term
ethics
The study of principles relating to right and wrong conduct.
Example
Hamlet, Prince of Denmark, is airing his opinions about the proper manner of speaking upon the stage. HAMLET’S SPEECH Speak the speech, I pray you, as I pronounced it to you, trippingly on the tongue; but if you mouth it, as many of your players do, I had as lief the town-crier spoke my lines. Nor do not saw the air too much with your hand, thus, but use all gently; for in the very torrent, tempest, and, as I may say, whirlwind of your passion, you must acquire and beget a temperance that may give it smoothness. Oh, it offends me to the soul to hear a robustious periwig-pated fellow tear a passion to tatters, to very rags, to split the ears of the groundlings, who for the most part are capable of nothing but inexplicable dumb-shows and noise. I would have such a fellow whipped for o’erdoing Termagant. It out-herods Herod. Pray you, avoid it. Be not too tame neither, but let your own discretion be your tutor. Suit the action to the word, the word to the action; with this special observance, that you o’erstep not the modesty of nature. For anything so overdone is from the purpose of playing, whose end, both at the first and now, was and is, to hold, as ‘t were, the mirror up to nature; to show virtue her own feature, scorn her own image, and the very age and body of the time his form and pressure. Now this overdone, or come tardy off, though it make the unskilful laugh, cannot but make the judicious grieve; the censure of the which one must in your allowance o’erweigh a whole theater of others. Oh, there be players that I have seen play, and heard others praise, and that highly, not to speak it profanely, that, neither having the accent of Christians nor the gait of Christian, pagan, nor man, have so strutted and bellowed that I have thought some of nature’s journeymen had made men and not made them well, they imitated humanity so abominably. Oh, reform it altogether. And let those that play your clowns speak no more than is set down for them; for there be of them that will themselves laugh, to set on some quantity of barren spectators to laugh too, though in the meantime some necessary question of the play be then to be considered. That’s villainous, and shows a most pitiful ambition in the fool that uses it. Go make you ready.
Keeping it “real”
Successful delivery has two components according to Quintilian 9. A good man (or woman), speaking well has to be “real”, firstly you need to know and speak the truth; and secondly, you cannot be posing or acting when you speak.
Marcus Fabius Quintilianus
A statue of Quintilianus with his hand raised to speak to a crowd.
Ethics of the speaker
Being a real person is the ethical nature of public speaking. Quintilian considered the ethical nature of the speaker first. The speaker is obligated to be a person of good character and speak the truth.
Ethics, also known as moral philosophy, is a branch of philosophy that involves systematizing, defending, and recommending concepts of right and wrong behavior. It comes from the Greek word “ethos,” which means “character”. Not only must the speaker deliver the speech well but he/she must be a person of good character. From the very early days of studying rhetoric, ethics were important. The speaker could not just say one thing and then do something different; he/she was called upon to live by what the he/she was saying. Speaking well, also means speaking justly, where eloquence, wisdom and goodness combine. The Greek philosopher Socrates suggested that evil or bad actions are the result of ignorance and that any person who knows what is truly right will automatically do it. What do you think?
Socrates
Socrates using his “socratic” method as he teaches a student.
How does the speaker keep it real?
Let’s look at two important aspects of speaking well, which may serve as a guide.
Speaking as magnified conversation
In general, audiences in North America seem to respond more favorably to public speaking which is modeled as a natural, but magnified conversation. Public speaking is a conversation with the audience. Working with this model, you will find that certain behaviors will be more successful than others.
Interactivity–Rather than talking “at” the audience, it’s better to be speaking directly “with” the audience. You should, at least mentally, conceive of the audience as responding, asking questions and approving or disapproving of what you are saying. In essence, you are not lost in your own train of thought while ignoring the thoughts of the audience. There is interactivity or a perception of give and take between the audience and yourself as the speaker.
Eye contact–This is an important aspect of successful delivery for North American audiences. They expect you to look them in the eye. Here and in Western Europe, eye contact is interpreted the same way: conveying interest and honesty. People who avoid eye contact when speaking are viewed in a negative light, as withholding information and lacking in general confidence. However, in the Middle East, Africa, and especially Asia eye contact is seen as being disrespectful and even challenging of one’s authority. People who make eye contact, but only briefly, are seen as respectful and courteous.
Voice–you want to speak naturally but loud enough to be heard by all the members of the audience. At a minimum, you need to be intelligible to the audience so that they can comprehend the message. If you are not able to be clearly heard by the audience, then you will want to get special help to improve pronunciation, stress and emphasis.
Gestures–You are not an actor who takes on or plays a role, but rather, one who enlarges the gestures so that everyone can see. A gesture is a form of non-verbal communication in which visible bodily actions communicate particular messages, either in place of speech or together with and in parallel to words. Gestures include movement of the hands, face, or other parts of the body. Today, the conversational speaker, unlike the old school elocutionist who focused more on technique than substance, strives for natural gestures, which develop out of what is being said. As a conversational speaker you do not want to use planned or fixed gestures for dramatic effect. Additionally, you want to avoid any gestures that, out of nervousness or habit, might distract the audience from the message.
Requirements of the occasion
Conversational speaking or dialog with the audience does not mean that you are always informal or use casual speech. Different speaking occasions have different degrees of formality. The audience will judge, as so you need to adapt the appropriateness of dress, posture and word choice associated with how formal or informal the occasion may be. Ultimately, the successful speaker is really true to self and receives the desired response from the audience.
12.1.2: Choosing Your Method of Delivery
Speakers may or may not be able to choose a delivery method, but keeping best speech practices in mind leads to success in each situation.
Learning Objective
Develop your personal delivery style, considering the four methods of speech delivery
Key Points
There are four common methods of delivery: impromptu (little or not preparation), memorization, reading from prepared manuscript, and extemporaneous (with outline or notes).
Develop a speaking persona by manifesting your own honest and sincere personality without imitating the style of others when communicating with the audience.
Have something to say. The first indicator that a person is speaking well is that the speaker will have something to say. Without ideas, opinions, or information, the speech wastes the speaker’s and the audience’s time.
Speak honestly and with sincerity. Unless you thoroughly believe in the message you wish to convey to others, you are not likely to impress them favorably.
Develop your own style; do not imitate. Speaking in a natural conversational style means that the speaker does not imitate the speaking style of other great speakers but may reflect their style or approach as it suits the speaker’s personality.
Key Terms
persona
In the study of communication, persona is a term given to describe the versions of self that all individuals possess. The public persona will differ from the persona an individual will present when he/she happens to be alone.
manuscript
A single, original copy of a book, article, or composition, written by hand or even printed.
impromptu
Improvised; without prior preparation.
Implications for Selection of Method
Four Methods for Different Occasions
There are four common methods of delivery–impromptu with little or no preparation, memorization, reading from prepared manuscript, and extemporaneous with outline or notes. Often you will not have a choice in the method of the delivery; the demands of the situation or the occasion may dictate the method. For example, you may be called on to respond to what someone else has just said, or to add a few words with no time to prepare. Or, you could be called upon to read a proclamation or announcement.
Impromptu
On many different occasions you may be called upon to speak with little or no notice before hand. For an impromptu speech, you may have a minute or two to prepare in your mind before you speak. Additionally, you may be called on to read a letter, scripture, or article to a group without preparation.
Manuscript
You may need to use the manuscript that is provided without adding your own thoughts or comments. However, there are other situations where you will need to prepare your own manuscript— perhaps for publication in a newsletter or to make sure you include exact wording.
Memorized
You may need to memorize a brief speech, scripture, or perhaps a poem as your part in a presentation, rather than being given a manuscript to read .
Extemporaneous
In many situations you will have advanced notice, you can think about what you want to say to your audience and anticipate their responses as you develop an outline for your message. Extemporaneous is the most natural of all methods of prepared delivery where you can successfully achieve a more natural conversation with the audience.
Developing a Speaking Persona for Different Situations
You will want to develop your own persona for all methods of delivery. In the study of communication, persona is a term given to describe the versions of self that all individuals possess. You behave according to the desired impression you wish to create when speaking with others. A person may create or manifest different personas at different times, for different occasions. In particular, the persona you present before others when speaking will differ from the persona your present when you happen to be alone. Here are some important considerations for developing a natural, conversational persona for speech delivery.
Have Something to Say
The first indicator that a person is speaking well is that the speaker will have something to say. Without ideas, opinions, or information, talk becomes the most wasteful product in the world. It is not only a waste of time to the person who insists on delivering it, but a waste of time and patience to the people who are forced to listen. Shakespeare put a man who had nothing to say in to The Merchant of Venice and then had Bassanio describe him as follows:
“Gratiano speaks an infinite deal of nothing, more than any man in all Venice. His reasons are as two grains of wheat hid in two bushels of chaff: you shall seek all day ‘ere you find them, and when you have them, they are not worth the search.”
In essence, you need to think clearly and prepare the content of the message carefully before focusing on delivery.
Speak Sincerely
A second indicator of a good speaker is sincerity. Nothing can be substituted for personal sincerity. Unless you thoroughly believe in the message you wish to convey to others, you are not likely to impress them favorably.
Develop Your Own Style—Do Not Imitate
Speaking in a natural, conversational style means that the speaker does not imitate the speaking style of other great speakers but may reflect their style or approach as it suits the speaker’s personality. For example, shows British rapper Speech Debelle who has developed her own sincere, conversational delivery style in her 2012 album, Freedom of Speech. It is a fatal mistake to set out deliberately to imitate some favorite speaker, and to mold your style after that person. You may observe certain ways or methods in other speakers that will fit in naturally with your style and temperament, so you adopt them. Always be on your guard against anything that might impair your own individuality—even in the slightest degree.
British Rapper Speech Debelle
If you develop your own delivery style, you will always be prepared to give a good speech.
Remember that speaking is a perfectly normal act, which does not call for strange, artificial methods, but only for an extension and development of the familiar act of conversation. The objective is to develop and magnify your own honest and sincere persona as a speaker without imitation when communicating with the audience.
12.1.3: Speaking from a Manuscript
Your manuscript delivery method will vary depending on whether the manuscript is your own or someone else’s.
Learning Objective
Explain the advantages and disadvantages of delivering a speech directly from a manuscript
Key Points
When provided with a manuscript, you need to deliver it exactly as written. It is the original author’s ideas and not your own that you are presenting to the audience.
One important form of manuscript is a proclamation. When you read the proclamation, you create a distinct speech act that puts the statements into effect.
After the speaker reads the manuscript and understands the meaning, he or she can practice creating a conversational delivery by emphasizing important words, creating vocal phrases with the right words together, and varying the pace and emphasis.
If you are preparing your own manuscript for delivery, consider first the audience and write for them as if you were speaking directly to them.
You can now use low cost personal teleprompters to help you deliver sermons, deliver speeches, and create quality audios.
Key Terms
teleprompter
A teleprompter is a display device that prompts the person speaking with an electronic visual text of a speech.
manuscript
A single, original copy of a book, article, or composition, written by hand or even printed.
Proclamation
A statement which is proclaimed; a formal public announcement.
You may need to use the manuscript provided to you without adding your own thoughts or comments. However, there are other situations where you will need to prepare your own manuscript perhaps for publication in a newsletter or to make sure you include exact wording.
When Provided with a Manuscript
You need to delivery it exactly as written. You are delivering words which were prepared by someone else; they are the original author’s ideas and not your own that you are presenting to the audience. The manuscript could take many different forms. It could be a short story, a poem, or an article. You may also be provided with a special type of document, called a proclamation.
Manuscript
A medieval Latin manuscript by Aristotle with original Greek text added in the margins.
With a proclamation, the wording is exact and must be read exactly as written, as it is a distinct speech act that puts the statements into effect. If are reading a proclamation and say, “I now declare…” when you finish you have actually made it happen.
Advantages
You usually have time to prepare which will allow you to fully understand the meaning that needs to conveyed to the audience. Once you understand the meaning, then it is possible to practice reading to create a conversational delivery by emphasizing important words, create vocal phrases with the right words together, and vary the pace and emphasis to convey the meaning of the original. Since you will have the document with you, you can mark it to indicate where you want to add emphasis, pause, and change volume or pitch.
Disadvantages
Of course, the obvious disadvantge is that you are speaking for someone else; your are delivering his or her thoughts and ideas and not your own. You do not have ownership of the ideas but you may be judged since you are delivering the manuscript.
When preparing your own manuscript
If you are preparing your own manuscript for delivery, consider first the audience and write for them as if you were speaking directly to them. You are not writing a book but a speech to be delivered. When you deliver the speech from manuscript, you are challenged to make a connection with the audience rather than simply read words.
Advantages
Preparing your own manuscript prevents you from saying anything you would not say in careful consideration of your topic. It does assure that you say everything you want to say and gives the impression that you are a calm, collected thinker. You have the opportunity to work with a teleprompter to help you speak directly to the audience, but you will still need to practice with its speed and placement.
Disadvantages
There are disadvantages for the speaker preparing his or her own manuscript. It is a challenge, since the speaker will have difficulty maintaining eye contact with the audience to show warmth and sincerity. It may also be difficult for you to actually develop a conversation with the audience while reading. You want to sound natural and develop your own persona which is difficult if a person is just reading his or her words on a page. With the necessary practice, you can perfect and develop a speech and deliver it from a manuscript with careful rehearsal.
When Working with a Teleprompter
You may also work with a teleprompter to increase eye contact and presence with the audience.
Professional Teleprompters
A teleprompter (also called a telescript or an autocue) is a display device that prompts the person speaking with an electronic visual text of a speech or script. Using a teleprompter is similar to the practice of using cue cards. You can see the words on the screen in front of and usually below the camera lens of a professional video camera. The words on the screen are reflected to the eyes of the presenter using a sheet of clear glass or specially prepared beam splitter. Since you do not need to look down to consult written notes, you appear to be speaking spontaneously and can look directly into the camera lens or the audience.
Personal Teleprompters
Fortunately, there are inexpensive teleprompter software applications as well as free web-based teleprompter applications, which will allow you to use a teleprompter to help you deliver sermons, deliver speeches, and create quality audios. These entry-level products work on desktops, laptops, and even tablets.
Teleprompter in use
This teleprompter is in use for a broadcast.
12.1.4: Speaking from Memory
It to your advantage to memorize your speech in some situations, and a distracting disadvantage in others.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate how to deliver a speech from memory so that you appear natural and relatable to the audience
Key Points
Memorized delivery takes two basic forms: the total speech or manuscript is committed to memory, or standard parts of the message are memorized and woven into each speech.
Memorizing your speech allows you to stay in touch with your audience.
One of the main problems of delivering a speech from memory is that it sounds like you are reading since you are focusing your attention on remembering the words.
When writing your speech, write as if you were speaking naturally, directly to an audience.
Key Term
extemporaneous
A type of speech delivery which involves preparation of speaker notes prior to delivery, associated with conversational style of delivery.
Uses of Memorized Delivery
Good orators of the past were expected to deliver their speeches from memory without notes or other aids. Today, you may find it to your advantage to memorize your speech or presentation.
Today, memorization takes two basic forms:
The total speech or manuscript is committed to memory.
Standard parts of a message are memorized and woven into each speech.
Advantages
If you memorize your speech you are more likely to perform better than the speaker reading from a manuscript, since you can stay in touch with your audience. When speaking from memory, you do not need to think about what is coming next or how to express an idea as you would in extemporaneous speaking; therefore, you can give more attention to the audience. Today, we generally admire and stress extemporaneous speaking in our society, but many of the great speeches in history were delivered all or partially from memory.
Disadvantages
One of the main problems of delivering a speech from memory is sounding rehearsed, or like you are reading. It is possible to memorize and deliver a speech with variety and emphasis.
Tips for the Speaker
You may use various approaches to memorize and rehearse your speech. Below are some guidelines to follow when delivering a memorized speech:
When writing the speech, write as if you were speaking naturally, directly to an audience.
Develop an outline of the main points and then memorize the outline.
If delivering the same speech to different audiences over time, memorize the individual sections and then weave them together for each occasion.
If you forget a word or two or a small section, just continue speaking.
Engage the Audience
To be successful, a speaker should connect with the audience, not just recite words.
Martin Luther King, Jr. speaks at a freedom rally.
Overall, if you have the attitude that you are communicating with an audience rather than reciting words, you are likely to succeed.
12.1.5: Impromptu Speeches
An impromptu speech is given with little or no preparation, usually about a topic that the speaker knows well.
Learning Objective
List ways to quickly prepare when called upon to give an impromptu speech
Key Points
Remember that you are generally in control of the content, so you can decide what you are going to talk about and include topics you want to talk about.
Your delivery will naturally be more conversational and spontaneous.
Since you are not well-prepared, you may overlook some significant information, but audience questions can often help fill in the gaps.
Become familiar with common organizational patterns so you can apply them in any situation using the three part speech outline of an Introduction, Body, and Conclusion.
Key Term
impromptu
Improvised; without prior preparation.
Impromptu Speech
An impromptu speech is given with little or no preparation, yet almost always with some advance knowledge on the topic. When called to speak “off the cuff” on the “spur of the moment,” is is usually because the speaker is quite knowledgeable about the subject. For example, if called on to speak in class, a student might give a short impromptu speech about a topic that was in the assigned readings. Business meetings also use a “check in” to tell everyone else about a current project. In small informal meetings, the audience will interrupt an impromptu speech and ask questions, which helps guide the speech and the information that is presented. When campaigning, politicians sometimes respond to reporters or voters almost anywhere and at any time.
Impromptu Speech
Mohamed el-Beltagy, running for the lower house of Parliament, stops to give an impromptu speech.
Advantages
Remember that you are generally in control of the content you are presenting, so you can include topics that you want to talk about. Additionally, you can use personal examples from experience to support what you are saying. Since you are an authority on the topic, you want to speak with conviction like you really mean it. Your delivery will naturally be more conversational and spontaneous. Since you are not prepared with pages of notes, you are more likely to speak directly to the audience just like if you were speaking to another person in a conversation.
Disadvantages
Since you are not well-prepared, you may have difficulty thinking of what to say or formulating the ideas once you get up to speak. Although you are familiar with the topic, your speech may lack details and supporting information. If the audience is passive and does not ask questions to guide you, you may overlook some significant content. Hopefully, someone in the audience will ask questions so you can fill in gaps. Additionally, impromptu speaking is rarely appropriate for occasions which require more reasoned discourse with supporting ideas or more formal events.
Tips for the Speaker (Impromptu Preparation)
What do you do if you are asked to speak at the last minute? It is best to become familiar with common organization patterns so you can apply them in any situation and then also consider what you have been asked to speak about. Are you presenting your opinion? State your opinion, the reasons why you support that opinion, and conclude. Is it something that happened? Retell the event from beginning to end (first, next, then, etc.). Is it a demonstration? Explain each step in the process from first to last.
Make sure to plan an introduction and a conclusion. If possible, take a few moments to think about what you want to say to introduce the topic and have some way of concluding.
Make a few notes for yourself on a card, phone, or iPad. Or, text yourself a few single words to remind yourself of the important ideas.
Consider the simple three part outline of an Introduction, Body, and Conclusion, and fit your ideas into that pattern.
Do not try to remember a detailed outline for your entire speech; just remember the order of important points.
Be sure to stop when you have made your points.
If you do not know what to say next, you can summarize and paraphrase what you have just said, and then will probably be ready to move on to the next topic.
Remember that, in most situations, you will know more about the subject than the audience. Usually you will not be called up to speak impromptu about something you know nothing about, so you have probably spoken about the general topic before or you probably have knowledge to share with others.
Talk like you mean it. In other words speak with conviction. You are explaining your ideas or knowledge and you are an authority.
Relax!
12.1.6: Extemporaneous Speeches
Extemporaneous, the most natural method of delivery, involves glancing at notes while maintaining crucial eye contact with the audience.
Learning Objective
Give examples of note-taking strategies for extemporaneous speeches
Key Points
There are two popular methods for organizing ideas to create a graphical representation for speaker notes–outlining and mind or concept mapping.
An outline is a list of items with each item divided into additional sub-items. Each level in an outline has at least two subcategories. There are three basic types of hierarchical outlines–sentence, topic and phrase.
Topic and phrase are the most useful for speaker notes since they allow the speaker to quickly glance at the notes while maintaining eye contact with the audience.
Mind mapping and concept mapping are visual representation of ideas and concepts. Both mind maps and concept maps can be used to graphically show the relationship between ideas for a speech and as speaker notes for delivery.
A mind map diagram starts with a single word as a central branch node and lesser categories as sub-branches going off from the central node. A concept maps can have multiple hubs or nodes with clusters of concepts labeled to show the kind of relationship.
While extemporaneous speaking may be free of the constraints of memorization and manuscript speaking, it is not careless talk; the speaker prepares notes in advance in order to deliver an organized speech.
Key Terms
mind map
A diagram used to represent words, ideas, tasks or other items linked to and arranged radially around a central key word or idea.
concept map
A diagram showing the relationships among concepts, with the concepts drawn in rectangular boxes, which are connected with labelled arrows that denote the relationships between concepts, such as “is a,” “gives rise to,” “results in,” “is required by,” or “contributes to.”
extemporaneous
A type of speech delivery which involves preparation of speaker notes prior to delivery, associated with conversational style of delivery.
Extemporaneous Speech
Extemporaneous speaking is one of the most natural methods for delivering a prepared speech. You can use an extemporaneous speech to achieve a more natural tone, flow and style with the audience.
First, think about your topics and anticipate the audience’s reception to your speech. You can develop speech notes based on this preparation and use them to aid you during the presentation.
Preparing Speech Notes
There are two popular methods for creating a graphical representation for notes: outlining, and mind or concept mapping.
An outline is a list of items with each item divided into additional sub-items. Each level in an outline has at least two subcategories. There are three basic types of outlines:
Sentence outline – Each complete sentence includes a heading or single sentence about the subject of the outline.
Topic outline – Each topic is listed and functions as a subtopic of the outline’s subject.
Phrase outline – Each short phrase entry is a subtopic of the aforementioned main entry.
Speaking notes, topic outlines, and phrase outlines have an advantage over sentence outlines. For example, you can easily look at your notes for reference and as a personal reminder of which topics to discuss as you’re speaking.
Outlines commonly take two forms: alphanumeric and decimal.
An alphanumeric outline includes a capitalized number or letter at the beginning of each topic. Look at the sample:
Thesis statement: E-mail and internet monitoring is an invasion of employees’ rights
I. The situation: Over 80% of today’s companies monitor their employees.
….A. To prevent fraudulent activities, theft, and other workplace related violations.
….B. To more efficiently monitor employee productivity.
II. What are employees’ privacy rights when it comes to electronic monitoring and surveillance?
….A. American employees have basically no legal protection from mean and snooping bosses.
……..1. There are no federal or State laws protecting employees.
……..2. Employees may assert privacy protection for their own personal effects.
….B. Most managers believe that there is no right to privacy in the workplace.
……..1. Workplace communications should be about work; anything else is a misuse of company equipment and company time.
……..2. Employers have a right to prevent misuse by monitoring employee communication.
Decimal outline
The decimal outline shows how each item at every level relates to the whole sample.
Thesis statement:
1.0 Introduction
….1.1 Brief history of Liz Claiborne
….1.2 Corporate environment
2.0 Career opportunities
….2.1 Operations management
……..2.1.1 Traffic
……..2.1.2 International trade and corporate customs
……..2.1.3 Distribution
….2.2 Product development
The outline could be printed or handwritten as in this expert from Richard Nixon’s Checkers speech.
Speech Notes
Notes from Richard Nixon’s Checkers speech.
Mind Mapping and Concept Mapping
Mind mapping and concept mapping are visual representations of ideas and concepts. A mind map is a diagram which starts with a single word and then branches out from the central node, with lesser categories as sub-branches of the larger branches. Concept maps are more free-form, since multiple hubs and clusters can be created. Unlike mind maps, concept maps do not fix on a single conceptual center.
For example, in the mind map for student learning , you can view the main component idea and related ideas which connect to its branch nodes. You can also use a mind map as speaking notes.
Mind Map
A mind map is a diagram that starts with one word and expands into additional categories.
Practice and Rehearsal Guidelines
The following guidelines are best practices on how to practice and rehearse an extemporaneous speech:
Speak in a conversational style by pretending you are with your audience.
Rehearse with your graphics and coordinate them with your talk.
Display your graphics only when you are talking about them.
Rehearse in front of others and solicit feedback.
Record and listen to your timed practice speech.
Prepare for interruptions and questions at the end.
Although extemporaneous speaking may not require memorization and manuscript speaking, organize and prepare your content and notes ahead of time to deliver a speech that will be well received by your audience .
Free Speech
“Free speech doesn’t mean careless talk!” produced by the Office for Emergency Management.
A sign with a parrot saying “Free speech doesn’t mean careless talk!”
12.1.7: Key Differences Between Prepared and Impromptu Speeches
The key difference between a prepared and impromptu speech is the amount of time given to the speaker to rehearse and prepare.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between prepared and impromptu speeches
Key Points
An impromptu speech is one where the speaker is given no preparation time at all.
A prepared speech is one where the speaker is given the topic well in advance and the speaker is given time to research it and rehearse the speech.
The different type of prepared speeches include extemporaneous, memorized, and manuscript.
Key Term
impromptu
Improvised; without prior preparation.
Differences Between Prepared and Impromptu Speeches
There are several different types of speeches that one can deliver. They range from perfectly memorized, to completely off the cuff with no preparation at all.
Prepared Speech
The most common type of speech is a prepared speech. For a prepared speech, the speaker was been given the topic in advance, had time to do background research on it, and has practiced delivering the speech.
This type of speech may be used when giving a presentation or speaking in a business meeting.
Using PowerPoint Slides
PowerPoint slides can be used in a prepared speech.
Sgt. Lorenzo Parco, a Sergeants Course Student, uses the new SMART board to show a PowerPoint slide during a class.
However, preparation does not necessarily mean memorizing every word. A prepared speech can be an extemporaneous, manuscript, or memorized speech, or a combination of these techniques. An extemporaneous speech is often delivered with the aid of note cards to help the speaker remember key points and content order. A memorized speech is one that is recited from memory without the aid of scripts or cue cards. A manuscript speech is one that has the entire speech written out for reference.
When preparing for a speech one should:
Rehearse the speech as it will be presented (that is, with visual aids, standing or sitting as will be appropriate for the real speech, etc.)
Time the rehearsal
Rehearse in front of others
If possible, rehearse in the location where the speech will be delivered to become more comfortable in the space, see how the audience will view the speech, and see how much space is available for movement
Create a visual and audio recording of the speech, and look for areas where body language or vocal performance should be improved
Impromptu Speech
Another type of speech that is less commonly seen in society (but nonetheless very useful to understand) is the impromptu speech. Impromptu speaking occurs when the speaker is given no time to prepare for the speech; he or she is given a topic and must immediately begin speaking on it. This speaking style involves thinking on one’s feet and being able to plan the flow of the speech as the speaker is giving it.
While this seems like a difficult style in which to give a speech, most speech in a person’s daily life is impromptu. People do not background research on every conversation or prepare for hours before speaking to friends. However, having to give this kind of a speech to an audience or on a topic one is not so familiar with can definitely be a challenge.
The most common example of a real world impromptu speech is the elevator pitch. When in an unanticipated situation where one is speaking to someone who has the ability to advance one’s career or provide an opportunity in a new field, it is crucial to be able to deliver an excellent impromptu speech.
12.1.8: Additional Notes on Preparing and Delivering Impromptu Speeches
An impromptu speech is given with little or no preparation, but the presenter is usually very knowledgeable about the subject matter.
Learning Objective
Describe methods to successfully deliver an impromptu speech
Key Points
Anticipate common questions; if you are asked about your line of work at a social event, you can have a response prepared. Having an elevator pitch ready is one way to prepare.
If you think you will be called on to speak, it is a good idea to take a few minutes and make notes on important points.Select a familiar organizational pattern and then add an introduction and summary conclusion statement to the main ideas.
You want to maintain eye contact, speak directly to the other person(s,) and minimize noise which will interfere with your delivery at an informal event.
In a formal, stand-up event you want to put comments in context of the occasion, maintain eye contact while glancing at notes, and use internal summaries and transitions to show progress as you move to the conclusion.
In a Q&A session, you want to listen attentively and repeat the question that you are answering. If you do not know the answer, say so and make arrangement for a follow-up electronic response.
Key Term
impromptu
Improvised; without prior preparation.
Additional Notes on Preparing and Delivering Impromptu Speeches
An impromptu speech is given with little or no preparation. However, you will generally be called up to speak about a topic in which you are familiar or considered an expert. Impromptu speeches can take many different forms and occur in different situations. There are ways to prepare and deliver impromptu speeches by anticipating the more common impromptu contexts.
Preparation—Think before you Speak!
Anticipate Common Questions
In certain situations you can anticipate the types of questions or requests which will require a seemingly impromptu response. For example, you might be asked about your line of work at a social event. Since you know your occupation, you can have a response prepared. You might have a special project or interest that you want to pitch to others.
Elevator pitch
An elevator pitch is a short summary used to quickly identify what you do or what project is important to you in about 30 seconds, or the length of an elevator ride. So, when someone asks you what you do for a living, you can quickly and seemingly without preparation give an impromptu pitch or description.
Stand-up Speaking Event
If you think you will be called on to speak, it is a good idea to take a few minutes and make notes on the important points before you speak:
Apply a three part plan for speech. You have learned about the three part speech structure, which are Introduction, Body and Conclusion. Apply the structure and think about your main points and thesis. List two or three main ideas for the body, develop the introduction by creating an opener, and present your conclusion with a summary and a reference to the opening statement from the introduction.
Use a common organizational pattern. Think about the common patterns of organization with which you are already familiar: topical, spatial, chronological, and problem/solution—choose the one that fits the ideas you have just jotted down.
Use phrases and single line notes. Make sure to make your notes as one line phrases in outline form. You can put your notes on paper or any device that allows you to quickly glance at a line and back up at the audience (like your smartphone).
Often, you will be presenting content that you have already covered with other audiences. On those occasions, you can use the same content but you will need to modify the introduction to reference the current occasion or audience.
Delivery
Informal Context
Many situations can be informal social occasions, meetings, or one-on-one talks where you could be standing or sitting.
Maintain eye contact—it is important in Western cultural settings to look directly at the person you are speaking to so that you have each other’s attention.
Eliminate noise—you want to make sure that you can actually hear each other easily in a noisy room. If you are experiencing noise, you might suggest stepping aside to a less noisy corner to delivery your short message.
Informal Meetings and Q&A
Impromptu speeches are usually used in short informal meetings where the audience can interrupt and ask questions to help guide the speech and retrieve the information they need from the speaker. It is important in this situation to stay focused by repeating the question and answering it without going off on a tangent.
Stand-up Speaking Context
There are situations where you will be asked to share a few words with a large audience.You will want to apply your knowledge of public speaking to deliver a short, organized speech.
Put comments in context—you may want to start by putting your comments in context as a way of introducing your message. For example, you may refer to the occasion or the previous speaker.
Maintain eye contact—hopefully, you had a few minutes to prepare so that you can glance at your one line notes and then back up to the audience.
Use summaries and transitions—make sure to summarize and show connections between ideas; at the end, bring the message to closure with a summary statement.
Formal Speech with Q&A Session
Following a speech you will often participate in a Q & A session. Members of the audience will ask questions and you will respond without time to prepare:
Listen attentively to the question, repeat it, and provide a short focused answer .
If you do not know the answer, say so and make arrangements to respond later electronically.
You are the expert; you will know more about the topic than your listeners. Remember that the listeners want to hear what you have to say, even if it is slightly disorganized.
Q&A Sessions
Tommy Chong listens attentively during a Q&A session.
12.2: Speaking in the Real World
12.2.1: Practical Tips for Speaking in Non-Academic Settings
Non-academic speeches still require understanding your audience, adequate preparation, structure and a mindfulness of the occasion.
Learning Objective
Give examples of non-academic speeches and how to prepare them
Key Points
Two types of speeches given in non-academic settings are entertainment speeches and persuasive speeches.
To be successful in an entertainment speech, you must adapt to your audience and be mindful of the time.
Essential tips for persuasive speaking include understanding your audience, focusing on the speech’s end result, using words with heavy emotional appeal, and identifying why your topic is important.
Key Term
persuasion
is the influence of beliefs, attitudes, intentions, motivations, or behaviors.
Two types of speeches given in non-academic settings are entertainment speeches and persuasive speeches. Entertainment speeches may be given at a wedding or other social event. Persuasive speeches may be given as part of a political campaign or at a charity event.
Some examples of places where someone might be invited to give a non-academic speech:
Rotary club
Wedding
Political campaign or event
Charity event or benefit
Acceptance speech of an award
Reception or banquet
Conference dinners or lunches
Grievance Speech at a funeral
Informative speech (keynote speaker)
Interviews
Wedding Toast
A wedding toast is an example of an entertainment speech.
Practical Tips for Entertainment Speeches
People often make the mistake of thinking they can improvise, or “wing,” an entertainment speech by telling a few jokes or funny stories. In many cases, instead of being entertaining, the speech falls flat. Therefore, it is very important to prepare your entertainment speech. Some questions you should consider before giving an entertainment speech include:
Is the content appropriate for the occasion?
What do you know about your audience? Will they respond well to the content of your speech?
Is the speech too short or too long? (Toasts, for example, are typically no longer than a few minutes.)
Practical Tips for Persuasive Speeches
In a political setting or money-raising campaign, a persuasive speech may be used to get audience members to change their attitudes or beliefs about a certain topic. In the case of fundraising, the speech is meant to convince people that the cause is worthy of a donation. To be as persuasive as possible, a speaker needs to understand some basic information about persuasion:
Focus on the end result of your speech when preparing – all parts of your speech should focus on the end goal of your persuasive topic.
Relate to and understand your audience – Start your speech by finding common ground with your audience, using humor or other similarities you might have. People tend to like people who are similar to them in some way.
Chose your words wisely – focus on terms that have heavy emotional appeal like “freedom,” “right,” “wrong” and “liberty. “
Identify why your persuasive topic is relevant to your audience- this will heighten interest and make your speech more immediately important. This is particularly important for persuasive speeches requiring a quick action by the audience.
Some additional resources on practical public speaking tips:
These additional resources provide tips on public speaking and include both videos and lists of tips to make your non-academic speech as engaging as possible.
http://www.toastmasters.org/tips.asp – A public speaking society with tips on giving speeches.
http://www.presentationskills.ca/Practical-Speaking-Tips.html – Speaking tips for professionals
http://www.mindtools.com/CommSkll/PublicSpeaking.htm – Article on public speaking tips and improving confidence.
http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AykYRO5d_lI – Public speaking tips from Toastmasters (a public speaking society).
12.3: Effective Vocal Delivery
12.3.1: Volume
Speakers control the production of sound either using their own voice or a microphone so that amplified sound is loud enough to be heard.
Learning Objective
List methods of using volume to effectively deliver your speech
Key Points
Volume is the perceived loudness of the speaker. Loudness is what the audience actually perceives and it correlates with the physical strength (amplitude).
When speaking naturally without any amplification, you need to keep in mind the distance to be covered by your voice and adjust sound production accordingly.
In large rooms or when using videoconferencing equipment, you use a microphone to convert sound into electrical signals for amplification.
Lavalier mics, commonly used by speakers, are usually attached to collars or ties with small clips. The cord may be hidden by clothes and either run to a radio frequency transmitter or into a mixer.
Key Terms
loudness
The characteristic of a sound that is primarily a psychological correlate of physical strength (amplitude). More formally, it is defined as “that attribute of auditory sensation in terms of which sounds can be ordered on a scale extending from quiet to loud. “
amplifier
This is a particular type of speaker used to amplify voices and musical instruments at live performances.
Lavalier Mic
A lavalier microphone or lavalier (or lav or lapel mic) is a small electret (electric, magnet) or dynamic microphone used for television, theater, and public speaking applications, in order to allow hands-free operation.
Volume
Volume is the loudness of the speaker. It is the psychological characteristic of physical strength (amplitude). It is perceived as auditory sensation by the listener which can be ordered on a scale from quiet to loud. Loudness is then a subjective measure of the listener, which is often confused with objective measures of sound strength such as sound pressure level (in decibels), sound intensity, or sound power. Amplitude is the strength or power of the wave signal. Higher amplitudes on the wave graph are interpreted as a higher volume, hence the name “amplifier” for a device that increases amplitude.
Determining the Volume
Higher amplitude will be perceived as louder sound.
A diagram of a sound wave with its frequency (pitch) and amplitude (loudness) labeled.
Using the “Naked” Speaking Voice
When speaking naturally without any amplification you need to keep in mind the distance to be covered by your voice. You might compare speaking with the act of throwing a ball. Consider how much more muscular effort is needed to throw the ball a long distance than is required to throw it a short one. As you speak, think of your words as balls and mentally watch them covering the space between you and your audience. Notice how you unconsciously lengthen the voice. If speaking in a face-to-face group without a microphone ask yourself if you are loud enough to be heard by audience members in the last row. Speaking to a large group will require more energy to breathe and control your sound production.
To become a better speaker with your “naked” speaking voice, try the following techniques:
Practice speaking in a large room with a friend who moves farther and farther away from you until the friend reaches the rear of the room and can still hear you.
Make sure that you are standing straight and not cramped so you have the maximum capacity for breathing and forcing air out of the lungs for sound production.
Practice speaking by thinking of people at different distances to you such as at your elbow, across the room, or in the back of a large hall.
Using a microphone
In large rooms or when using videoconferencing equipment, you will use a microphone to convert sound into electrical signals for amplification. The signal may then be sent to an amplifier. The electronic amplifier increases the power of a signal. It does this by taking energy from a power supply and controlling the output to match the input signal shape but with a larger amplitude. A loudspeaker or headset receives the input to produce the amplified sound.
Microphone
Microphones are used by a speaker for large audiences, during recording, or when videoconferencing.
There are several different types of microphones that the speaker might commonly use in different situations, such as:
Hand-held mics – High quality mics usually attempt to isolate the diaphragm from vibrations using foam padding, suspension, or some other method. Low quality mics tend to transfer vibrations from the casing right into the diaphragm, resulting in a terrible noise.
Lavalier mics – These are attached by a small clip to the clothing of the speaker, usually to collars or ties. The cord may be hidden by clothes and either run to a radio frequency transmitter or a digital audio recorder kept in a pocket or clipped to a belt (for mobile work), or directly to the mixer. These usually do not have protection from handling noise.
Stationary mics – These are permanently attached to a podium. With an attached microphone, you are limited to the space immediately in front of the podium. Some stationary mics are in a holder on the podium, which can be removed to allow you to move around at least the length of the connecting cable.
Microphones can be placed in several different arrangements in the room for recording or videoconferencing, such as:
In close – The microphone is placed relatively close, within three to twelve inches, which reduces extraneous noise.
In distant or ambient miking – The microphone is placed at some distance from the speaker. The goal is to get a broader, natural mix of the sound source, along with ambient sound, including reverberation from the room or hall.
In room miking – This is used together with a close microphone, sometimes during the speaker Q&A.
To make the most out of a microphone, a speaker should consider these techniques:
Hold the microphone about six to eight inches from your mouth and speak over the microphone.
Make sure you have the right microphone for speaking. Don’t just use whatever mic is at hand.
Note that lavalier mics do not usually have protection from handling noise. It is therefore important to make sure they will not be moved or bumped.
Conduct a sound check with any microphone. Make sure to test with the speakers in the actual room.
12.3.2: Rate
Rate is the speed of speaking in words per minute from slow to fast, with normal rate averaging about 125 words per minute.
Learning Objective
Use variance in the rate at which you speak to convey different emotions or emphasize important parts of your message
Key Points
You can vary the rate depending of the emotions you are feeling or the type of message you are communicating. If you are experiencing joy, you will speak at a fast rate compared to a speaker who is expressing surprise who will speak at a much faster rate.
When speaking you want to speak at a varied rate so that you can emphasize important parts of your message.
Do you speak fast because you are in a hurry to finish or are nervous? Caution, slow down!
Key Terms
rate
speed of speaking, measured in words per minute
paralanguage
The non-verbal elements of speech used to modify meaning and convey emotion, such as pitch, volume, and intonation.
Rate is Speed of Speaking Measured in Words Per Minute
Rate is how fast or slow a person speaks. Rate is part of the paralanguage of speech along with loudness and pitch. It is not language but it accompanies all of your spoken use of language and can convey attitude and emotion. You can vary the rate depending on the emotions you are feeling or the type of message you are communicating. For example, if you are experiencing joy, you will speak at a fast rate compared to a speaker who is expressing surprise who will speak at a much faster rate. Normally, you speak about 125 words per minute. But you may speak much slower at about 100 wpm if you are giving a slide presentation.
You will find that the rate of speaking in audiobooks is about 150-160 words per minute whereas auctioneers can speak at about 250 wpm. According to the Guinness World Record, the current fastest speaker is Steve Woodmore, who was clocked at a rate of 637 wpm. Caution–slow down a minute to consider what you might do with your speech rate to be more effective.
Warning Sign
Just like a traffic sign warns about certain upcoming speed limits, a speaker needs to monitor their rate during a speech.
Tips for Speakers
When speaking you want to speak at a varied rate so that you can emphasize important parts of your message.
You also want to change the rate for the mood or emotion of the message and the occasion. If you want to show excitement at a pep rally you will naturally speak at a faster rate than if you were speaking at a funeral where you would speak slower because you are sad or contemplative.
You might also speak slower if you are making choices and thinking carefully about what you are saying; a slower pace may conveys your thoughtfulness to the audience.
Use a recorder to record your speech so you can clock your actual speaking rate.
Finally, ask yourself if you are speaking too fast because you are nervous!
12.3.3: Pitch
Changing the pitch while speaking can convey shades of meaning such as emphasis or surprise, or distinguish a statement from a question.
Learning Objective
Define pitch and describe how pitch changes can change the meaning of sentences
Key Points
Pitch is the auditory attribute of sound ordered on a scale from low to high. You can think about the notes on a musical score with pitch getting higher as you move up the scale.
For men and women the size difference of the vocal folds, reflecting male-female differences in larynx size, will influence pitch range so that adult male voices are usually lower-pitched with larger folds than female voices.
Consciously or unconsciously the speaker will use different patterns of pitch to convey different meanings to the listener.
In public speaking you can apply changes in pitch not only to a single word such as an exclamation, “Oh! ” but to any group of syllables, words, and even sentences to convey different meanings.
Avoid monotony, speaking with one pitch tone or little variety in pitch. Make sure to vary the speech as you speak to show emphasis and change in meaning.
Key Terms
intonation
The rise and fall of the voice in speaking. Some texts use “inflection” instead of intonation to indicate change in pitch.
pitch
The perceived frequency of a sound or note. Higher frequency notes are higher pitch and lower frequency notes are lower pitch.
Pitch Is Ordered on a Scale from Low to High
Pitch is the auditory attribute of sound ordered on a scale from low to high. You can think about the notes on a musical score with pitch getting higher as you move up the scale. Pitch is closely related to frequency of sound waves; it is almost entirely determined by how quickly the sound wave is making the air vibrate and has almost nothing to do with the intensity, or amplitude, of the wave, which relates to loudness. That is, “high” pitch means very rapid oscillation, and “low” pitch corresponds to slower oscillation.
Measuring the Pitch
The higher pitch sounds move up the treble clef and the lower pitch sounds move down the bass clef.
An example of treble and bass clefs with note letters and numbers.
Pitch for Male and Female Speakers
As a speaker you want to find a pitch that is suitable for speaking. Generally, you want to use a pitch range that would normally be comfortable for your natural conversation. For men and women the size difference of the vocal folds, reflecting male-female differences in larynx size, will influence available pitch range. Adult male voices are usually lower-pitched and have larger folds. The male vocal folds are between 17mm and 25mm in length. The female vocal folds are between 12.5mm and 17.5mm in length.
Uses of Pitch for Communicating Different Meanings
The pitch or pitch contour in which a syllable is pronounced conveys shades of meaning such as emphasis or surprise, or distinguishes a statement from a question. All languages use pitch pragmatically as intonation (or inflection as is used in some texts) to communicate different meanings—for emphasis, to convey surprise or irony, or to pose a question. Generally speaking, there are four types of pitch changes you can make, as follows:
Rising intonation means the pitch of the voice rises over time [↗];
Falling intonation means that the pitch falls with time [↘];
Dipping intonation falls and then rises [↘];
Peaking intonation rises and then falls [↗].
Consciously or unconsciously the speaker will use the different patterns of pitch to convey different meanings to the listener. Consider the uses of pitch change and the associated meanings in the different categories as follows:
Informational: for example, “I saw a ↘man in the garden” answers “Whom did you see? ” or “What happened? “, while “I ↘saw a man in the garden” answers “Did you hear a man in the garden? “
Grammatical: for example, a rising pitch turns a statement into a yes-no question, as in “He’s going ↗home? “
Illocution: the intentional meaning is signaled by the pitch pattern, for example, “Why ↘don’t you move to California? ” (a question) versus “Why don’t you ↗move to California? ” (a suggestion).
Attitudinal: high declining pitch signals more excitement than does low declining pitch, as in “Good ↗morn↘ing” versus “Good morn↘ing. “
Textual: information not in the sentence is signaled by the absence of a statement-ending decline in pitch, as in “The lecture was canceled” (high pitch on both syllables of “cancelled”, indicating continuation); versus “The lecture was can↘celed. ” (high pitch on first syllable of “canceled”, but declining pitch on the second syllable, indicating the end of the first thought).
In public speaking you can apply changes in pitch not only to a single word such as an exclamation, “Oh! ” but to any group of syllables, words, and even sentences to convey different meanings. You can change pitch of successive syllables in a word, word groups, or successive sentences. You want to make sure that you use pitch to convey the intended meaning so that you do not drop the pitch, for example, until you have completed an idea.
Additionally, in natural conversation pitch changes make some words stand out more than others, you can do the same in your public speaking for emphasis. You can use pitch to draw the listeners’ attention to words or phrases that are more important than others. When speaking you will naturally use a range of pitches to convey different meanings.
Speaker Tips
Avoid monotony, speaking with one pitch tone or little variety in pitch. Make sure to vary the speech as you speak to show emphasis and change in meaning.
Practice saying sentences with different intonation patterns to change the meaning. For example, if you make a statement with falling intonation at the end, you can turn it into a question by raising the intonation at the end. Try for example, “See what I mean,” and “See what I mean? “
12.3.4: Pauses
A speaker may use pauses to enhance the message delivery; a speaker may also user filler words and pauses that distract from the message.
Learning Objective
Classify pauses as effective or ineffective
Key Points
You may use a pause to emphasize that the information coming next is important, or to give the audience time to process what you have just said.
Repetitive, unnecessary pauses like speech disfluencies, filler pauses, false starts—particularly filler words such as like, you know, and so—can distract from the message.
Record a conversation and count the use of unnecessary pauses and filler words in relation to the other words in the speech. See if you can reduce the ratio over time.
Key Terms
filler
A sound or word that is spoken in conversation by one participant to signal to others that he/she has paused to think but is not yet finished speaking.
Pause
Pause may refer to a rest, hesitation, or temporary stop.
disfluencies
Speech disfluencies are breaks, irregularities, or non-lexical vocables that occur within the flow of otherwise fluent speech. These include false starts, fillers, and repaired utterances (correcting slips of the tongue or mispronunciations).
Pauses
Pauses can enhance delivery or be filled needlessly and distract the audience.
A pause may refer to a rest, hesitation, or temporary stop. It is an interval of silence and may vary in length. The speaker may use pauses to enhance the message delivery or fill the pauses needlessly and distract the audience from the message.
Efficient and Effective Pauses
You may use a pause to emphasize that the information coming next is important, or to give the audience time to process what you have just said . Consider some of the ways that you might use pauses effectively in your delivery.
Using Pauses
Jimmy Wales pauses for dramatic effect in response to Amanda Cogdon at the 2006 Time 100 gala.
Pause enables the speaker to gather thoughts before delivering the final appeal: pause just before the utterance, think about what you want to say, and then deliver your final appeal with renewed strength.
Pause prepares the listener to receive your message: pause and give the attention powers of your audience a rest. The thought that follows a pause is much more dynamic than if no pause had occurred.
Pause creates effective suspense: suspense can create interest. The audience will want to find out the conclusion or what happened if you pause before the punch line or conclusion.
Pause after an important idea: pausing gives the audience time to process what you have just said before you continue with your delivery.
Pause at the end of a unit: you may pause to signal the close of a unit of thought, such as a sentence or main point.
Ineffective Pauses
Different types of pauses that could present problems for the speaker:
Speech Disfluencies
Speech disfluencies are breaks, irregularities, or non-lexical vocables that occur within the flow of otherwise fluent speech, including false starts (words and sentences that are cut off in the middle), phrases that are restarted and repeated, grunts, or fillers like uh, erm, and well.
Filled Pauses
Filled pauses are repetitions of syllables and words; reformulations; or false starts, where the speaker rephrases to fit the representation of grammatical repairs, partial repeats, or searching for words to carry the meaning.
Filler Words
Filler words are spoken in conversation by one participant to signal to others that he or she has paused to think, but is not yet finished speaking. Different languages have different characteristic filler sounds. The most common filler sounds in English are: uh /ə/, er /ɚ/, and um /əm/.
Today’s youth uses other fillers. The following are among the more prevalent:
y’know,
so,
actually,
literally,
basically,
right,
I’m tellin’ ya,
you know what I mean.
Placeholder
Names
Placeholder names are filler words like thingamajig, which refer to objects or people whose names are temporarily forgotten, irrelevant, or unknown.
Tips for speaker
Record a conversation and count the use of unnecessary pauses and filler words in relation to the other words in the speech. See if you can reduce the ratio over time.
Remember that as you become more confident and familiar with speaking it will be easier to reduce the frequency of many of the unnecessary filler words and pauses.
12.3.5: Articulation and Pronunciation
Articulation focuses on making individual sounds and pronunciation focuses on stress, rhythm, and intonation of the syllables in the word.
Learning Objective
Define articulation and pronunciation
Key Points
In articulation you change the sounds coming from your vocal folds by moving the teeth, tongue, and lips in recognizable patterns.
After practice, if you can not physically produce the sound, then you may want to consult with a professional speech therapist to help you with articulation.
In pronunciation you change the sounds of words by using stress. rhythm, and tone change on different syllables of the word.
The syllable is the phonological “building block” of words. It is a unit of organization for a sequence of speech sounds. For example, the word water is composed of two syllables: wa and ter.
Practice to make sure you are not substituting or omitting sounds when you say a word, and pay particular attention to common sound substitutions such as ‘tin for thin and d for th so that you do not say ‘den for then or goin’ for going.
Install an online dictionary with audio pronunciation guides on your cellphone or laptop so you can listen to words that are troublesome to you when you are practicing.
Key Terms
pronunciation
The way in which the words of a language are made to sound when speaking.
articulation
Use of tongue, lips, jaw, and other speech organs to make a sound. Often the concept is only used for the production of consonants,
intonation
The rise and fall of the voice in speaking. Some texts use “inflection” instead of intonation to indicate change in pitch.
Articulation, the last step in speech production
We as humans are unique in our use of tongue, lips, and other movable parts of the speech mechanism. The first act of speech is breathing, in which you get air into a storage chamber; second is phonation, the process by which you force air into vibration by the action of the vocal folds; third, resonation, in which your mouth,nose and throat cavities amplify the sound so you can hear it; and finally there is articulation, in which you modify the sound by movement of the teeth, tongue, and lips into recognizable patterns. There are only forty-four sounds to master, and as young child you started making them by mastering simple sounds which you later articulated into repetitive sound combinations and then words.
How Humans Speak
The human pharynx is situated immediately below the mouth and nasal cavity, and above the esophagus and larynx.
A diagram of a human head that shows the lips, jaw, tongue, nasal cavity, palate, oral cavity, pharynx, epiglottis, larynx opening into the pharynx, larynx, and esophagus.
Here you are concerned with intelligibility. Can the audience comprehend what you are saying? If you produce the basic sounds of the language in a manner which is different from the language users in the audience, at the most basic level your speech will not be understood. You might substitute one sound for another at the beginning of a word such as ‘dis for this and “w” for “r” so you would say “wabbit” rather than “rabbit. ” Or you might leave a sound off the end of a word, such as in goin’ for going, in casual speech. But, the real challenge is whether or not you can produce the “correct” sound when it is required. If you can not physically produce the sound, then you may want to consult with a professional speech therapist to help you with articulation.
Tips for Speaker
Practice to make sure you are not substituting or omitting sounds when you say a word, or adding sounds such as needcessity for necessity.
Pay particular attention to common sound substitutions such as t for th so that you don’t say ‘tin for thin and d for th so that you dont say ‘den for then.
Practice reading and recording passages with the problem sounds. Listen to the practice recording with a learning partner or tutor.
Pronunciation in spoken language
Pronunciation refers to the ability to use the correct stress, rhythm, and intonation of a word in a spoken language. A word may be spoken in different ways by various individuals or groups, depending on many factors. These factors include the area in which you grew up, the area in which you now live, whether you have a speech or voice disorder, your ethnic group, your socio-economic class, or your education.
When we talk about pronunciation, we focus on the word rather than the individual sound, as with articulation. The syllable is a unit of organization for a sequence of speech sounds. For example, the word water is composed of two syllables: wa and ter. A syllable is typically made up of a syllable nucleus (most often a vowel) with consonants around it at the beginning and end. Syllables are often considered the phonological “building blocks” of words. A word that consists of a single syllable (like English dog) is called a monosyllable, and is said to be monosyllabic. Similar terms include disyllable and disyllabic, for a word of two syllables; trisyllable and trisyllabic for a word of three syllables; and polysyllable and polysyllabic, which may refer either to a word of more than three syllables or to any word of more than one syllable. Your job in pronunciation involves recognizing the different syllables that make up a word, applying the stress to the right syllable and using the right up and down pitch pattern for intonation.
Intonation is also used in English to add function to words such as to to differentiate between wh-questions, yes-no questions, declarative statements, commands, requests, etc. You can change the meaning by varying the intonation pattern.
Tips for Speaker
Listen to recordings of different people you admire, to check the pronunciation.
You can connect to one of the online dictionaries which has an audio of the preferred pronunciations if you are unsure.
You can download an app for your cellphone or tablet so you have it readily available to check pronunciation and meaning of words.
If you are using a non-English word, you can also use Google’s translate function with audio pronunciation guide with the translation.
If you spell a word differently than other language users, you may also pronounce the word differently. Check to determine if the word is pronounced as it is spelled. There are fourty-four sounds in English, but over five hundred spellings for the different sounds.
You may want to practice reading a story or article aloud with a learning partner or tutor to check your pronunciation.
12.3.6: Dialect and Vocal Variety
Speakers may use many different English dialects to change the pitch, rate, volume, and use of pauses to achieve vocal variety.
Learning Objective
Employ vocal variety to emphasize key points in your speech and use dialect to relate to your audience
Key Points
A dialect is a variety of a language that is a characteristic of a particular group of the language’s speakers and is distinguished by shared vocabulary, grammar, and pronunciation.
The major native dialects of English are often divided by linguists into three general categories: British, North American, and Australasian; over two-thirds of English speakers live in the United States.
Though the U.S. federal government has no official language, English is the common language used by the federal government and is considered the de facto language of the United States.
All dialects have communicative value within the particular dialect community. When a person moves out of their home dialect community, they may encounter negative evaluations by those in powerful positions who speak a different dialect and have set a standard for others.
You achieve vocal variety by using any or all of the features of paralanguage—rate, pitch, volume, and pauses to change the way you deliver your message.
Consider that emphasis allows you to compare and contrast different parts of your speech.
Vocal variety combats monotony, which results from having an unvarying tone in your speech.
Key Terms
tone
The manner in which speech or writing is expressed.
monotony
Tedium as a result of repetition or a lack of variety. The quality of having an unvarying tone or pitch.
dialect
A variety of a language (specifically, often a spoken variety) that is characteristic of a particular area, community or group, often with relatively minor differences in vocabulary, style, spelling and pronunciation.
paralanguage
The non-verbal elements of speech used to modify meaning and convey emotion, such as pitch, volume, and intonation.
Dialect and Vocal Variety
A Dialect is a Variety of a Language
A dialect is a variety of a language that is a characteristic of a particular group of the language speakers. A dialect is distinguished by its vocabulary, grammar, and pronunciation (phonology, including prosody). Where a distinction can be made only in terms of pronunciation, the term accent is appropriate—not dialect.
The term dialect is applied most often to regional speech patterns. The major native dialects of English are often divided by linguists into three general categories: British, North American, and Australasian . American English is a set of dialects used mostly in the United States. Approximately two-thirds of the world’s native speakers of English live in the United States and it is the most common language there. Although the U.S. federal government has no official language, English is the common language used by the federal government and is considered the de facto language of the United States because of its widespread use. English has been given official status by 28 of the 50 state governments.
English Language
English is not just one language. There are three major dialects in the English language
— North American, British, and Australasia.
A picture of half an American flag and half of a Union Jack.
There are several dialects associated with the speech communities in different regions. You may have meet people from different parts of the country who speak a different dialect. Some of the more common dialects are as follows:
New England includes Boston and Vermont English;
Inland North American includes western and central upstate New York;
Mid-Atlantic includes Baltimore, New York, and New Jersey;
Inland North American includes Michigan, Northern Ohio, and Indiana;
North Central includes primarily Minnesota and Wisconsin;
Midland American covers Nebraska to Ohio;
Southern English across the Southeast;
Western English includes California and Hawaiian Pidgin.
What dialect do you speak? Are you currently living in your native dialect area? What differences of words or pronunciation do you hear from others in different parts of the United States?
Since there are so many dialects of English, it is difficult to say that one dialect is better than another. Some dialects may be spoken by persons holding powerful positions in an area, so those dialects are the ones that become a standard for others. People of one dialect may view speakers with dialects from different regions, social or cultural backgrounds negatively and treat them accordingly. All dialects have communicative value within the particular dialect community; it is when the person moves out of their home dialect community that they may encounter negative evaluation.
Tips for the Speaker
It is important to consider whether the majority of the audience shares the same dialect as the speaker to make sure that the words and pronunciation match those of the audience.
If you are speaking to a national audience, you will want to make sure that your word choice and pronunciation is more widely used than that of your home dialect community.
Vocal Variety
Vocalics, or paralangue, refers to the non-verbal elements of speech used to modify meaning and convey emotion. You achieve vocal variety by using any or all of the features of vocalics: the rate, pitch, volume, and pauses you use to change the way you deliver your message. Here are methods to help you create variety in your delivery:
Speak faster or slower at different times;
Speak at a slightly higher or lower pitch;
Use more force to speak louder or softer;
Pause at different points in your speech.
Consider that emphasis allows you to compare and contrast. You might say one phrase at a faster rate in comparison to another phrase that you speak at a slower rate. You might speak louder at the end of your speech to create a contrast with the softer delivery in the preceding part of your speech. All of these vocal changes in paralanguage help you emphasize what is more important compared to another part that is less important.
The goal here is to avoid monotony, or an unvarying tone, that could bore your audience and fails to communicate your message clearly.
Tips for the Speaker
Every speech has key points that you want to emphasize. Identify those points by changing the delivery so they stand out or contrast with the rest of the speech.
Change the rate meaningfully; do not speak faster to finish the speech or to avoid talking about a main point.
Change in rate is natural in conversation. Notice how you change the rate in your conversation and apply the natural changes while speaking in public.
12.4: Effective Visual Delivery
12.4.1: Appearance: Dress and Posture
First impressions count: dressing appropriately for the occasion and using an open posture can improve the visual delivery of a speech.
Learning Objective
Explain the value of dressing appropriately and using an open posture when delivering your speech
Key Points
The audience may judge the person on their appearance and not really listen to what is being said.
Clothing can demonstrate your culture, mood, level of confidence, interests, age, authority, values and sexual identity.
Different societies and cultures have different dress norms and understanding the norms of culture helps with public speaking, though Western business styles are now commonly accepted in many countries.
Crossed arms, clasped hands and crossed legs signal closed posture, giving the impression of detachment, disinterest and hostility.
Open and relaxed hands, a wide stance and looking up demonstrate an open posture and communicate a friendly and positive attitude.
Considering what dress is appropriate for the occasion and culture of the audience helps to send a visual message.
Key Terms
posture
The way someone holds and positions their body.
Dress code
Dress codes are written and, more often, unwritten rules with regard to clothing. Like other aspects of human physical appearance, clothing has a social significance, with different rules and expectations being valid depending on circumstance and occasion.
First Impressions
First impressions of a speaker are important. The audience may judge the person on their appearance and not really listen to what is being said. Considering the effect that dress and posture have on the response to a speech is important for public speaking.
Dress Style Suffragettes in 1916
The messages sent by clothing have changed since suffragettes marched and spoke up for voting rights.
Dress
Dress is considered an aspect of non-verbal communication and has social significance for the audience. Dress also includes the things that people wear such as jewelry, ties, handbags, hats and glasses. Clothing conveys nonverbal clues about a speaker’s personality, background and financial status. Your clothing style can demonstrate your culture, mood, level of confidence, interests, age, authority, values and sexual identity.
Consider how clothing style might send a negative message. A sloppy appearance, messy hair and wrinkled clothes sends the message, “I don’t care,” while appropriate attire demonstrates the importance of the occasion . A tight dress with a low-cut neckline might appear attractive but not convey the right message for a serious public speaking event. Appropriate dress changes based on the occasion and has changed over history. For example, the “liberated” attire of the suffragette campaigning for voting rights in the early 1900s seems formal and “unliberated” today, but was a daring statement at the time.
Dress Code
Dress codes and styles vary depending on the occasion.
Dress codes have built-in rules about the message sent by what a person wears and how they wear it. By showing positive aspects of yourself through dress, attire and grooming, you can inspire confidence in your abilities. As a general rule, attire should be chosen according to the type of audience, the event and the purpose. Audience should be considered before choosing attire. Dress should be comfortable without looking overdressed. Additionally, making a fashion statement is not always helpful for a public speaker because it can detract from the substance of the speech.
Tips for the Speaker
Dress for the occasion. Consider what dress is appropriate for the event and the culture of the audience.
Different societies and cultures have different dress norms and understanding the norms of culture helps with public speaking, though Western business styles are commonly accepted in many countries today.
Posture
If you are speaking to an audience in person, the audience will respond to your posture. Posture is one means of communication. Body movements convey information about interpersonal relations and personality traits such as confidence, submissiveness and openness. The speaker may display an open or closed body position. Those two positions communicate different messages to the audience and can be desirable or undesirable based on the type of visual delivery that is desired.
Closed Posture
Closed posture often gives the impression of detachment, disinterest and hostility. Behaviors that represent closed posture include arms crossed on the chest or abdomen, hands clasped in front of the body and crossed legs. Clothing may also signal closed posture, such as a buttoned suit or a handbag or briefcase held in front of the person. Showing the back of hands or clenched fists can represent a closed posture. Hands clasped behind the back may also signal closed posture even though the front is exposed because it can give the impression of hiding something or resisting closer contact.
Open Posture
Open posture communicates a friendly and positive attitude. The feet are spread wide and the head is straight and raised, looking at the audience. An important element of open posture of the body are the hands. Showing the palms of the hands can be a signal of open posture, especially if the hand is relaxed.
Tips for the Speaker
In an in-person, co-located speaking situation where the audience can see your body, the audience responds and it is important to maintain an open body posture.
The physical attitude to be taken before the audience really depends, not on mechanical rules, but on the spirit of the speech and the occasion. A person in a hot political argument never has to stop to think about what gesture to use to emphasize a point.
12.4.2: Eye Contact and Facial Expression
Eye contact and facial expressions provide important social and emotional information to the audience.
Learning Objective
Employ eye contact and smile when giving your speech
Key Points
Eyes can indicate interest, attention, and involvement with audience members, while failure to make eye contact may be interpreted as disinterested, inattentive, or rude.
Different cultures have different rules for eye contact.
The face as a whole communicates emotional states, such as happiness or sadness. The seven universally recognized emotions shown through facial expressions are fear, anger, surprise, contempt, disgust, happiness, and sadness.
Human faces are capable of more than 10,000 different expressions.
Key Term
oculesics
a subcategory of kinesics, the study of eye movement, eye behavior, gaze, and eye-related nonverbal communication. Often used interchangeably with eye contact.
Eye contact, also known as oculesics, and facial expression are important aspects of communicating with an audience, providing important social and emotional information.
Making Eye Contact
Direct and attentive eye contact between the speaker and the receiver is important in one-on-one situations.
Midshipman Daniela Giordano makes eye contact while receiving her her winging certificate from Commander Chip Laingen.
Eye Contact
The eyes can indicate interest, attention, and involvement with audience members, while failure to make eye contact can be interpreted as disinterest.
Form of Communication
For Western audiences, making eye contact is an important form of direct communication.
A woman makes direct eye contact.
Gaze includes looking while talking and listening. The length of a gaze, the frequency of glances, patterns of fixation, pupil dilation, and blink rate are all important cues in nonverbal communication. Unless looking at others is a cultural no-no, lookers gain more credibility than non-lookers.
Lack of eye contact is usually perceived to be rude or inattentive in Western cultures. But different cultures have different rules for eye contact. Certain Asian cultures can perceive direct eye contact as a way to signal competitiveness, which in many situations may prove to be inappropriate. Others lower their eyes to signal respect; eye contact is avoided in Nigeria, and between men and women of Islam. However, in Western cultures, lowered eyes and avoiding eye contact could be misinterpreted as lacking self-confidence.
Tips for the Speaker
Make eye contact with your audience members, and make sure not to stare at your notes the whole time.
If you have a large audience, make sure to alternate talking to the audience members to the right, left, and in front of you.
When you begin your speech do not look at your notes, look at your audience! You know your topic and who you are so introduce yourself and your topic as you would introduce yourself when you meet a new person.
Practice looking at the audience while rehearsing.
Avoid skimming over faces in your audience.
Facial Expression
The face as a whole indicates much about human moods. Specific emotional states, such as happiness or sadness, are expressed through a smile or a frown, respectively. There are seven universally recognized emotions shown through facial expressions:
Facial Expressions Betray Emotions
How many of the emotions can you identify in the pictures?
fear
anger
surprise
contempt
disgust
happiness
sadness
Regardless of culture, these expressions are the same. However, the same emotion from a specific facial expression may be recognized by a culture, but the same intensity of emotion may not be perceived.
Facial expressions, more than anything, serve as a practical means of communication. Using all the various muscles that precisely control mouth, lips, eyes, nose, forehead,and jaw, the human face is estimated to be capable of more than 10,000 different expressions. This versatility makes non-verbal facial expressions extremely efficient and honest (unless deliberately manipulated).
Tips for the speaker
People smile when they are happy. Smile before you begin speaking to show the audience that you are happy to be there, and they will smile back. Smiling is contagious.
12.4.3: Movement and Gesture
Natural body movements and gestures can strengthen and enhance the message but repetitive, unnecessary movements can distract from delivery.
Learning Objective
Use natural body movements and gestures to strengthen your message, while avoiding distracting, unnatural movements
Key Points
You can use your body to communicate positively with the audience by following Hamlet’s advice to suit the action to the word and the word to the action through natural, not mechanical body movements.
Repetitive, unnecessary movements such as pacing, swaying back and forth, or bobbing your head up and down can distract the audience from your message.
The gesture is subordinate to the message. The gesture is the physical, outward effect which is connected to a thought or emotional impulse.
Make sure that the audience can see your hands above the lectern. Hold you hands at least waist-high and make sure to put your notes or other objects on the lectern or podium so your hands are free to move.
Key Terms
gesture
A gesture is a form of non-verbal communication in which visible bodily actions communicate particular messages, either in place of speech or together and in parallel with words.
Kinesics
Kinesics is the interpretation of body language such as facial expressions and gestures — or, more formally, non-verbal behavior related to movement, either of any part of the body or the body as a whole.
Lectern
A lectern is a desk with a slanted top, usually placed on a stand or affixed to some other form of support, on which documents or books are placed as support for reading or speaking aloud. Lecterns are generally used while standing.
Kinesics
Kinesics is the study of body movement and expression such as waving, pointing, touching, and slouching. The movement of the body conveys many specific meanings to an audience but can be misinterpreted in an intercultural setting.
Body Movement can Support the Message
You can use your body to communicate positively with the audience. Hamlet’s advice to the players in Shakespeare’s Hamlet in 1601 has merit today: Suit the action to the word, the word to the action, with this special observance, that you o’erstep not the modesty of nature.
Consider some examples of how you might naturally support your delivery.
Upper body toward the audience – You might want to lean into the audience to bridge the space of separation.
Feet and legs – You may move purposefully from one side to the other to show a transition from one point to another.
Arms and chest- If you cross your arms in front of you, what does this mean to the audience? It could be construed as confrontational or that are you in deep thought about a question from an audience member.
Stand still without movement – If you are listening to a question, you can stand still without movement to show your interest.
Body Movements can Distract from the Message
Just as natural body movements can strengthen the message, unnecessary movements can distract from delivery. Here are some examples of movements which distract:
Swaying back and forth – If you sway back and forth at the lectern or podium in a pattern without purpose, the audience may follow the movement rather than the message.
Pacing from one side to other – If you pace from one side of the front of the room to the other meaninglessly, the audience will follow the movement.
Moving a hand repetitively – If you use your hand to move your hair out of your eyes constantly while speaking, the audience will focus on the movement rather than what you are saying.
Tips for the Speaker
Have a friend observe or record you while you speak. Review the recording for distracting, repetitive movements.
Remember to strive for natural movements of the body. Body movements that are planned and mechanical will call undue attention to you and distract.
If you are having difficulty focusing while speaking you might consider mind-body exercises which combine body movement with mental focus and controlled breathing.
Gestures
A gesture is a form of non-verbal communication in which visible bodily actions communicate particular messages such as the open gesture of Desmond Tutu . Gestures may be made with almost any movable part of the body. Our focus will be speech related gestures, primarily of the hand and arm. Gestures can be categorized as either speech independent or speech related.
Using Gestures
Desmond Tutu gestures with his hands wide apart in an open body position during a speech at One Young World.
Speech-independent gestures depend upon culturally accepted interpretation and have a direct verbal translation. A wave or a V for a peace sign are examples of speech-independent gestures.
Speech-related gestures are used in parallel with verbal speech. This form of nonverbal communication is used to emphasize the message. Speech-related gestures are intended to provide supplemental information to a verbal message such as pointing to an object of discussion.
Gestures can Support the Message
A speech-related gesture is an outward expression of an inward condition. It is merely the effect of a mental or an emotional impulse expressed physically. You may rarely know in advance what gestures you will use to make a point. You may use one gesture to support your message one day and another on a different day. The gesture is subordinate to the message. You might count off the points on your finger, you may point with your full arm extended to some object or direction, you may outline sizes and shapes, or you might use a gesture to show emphasis.
Unnatural Gestures can Distract from the Message
You may develop a repertoire of gestures for different purposes, but remember the most natural gesture is one that is motivated by the content of your message. It does not call attention to itself, but flows naturally with the message. If you are troubled by your gestures, or a lack of gestures, attend to the cause, not the effect. It will not help matters to tack a few mechanical movements onto your delivery.
Tips for the Speaker
Make sure that the audience can see your hands above the lectern. Hold you hands at least waist-high and make sure to put your notes or other objects on the lectern so your hands are free to move.
Hold your hands at least waist-high throughout your entire presentation; this will increase the likelihood that you’ll gesture spontaneously at least once in a while.
12.4.4: Adapting to Handouts and Visuals
Visual aids can play a large role in how the audience understands and processes the information that is presented.
Learning Objective
Employ visual aids effectively
Key Points
There are many different types of visual aids, such as handouts and projections of PowerPoint slides.
Make sure your visual aid uses readable text and graphics. People identify items more quickly when using graphics in addition to text alone.
A handout can help the audience remember what was said long after the presentation, but passing them out can be extremely distracting. Once a handout is given out, it might be difficult to bring back the attention of your audience. Distribute the handout right before you reference it.
Only show the audience what you are presenting at the moment and move on.
Key Term
Visual Aid
Visual aids are often used to help audiences of informative and persuasive speeches understand the topic being presented. There are many different types of visual aids that range from handouts to Power Point slide presentation.
Adapting to Handouts and Visuals
Visual aids are used to help audiences understand and process the information being presented. There are many different types of visual aids from handouts to projections of PowerPoint slides .
Visuals
PowerPoint slides are commonly used to provide visual support to longer presentations.
A woman shows a PowerPoint slide on a projector at the front of a classroom.
Planning ahead is important when using visual aids. It is necessary to choose a visual aid that is appropriate for the material and audience. Thus, it is important for speakers to understand how to use handouts and other speech components correctly so that visuals help, and not distract or confuse listeners. Handouts in particular can be passed out before, during, or after the speaker’s presentation. This allows the presenter to provide audience members with supporting facts, data, or tips that may otherwise be overlooked while being displayed on an overhead projector or screen.
Types of Visual Aids
You can bring an actual object to exhibit during the speech. Objects are often necessary when demonstrating how to do something such as tying knots. As a drawback, some objects are unavailable or too large.
Models can represent how an object or system works, such as the solar system. Models can serve as substitutes that provide better examples of the real thing to the audience. However, models may take away from the reality of what is being spoken. For instance, a model may make it more difficult to comprehend how vast the solar system actually is.
Graphs are used to visualize the relationships between different quantities. There are many useful types including bar graphs, line graphs, and pie graphs. Graphs can help the audience visualize statistics, resulting in a greater impact. However, graphs can easily become cluttered with too much detail.
Mapsshow geographic areas or the location of something. As with graphs, too much detail on a map can cause the audience to lose focus.
Tables use columns and rows to organize words, symbols, or data. Tables make it easy to understand the comparison of facts, but they may not be interesting or pleasing to the eye. They can also overwhelm audience members with too much information.
Photographs can be prepared quickly with inexpensive digital cameras. Photographs are good tools to make or emphasize a point or to explain a topic when the real object can not be physically or legally presented. However, enlarging photographs can be expensive if not using a projector.
Drawings or diagrams can be created to show specific focus, especially when a photograph is too detailed or does not show important parts. However, drawings or diagrams can look sloppy and unprofessional.
The Format Of Visual Aids
You can deliver your visual aid in different media or formats depending on your budget and the availability of supplies and equipment. Some examples include:
Chalkboards or whiteboards are very useful, particularly when more advanced types of media are unavailable. They are cheap and also allow for much flexibility.
Poster boardscan display charts, graphs, pictures, or illustrations. It is relatively light weight; nonetheless, make sure to attach the poster so it does not fall over during the speech.
Handouts can also display charts, graphs, pictures, or illustrations. A handout can be taken away to remember after the presentation. Passing out handouts can be extremely distracting. Distribute the handout right before you reference it since it might be difficult to bring back the attention of your audience if given out too far in advance.
Video can be a great attention grabber. Make sure to transition smoothly into the video and to only show short clips.
Overhead projectors are still used but require you to develop a transparency of what is to be projected. You can connect a computer to a projection system in a large room for PowerPoint presentations or to project files or images from the Internet.
Tips for the Speaker
Speakers should heed to the following tips:
Only show the audience what you are presenting at the moment and move on. If using a chalkboard or whiteboard, create your drawing and then cover it until its ready for use.
Incorporate handouts into the presentation and only distribute them when they are going to be used.
Make sure the text and graphics are easy to read.
12.4.5: Proxemics
Social distance between people is reliably correlated with physical distance: intimate, personal, social and public.
Learning Objective
Apply knowledge of space and distance zones to the physicality of your speech
Key Points
Intimate distance is for touching and whispering, less than 6 inches to 18 inches; personal distance is for talking to good friends or family, 1.5 to 4 feet; social distance for interactions among acquaintances, 4 to 12 feet; and public distance for public speaking, 12-25 feet.
Generally, public speaking will occur in the far phase of the social distance from 7-12 feet for small group lecture, and primarily in the public distance from 12-25 feet.
Public speaking events are likely to occur in a secondary territory, such as a regular meeting place for a group, or a public territory, which is reserved for the event and used by many different groups who do not have claim to the space.
At the most basic level, the speaker who is using public space needs to make sure that the voice is loud enough to be heard and that all members of the audience can see the speaker, gestures, and any supporting visual materials.
Key Terms
proxemics
The study of the effects of the physical distance between people in different cultures and societies.
territoriality
associated with nonverbal communication that refers to how people use space to communicate ownership/occupancy of areas and possessions.
Use of Space and Distance Zones
Proxemics is the study of how people use and perceive the physical space around them. The space between the sender and the receiver of a message influences the way the message is interpreted. In addition, the perception and use of space varies significantly across cultures and different settings within cultures.
Body spacing and posture, according to Edward T. Hall, are unintentional reactions to sensory fluctuations or shifts, such as subtle changes in the sound and pitch of a person’s voice. Social distance between people is reliably correlated with physical distance, as are intimate and personal distance, according to the delineations below. Hall did not mean for these measurements to be strict guidelines that translate precisely to human behavior, but rather a system for gauging the effect of distance on communication and how the effect varies between cultures and other environmental factors.
According to Hall in his book, The Hidden Dimension, space in nonverbal communication may be divided into four main categories: intimate, social, personal, and public space.
Distance Zones
It is important for individuals recognize the various distances regarding space.
A diagram that shows the distances for intimate space, personal space, social space, and public space.
Intimate distance for embracing, touching, or whispering.
Close phase – less than 6 inches (15 cm)
Far phase – 6 to 18 inches (15 to 46 cm)
Personal distance for interactions among good friends or family members.
Close phase – 1.5 to 2.5 feet (46 to 76 cm)
Far phase – 2.5 to 4 feet (76 to 120 cm)
Social distance for interactions among acquaintances.
Close phase – 4 to 7 feet (1.2 to 2.1 m)
Far phase – 7 to 12 feet (2.1 to 3.7 m)
Public distance used for public speaking.
Close phase – 12 to 25 feet (3.7 to 7.6 m)
Far phase – 25 feet (7.6 m) or more.
Territoriality: Claiming Your Space
The concept of terrritoriality parallels proxemics and helps to explain how you lay claim to the space around you. There are four territories associated with different distance:
Primary territory: This refers to an area that is associated with someone who has exclusive use of it. An example is a house that others cannot enter without the owner’s permission.
Secondary territory: Unlike primary territory, there is no “right” to occupancy of secondary territory, but people may still feel some degree of ownership of such space as they develop the custom of occupying it. For example, someone may sit in the same seat in church every week and feel irritated if someone else sits there.
Public territory: this refers to an area that is available to all, but only for a set period, such as a parking space or a seat in a library. Although people have only a limited claim over that space, they often extend that claim. For example, it was found that people take longer to leave a parking space when someone is waiting to take that space.
Interaction territory: this is space held by others when they are interacting. For example, when a group is talking to each other on a footpath, others will walk around the group rather than disturb their interaction territory.
Generally, public speaking will occur in the far phase of the social distance and primarily in the public distance. The audience may be in a secondary space which they normally occupy or in a public territory which is set aside for the particular event.
Tips for Speaker
At the most basic level, the speaker who is using public space needs to make sure that the voice is loud enough to be heard and that all members of the audience can see the speaker, gestures, and any supporting visual materials.
But, going beyond the basic considerations, the speaker may want to consider strategies for making the public space more social and personal to achieve conversational goals. If appropriate, the speaker may move off the platform and into the very front of the audience or move among the audience while speaking.
The speaker should determine if the seating is fixed in one direction or movable in order to plan any activity within the audience such as informal or small group activities.
Remember, in the public territory of the speaking event, the speaker only has the space for a limited period of time and needs to use that time efficiently.
12.5: Interaction in Public Speaking
12.5.1: Interaction in Public Speaking
Interaction in public speaking is vital to keeping your audience engaged and involved with your content and with you as speaker.
Learning Objective
Use verbal and non-verbal audience interaction to keep your audience engaged and involved with your speech
Key Points
Public speaking is not just a one-way communication of ideas from speaker to audience; an effective public speaker is one who engages and interacts with his or her audience.
Asking questions of your audience, referencing and calling out members of the audience when appropriate, and even just acknowledging and thanking them for their time are all effective ways of verbally interacting with your audience.
Your non-verbal body-language cues such as facial expression, gesture, posture, and eye contact all add layers of interaction with your audience. Pay close attention to your non-verbal cues as you speak to ensure that your mannerisms match your message.
Key Terms
interaction
A conversation or exchange between people.
body language
Body language is a form of mental and physical ability of human non-verbal communication. It consists of body posture, gestures, facial expressions, and eye movements. Humans send and interpret such signals almost entirely subconsciously.
Example
During the annual State of the Union address, the President of the United States will often incorporate anecdotes of “everyday” Americans into his or her address. Often, these citizens will be seated in the audience. By incorporating these compelling stories into the State of the Union address, the President makes it a more interactive experience for the everyday American watching from home.
Why is Interaction Important?
Often, when you think of a speech, you think of a one-way message from public speaker to audience. However, the most compelling speeches are those in which the speaker engages and interacts with his or her audience .
Interaction in Public Speaking
The speaker should engage the audience by interacting with them instead of just speaking to them.
A speaker interacts with the audience and acknowledges them.
Interaction is important in public speaking because it involves your audience being more directly with both you as speaker and your content. An involved and engaged audience is more likely to pay attention to you and connect with your words.
Verbal Interaction
While you may not necessarily engage in a two-way dialogue with your audience, there are plenty of ways to interact with them verbally. At a spirited campaign rally, for example, you may respond to people who call out from the audience.
If you’re in a more subdued environment, you may directly ask questions of your audience. You want to make sure that these questions relate to the subject matter of your speech and then incorporate those answers into the rest of your speech. You might agree with what an audience member says, or you can use the opportunity to refute or rebut their response. This further involves your audience with your message.
You may also choose to call out select members of the audience by name, if appropriate — for example, when sharing an anecdote. Another great way of engaging with your audience is both acknowledging them at the beginning of your speech and then thanking them for their time and attention at the conclusion of your speech.
Non-Verbal Interaction
Your non-verbal interaction with your audience consists largely of body-language cues. Whether it’s eye contact with individual members of the audience or specific gestures and face expressions as you speak, your actions are just as important as your words when you’re in front of an audience. Your audience will use your non-verbal cues to more fully comprehend your message and will often connect with or disengage from your message based on those cues.
Just remember that all body language and non-verbal communication requires appropriate context. Even an unintentional gesture — crossed arms, a slouch, a frown — can connote a very different meaning to your audience than the words you’re actually saying. Practice your speech in front of a mirror or record yourself so you can take note of any unintentional non-verbal signals you may be sending to your audience.
12.6: Rehearsing the Speech
12.6.1: The Importance of Rehearsing
Rehearsal provides opportunities to apply knowledge to practice different parts, see what works, and then put it together for a total speech.
Learning Objective
Explain the value of rehearsal and what methods can be used to rehearse
Key Points
Rehearsal is important because you can apply your knowledge of public speaking to test out what works for you and learn from the experience in a safe environment.
Rehearsal is important because it allows you to practice different parts before you actually deliver the total speech to an audience.
Rehearsal is important because you can put the effective parts back together to create a total speech and practice before delivering it in front of the actual audience.
Plan a feedback strategy by recording for self-analysis or by receiving feedback from a friend or a coach.
Key Terms
analysis
A process of dismantling or separating into constituent elements in order to study the nature, function, or meaning.
synthesis
The formation of something complex or coherent by combining simpler things.
Praxis
The act of engaging, applying, exercising, realizing, or practicing ideas.
Importance Of Rehearsing
Rehearsal involves praxis, which usually refers to the process of putting theoretical knowledge into practice, through a constant cycle of conceptualizing the meaning of what can be learned from experience. Praxis is the process by which a theory, lesson, or skill is enacted, practiced, embodied, or realized. Praxis may also refer to the act of engaging, applying, exercising, realizing, or practicing ideas.
You have been studying public speaking and learning about delivery, gathering information, organizing speeches, and selecting a method of delivery. Through rehearsal, you have the opportunity to separate what works from what does not work.
Rehearsal Through Analysis and Synthesis
During this period, it is important to break down the rehearsal into different chunks or skills for analysis, work with the smaller areas, and then strive for synthesis. You may learn by practicing different ways of actually expressing ideas, through which you can determine the best one. Alternatively, you can practice different styles of delivery such as speaking faster or slower. To learn from practice, you can record your work to view it later, or you can have a trusted friend or coach provide feedback.
You may have heard the phrase “practice makes perfect,” but before attempting to reach perfection, you must experiment to determine what it is you exactly want.
Rehearsal As Simulated Experience
Just like the contestants in the Miss Universe Pageant, you have an opportunity to practice on stage before the actual event. The learning that can occur in rehearsal is situated in a simulated experience. While rehearsing, you simulate the real speaking experience so you know what to expect. You can rehearse with the equipment or visual aids you will use, you can make sure that you are in control of the time, and you can rehearse answering questions for a Q&A session. You will know what to expect and ultimately feel more secure with your ability to perform in the actual speaking situation.
Miss Universe Contest Rehearsal
Contestants practice before the actual pageant so that they know where to stand and what to say.
To rehearse effectively, the speaker should:
Start early to allow yourself enough time to experiment, revise, and try again during rehearsal.
Plan a feedback strategy by recording for self-analysis or by receiving feedback from a friend or a coach.
Remember practice does not make perfect if you continue to practice ineffective strategies. Therefore, you must experiment and learn from the experience to improve the total speech.
12.6.2: Successful Rehearsing Habits: Mimic Timing and Context
Get in the habit of rehearsing all parts of the speech before delivery and revising as necessary.
Learning Objective
List elements to consider when rehearsing a speech
Key Points
Rehearsal is a time to experiment, to play, and to mold your speech. Once you are satisfied that you have crafted the speech into the message you want, then you can practice with all the parts in place to develop your own style and approach to delivery.
You are not attempting to mimic an actor who is giving a performance. Rather, you are developing your own conversation with your audience. However, if you are going to mimic, observe and mimic natural conversation.
Consider the amount of time that it takes to deliver the speech, how to time your use of visual aids such as Power Point slides for presentations, and your rate of delivery.
Consider the physical environment, the technological and the situational context, as well as the larger world of the cultural and linguistic backgrounds of the audience and speaker.
Speak in a conversational style. Do not talk at your audience; pretend you are talking with your audience.
Rehearse just as you plan to present. If possible, rehearse in the same location that you will deliver your speech.
Key Terms
Thespis
The first person ever to appear on stage as an actor playing a character in a play instead of speaking as him or herself.
mimic
To imitate, to mock, or to pretend.
Practice with all the Parts in Place
Rehearsal is a time to experiment, to play, and to mold your speech. Once you are satisfied that you have crafted the speech into the message you want, then you can practice with all the parts in place to develop your own style and approach to delivery.
Rehearsal
Rafi Niv, a performer and director, rehearses before going on stage.
Avoiding Mimicry
As a speaker you start with nothing but your idea or thesis to create and deliver your own message, whereas a mime recreates the character and dialogue that someone else invented. You should not be a mime who takes on a mask. If you mimic the behaviors of other speakers, you run the risk of not having a delivery that is natural for you. You are not attempting to mimic an actor who is giving a performance, you are developing your own conversation with your audience.
Marcel Marceau
Marcel Marceau, a mime, dressed up as Bip the Clown.
However, if you are going to mimic, observe and mimic natural conversation. You are yourself, not an actor on a stage like Thespis; you want to focus on bringing out your own natural conversational style.
Timing
You should consider the basics of timing—the amount of time it takes to deliver the speech, how to time your use of visual aids such as Power Point slides for presentations, and your rate of delivery.
Timing Basics
Generally, you will have a set amount of time to speak including Q & A. When rehearsing, you want to make sure to include all of the parts of the speech including quotes, examples, video clips, and visual aids. If you don’t include all aspects of the speech, you may run out of time and have to cut short important content during delivery.
When working with PowerPoint, you can control when each slide is projected for the audience by pre-programming it to advance each slide while you speak. The timing from one slide to the next will occur as you have programmed it without you having to be near the computer to control the slides. However, you must speak about each slide for the rehearsed amount of time or your slides will not synchronize with the speech.
Timing is not only about knowing how long you are going to speak, but also about how fast to speak, when to pause, and how long to pause to achieve the desired effect. You can vary the rate of speaking and the use of pausing to achieve different vocal effects as you practice.
Context
Context includes not only the physical environment, but also the technological and situational context. Ultimately, context includes the entire world, and the cultural and linguistic background of the audience and speaker.
Physical or environmental context: Ideally you want to rehearse in the same space using the same equipment you will use for your presentation. If you rehearse in the same space, you will learn to appreciate the special features of the room and the layout.
Technological Context: It is important to include equipment use when you rehearse. What equipment is in place? Will you be speaking directly to an audience or will you be using amplification? Will the audience be co-located with you face to face or will you be using teleconferencing equipment?
Situational context: It is important to note any special background about the room, place, or occasion. Consider and acknowledge any special significance the place may have for you or your audience. For example, did someone else recently speak in the same location that will influence how the audience will respond to your speech?
Tips for Speaker
Speak in a conversational style. Do not talk at your audience; pretend you are talking with your audience.
Rehearse just as you plan to present and, if possible, in the same location that you will deliver your speech.
Prepare for interruptions and questions. Make sure to leave room for a Q&A session at the end of your speech.
Rehearse with your graphics and coordinate them to your talk. Display them only when you are talking about them.
Time the individual parts and the total speech with a stopwatch and make sure to have a clock that you can see while speaking.
Make sure you record and listen to your speech after rehearsal and get feedback from friends or a coach.
During your final rehearsal, make brief notes for yourself so you know how long each point in the speech takes. Then mark your outline accordingly so you know if you are spending too much time on any given point during delivery.
12.7: Managing Q&A
12.7.1: Preparing for a Q&A Session
Spend time anticipating potential questions and preparing responses to them ahead of time; work with colleagues or friends to practice.
Learning Objective
Practice answering questions from your audience prior to delivering your speech
Key Points
If you are speaking directly to a live audience, you can allocate time at the end of the presentation answer questions.
You can solicit questions before, during, or after the event via Twitter or SMS, or create a a “backchannel” display during or following the presentation.
You can anticipate questions that will be asked and prepare responses ahead of time.
You can set up a Twitter hashtag for the audience to tweet questions during the presentation.
You can provide a number or address for SMS texting during the speech so you can respond to questiosn during or after the presentation.
You can create a “backchannel” for projecting tweets or text messages during or after the presentation to create a truly global interactive experience.
Key Terms
hashtag
A tag embedded in a message posted on the Twitter microblogging service, consisting of a word within the message prefixed with a hash sign.
Backchannel
the practice of using networked computers to maintain a real-time online conversation alongside live spoken remarks.
tweet
(noun) An entry posted on the microblogging service, Twitter; can be a post or status update; (verb) to post an update to Twitter.
Q & A with in-person and remote audiences
Questions and Answers (Q&A) is a part of many speaking events. During Q&A the audience can ask questions and the speaker(s) will answer the questions. Although questions could occur at any time during the event, traditionally Q&A occurs at the end of the speech.
If you are speaking directly to a live audience, you can allocate time at the end of the presentation to answer questions. You may have audience members stand or move to a microphone to ask a question. Or, if you have a large audience or remote audience, you can solicit questions before, during or after the speech via Twitter or SMS, or create a “backchannel” to display questions at any time during or following the presentation.
Rehearsing for Q&A
You can never anticipate all the questions of audience members may have. But you can anticipate some questions and prepare a response ahead of time. Audience members are likely to ask the following types of questions:
Preparing for a Q&A
It’s important for a speaker to rehearse for a Q&A session. Try to anticipate questions and prepare responses beforehand.
An image that has the outlines of two men as well as multiple question markets. It says “Question mark man” at the bottom.
To find out information from an expert: You are perceived to be the expert on your topic and the audience may ask a question to find out additional information.
For clarification: You may have presented an explanation but an audience member may need additional clarification to fully understand the idea.
Interested and want more: You may have piqued the interest of an audience member with something you said and the audience member will ask a question to find out more, or for a follow-up resource.
Agree or disagree with opinion: You may have stated an opinion and the audience member either wants you to agree or disagree with related opinions or a course of action.
How to do something: You may have convinced the audience that your opinion is right. Now the audience wants to know what course of action to take as follow-up.
Prepare possible answers to these types of questions and rehearse with a colleague or coach before the speech.
Receiving questions prior to the speech or by using backchannels
Email: You can solicit questions prior to or during the speech by creating a unique email address such as Myspeech1212@gmail.com. You can include answers during the speech or collect them for a Q&A period at the end.
Twitter: You can create a unique hashtag on Twitter for the event, such as #myspeech1212. You can use the hashtag as a backchannel during the presentation, or to collect questions to be answered at the end. When audience members add the hashtag to their tweets, the speaker or attendees can search Twitter to review all the tweets related to that event. A colleague can collect the questions so that you and the audience are not distracted.
Tweets are publicly visible by default; however, you can restrict message delivery to just your followers. Your audience can tweet via the Twitter website, by compatible external applications, or by Short Message Service (SMS). You can also display all the questions with your event hashtag using TweetDeck. TweetDeck will allow you to receive and display tweets, is compatible with most operating systems, and can be installed as a smart phone app.
Using any or all of these methods to solicit and answer questions allows you to create a direct interactive experience with your global audience.
12.7.2: Conducting a Q&A Session
Q&A occurs at the end of an in-person speech or at any point in time with larger, remote audiences using Twitter, SMS texting, or email.
Learning Objective
Give examples of effective ways to conduct live and online Q&A sessions
Key Points
Often after giving a presentation, you will be called upon to personally conduct a question and answer (Q&A) session in which the audience will ask questions for you to answer.
Make sure you understand the question. To check for understanding, paraphrase the question and ask for confirmation. If you don’t understand the question, ask for clarification.
Repeat the questions for those in the audience who may not have heard it and answer it directly and succinctly while looking at the audience or web cam.
If you have prepared for Twitter questions using your #hashtag, SMS contact, or email, you can create a direct interactive experience with all parts of your global audience prior, during, or at the end of the speech.
In general, you want to collect the questions for a Q&A session at the end or have a cohort monitor the questions as they are posted to select the ones for you to answer.
You may project the tweets or texts using a projection system for a large audience and a shared screen for the remote audiences while you conduct the Q&A session.
Key Term
Q&A
A period of time in which questions are asked of a person.
Q&A can occur in person or via internet
Question and answer sessions (Q&A) can take different formats. You might answer questions after your speech or presentation if you have a live co-located audience. Members of the audience may stand to speak or walk to a microphone. If you are speaking to a large audience or a remote audience, you may use various digital methods to solicit questions to answer at the end of your presentation. Let’s look at approaches to conducting a Q&A with live audiences and with large or remote audiences using Twitter, short message service (SMS) text messages, or email.
In-Person Q&A
An audience member uses a microphone and leads a Q&A session.
Damage Controlman 3rd Class Mark Gorley asks Adm. Gary Roughead a question during a Q&A session.
Q&A with Small Audience Co-located with Speaker
Often after giving a presentation you will be called upon to answer questions from the audience. Q&A sessions can be quite intimidating, but if you have thoroughly researched your topic and have anticipated the types of questions you might receive, you will be better able to handle anything you are asked. Here are some guidelines for handling Q&A sessions:
Q&A with a Small Audience
A student stands among a small audience and asks a question.
Stop to think about the question before answering.
Make sure you understand the question. To check for understanding, paraphrase the question and ask for confirmation. “For example: Are you asking why we propose a 2% annual increase or how we estimate that this increase will match increases in the cost of living? “
If you did not understand the question, ask for clarification. For example: “I don’t understand what you mean by total compensation package. “
Repeat the questions for those in the audience who may not have heard it. For example: “The question is, ‘What raises do we expect to propose over the next 5 years? ‘”
Don’t let the questions move you off topic. For example: “I appreciate your concern over profit-sharing with beneficiaries, but today’s focus is on investor relations.”
Answer directly and succinctly. Tell them what you know, why you believe it, or what you believe. If you don’t have answer, tell them so or volunteer to find out the information and provide the answer at a later time. For example: “I did not hear the President’s comment about eliminating unions. My understanding is that she is committed to union participation. I will check the minutes from that meeting and send you an answer, if you provide your email address.”
Look at the questioner as you answer the question, but still present the answer to the whole audience.
If the questioner starts to give a counter speech, politely interrupt and ask for his or her question. For example: “Thank you for your concern, but we only have time for one more question. Do you have a specific question I can answer?”
After answering, check with the questioner to determine whether you answered the question to his or her satisfaction. For example: “Did I address your concerns?”
Using the Internet for a Q&A
If you have prepared for Twitter questions using your #hashtag, SMS contact, or email, you can create a direct interactive experience with all parts of your global audience.
In general, you want to collect the questions for a Q&A session at the end rather than displaying the questions as they occur.
You may have a cohort monitor the questions and select the ones to answer.
You may also want to display the questions with TweetDeck. TweetDeck’s interface consists of a series of customizable columns, which can be set up to display tweets.
You may project the tweets using a projection system or a shared screen for the remote audience.
You may also arrange an “open” question period prior to the speech in order to solicit relevant questions.
If you are concerned about privacy, you may want to restrict the questions on Twitter to followers. Tweets are publicly visible by default; however, senders can restrict message delivery to just their followers. Users can tweet via the Twitter website, compatible external applications (such as for smartphones), or by SMS text messages.
Again, make sure to look at the audience or the webcam when answering the question. You may also make sure to display contact information for follow-up questions if you are willing to respond to questions for a period of time.
Finally, as the speaker you will be responsible for time management. How many questions will you answer and how much time will you devote to them? You may want to make arrangements for a follow-up exchange after the formal presentation in a forum, blog, or via email.
Think before Answering
It’s important for the speaker to stop and think about the question before answering.
A series of three question marks in a red octagon, which resembles a stop sign.
12.7.3: Q&A Considerations in Non-Academic Environments
The key to a successful Q&A session is effective communication with the audience.
Learning Objective
List tactics for handling a Q&A session in a non-academic context
Key Points
Prepare for the Q&A session by anticipating likely questions and drafting answers to those questions.
When leading a Q&A session, repeat each question loudly and clearly to make sure everyone in the audience hears the discussion.
If someone asks a question based on information that is unfamiliar, do not be afraid to ask for more details about the context of the question.
Key Terms
layman
A person who is untrained or lacks knowledge of a subject.
neophyte
A novice or recent convert.
Example
For example, during a speech about strategies for increasing voter turnout in the U.S., an audience member might ask about voter turnout in other countries.
Q&A Considerations in Non-Academic Environments
Question and answer sessions are unpredictable and, for many speakers, intimidating. The Q&A leaves the prepared script behind and enters uncharted territory, demanding quick thinking and flexibility. After all of the careful planning that goes into preparing a speech, the loss of control in the Q&A session can be frustrating. However, it is possible to prepare for a variety of Q&A scenarios.
Preparing for the Q&A
A speaker cannot predict every question, but he or she can identify likely questions and prepare responses in advance. As part of the speechwriting process, make a list of potential questions and answers. The following are a few tips for anticipating questions and drafting answers:
Fortify Key Terms and Concepts: Identify any terms, concepts or acronyms in the speech that might cause confusion or disagreement in the audience. Always define key terms and concepts in the speech, unless the audience is a homogeneous group of specialists. However, even specialists may disagree on basic definitions; if there is any controversy surrounding a foundational term or concept, be prepared to take sides or explain why the controversy does not affect your issue.
Prepare for Basic Questions: When speaking to an audience with mixed levels of expertise, be prepared for questions about basic principles and concepts. The assumptions and truths that speakers take for granted may not be obvious to beginners. Sometimes, basic questions are actually the hardest questions to answer. Most people are so used to the status quo that explaining why they think the way they do can be difficult.
Cater to Mixed Audiences: If a specialist asks a complex question in a mixed audience, do not leave the neophytes in the dust. Begin by explaining the question in layman’s terms. Then give an answer on the specialist’s level, followed by a “translation” that extracts something meaningful for less-knowledgeable audience members.
Investigate Related Issues: Basic research about issues related to the topic may help speakers prepare for unexpected questions. Here are some questions that pinpoint logical expansions of an issue: How does the issue work in other places? How did the issue work in the past? How might it work in the future? Has the definition or common conception of the issue changed over time? How do other issues affect the issue? Is the issue connected to any controversies? Are any of the speech’s positions unconventional or controversial?
Prepare for Time Constraints: Are there any points that the speech passes over quickly due to time constraints? Be prepared to expand on those points, because they are likely targets for audience questions.
Leading a Successful Q&A
To help the Q&A session run smoothly, communicate effectively with the audience. The following techniques will help the audience stay with you:
Audience
You want the audience to be engaged during your speech. Encourage them to ask questions at the end.
Two men sit in an audience and one man has his hands raised to ask a question.
Announce the Q&A session early on to give the audience time to prepare questions. Say something like, “I look forward to answering your questions after I explain my main points. “
Repeat each question loudly and clearly before answering. If the audience cannot hear the question, they will not understand the answer.
To take a moment to think about a question, stall with a phrase like, “That’s an interesting question. ” Be careful with this tactic, though—if the speaker praises one question too much, the other audience members may feel insulted if he or she does not give their questions equal praise.
If someone asks a yes-or-no question, keep the answer simple. Otherwise, try to say something beyond a curt one-word answer. Do not give the impression of dismissing audience members or discouraging questions.
There is no such thing as a bad question. This may not actually be true, but public speakers should pretend it is! Do not embarrass anyone asking a question; it could create a negative atmosphere in which others are too uncomfortable to ask questions.
The Unfamiliar Question
Many speakers get flustered when an unfamiliar question comes up. Public speakers should prepare so they do not panic if someone asks this type of question. It is impossible to read every paper or know every name that may come up. Speakers who accept that fact can make unfamiliar questions work in their favor by demonstrating humility and interest in learning new things; do not forget that speakers are allowed to ask questions too! Furthermore, in the case of unfamiliar material, the questioner may be relying on false information or unfounded assumptions, and it would be a mistake to accept the information without understanding the context.
Controversial or Unconventional Questions
If someone asks a question that relies on inappropriate ideas or assumptions, the speaker should find a polite way to distance him- or herself from that perspective before answering the question. Otherwise, the audience may assume the speaker shares the questioner’s offensive opinion.
Language, from verbal to non-verbal communication, helps your audience understand your speech.
Learning Objective
State the importance of carefully choosing language to use in your speech
Key Points
Carefully select each word to include in your speech. At the same time, consider the words that don’t make the cut: what are you not saying in your speech?
How you communicate your words, through phrasing, voice, gesture, and mannerism, is equally important as the words themselves.
Consider what you want your audience to do, think, or feel at the conclusion of your speech. Use this to guide how you word and deliver your speech.
Key Terms
inflection
A change in pitch or tone of voice.
meaning
The objects or concept that a word or phrase denotes, or that which a sentence says.
language
A form of communication using words either spoken or gestured with the hands and structured with grammar, often with a writing system.
The Importance of Language
Why Language Matters
The words you choose and how you deliver the words are critical to get your message across in a speech.
Two men review a copy of a speech with notes written on it.
Language
From the words you speak to the points and topics you articulate, language is the vehicle that helps your audience understand and agree with your statement or argument.
Word Choice
Carefully select each individual word in your speech. Is it the best word you can use to convey your message or meaning? Is your phrasing easy to understand? Are you using descriptive language? Do you connect similar thoughts for your audience? Have you included points of contrast to illustrate broader points?
These are all important questions to consider as you select the words in your speech. Even more important are the words you choose to leave out: consider too, what you aren’t saying.
Delivery
It’s not just a matter of the words you say, but how you deliver them. From gesture, force, and directness, to the pitch, tone and inflection of your voice, it’s important to consider the complete package that you’re delivering to your audience. Speech contains nonverbal elements known as paralanguage, including voice quality, rate, pitch, volume, and speaking style, as well as prosodic features such as rhythm, intonation, and stress. You should craft and practice these elements just as carefully as the words you include in your speech.
Takeaway Message
At the end of the speech, ask yourself: how do you want your audience to walk away feeling? What do you want them to remember? Is there a particular call-to-action you want them to perform? Or, do you want a particular point to resonate with them for some time? Thinking about the end result, or takeaway message, helps you choose how to word and deliver the speech for your audience.
11.1.2: Ways of Thinking About Language
It’s important to consider language from multiple contexts and factors when crafting your speech to be as effective as it can be.
Learning Objective
Identify factors that should be considered when choosing language to be used in your speech
Key Points
Make sure that every word in your speech has a purpose for being in your speech. Don’t waste any words and commit to writing multiple drafts to refine and hone your speech.
Always think about your audience and venue: who are they and why are they there? Considering these factors will help inform what language is best to use in your speech.
What are the overall goals, objectives or purpose you have for speaking? Think about this so that you can work backwards to select the right language to achieve those goals, objectives or purpose.
Key Terms
Objective
not influenced by irrational emotions or prejudices; based on facts or evidence.
venue
A place, especially the one where a given event is to happen.
Ways of Thinking About Language
Thinking about Language
What lasting impression do you want to leave with your audience? What are the goals and objectives of your speech?
An audience reacts to a speech.
Select the Best Wording
When writing your speech, it’s imperative that each and every word is carefully selected for inclusion in your speech. Each word should serve a purpose–to advance your logic and address your speech subject in some way. How you organize your speech, outline your thesis and supporting arguments, as well as the ways you describe those points are all essential to crafting the best speech you can. Devoting yourself to the creation of multiple drafts of your speech ensures that you are honing and refining your speech down to its most effective words and parts.
Consider Your Audience
Who will be listening and watching your speech? Why are they there and what do they want? You’ll want to not only fully understand your audience for who they are, as this may inform you of their experience with your subject, but you’ll also want to understand what has brought them to your speech in the first place. In thinking very specifically about the groups and types of people attending your speech, you can more finely tailor the language of your speech.
Consider Your Venue and Occasion
Understanding your speech venue and the occasion for your speech is just as important as getting to know your audience. Venue and occasion can often dictate both subject matter and formality of your speech. You want to make sure your languages both of those elements.
Your Overall Goals, Objectives and Purpose
Why are you giving a speech? What have you, from all the other people who could speak, been selected? What makes you the subject matter expert? Consider each of these questions as you prepare your speech. Knowing your purpose for speaking must be one of the guiding principles as you craft your thesis, supporting evidence and make your case to your audience. Thinking about what you want to achieve informs how you can establish a plan, that is, select the right language, to achieve that goal.
11.2: Variations in Language
11.2.1: Variations in Directness
Use force and directness to add dynamic contrast and texture to your speech.
Learning Objective
Use force and directness appropriately in your speech
Key Points
Force and directness are both cause and effect. They are not solely the use of loudness, strong words, or emphatic gestures, but may cause them.
Use directness and force when you have particularly emphatic points to make.
Be authentic and genuine. Use ideas, your feelings on your subject, wording, and delivery to convey force, directness, and conviction.
Avoid being pushy, overbearing, or intimidating.
Key Term
direct
Straight, constant, without interruption.
Example
Some of the most memorable speeches in history—John F. Kennedy’s “Ich bin ein Berliner,” Martin Luther King Jr.’s “I Have a Dream,” or even Abraham Lincoln’s “Gettysburg Address”—have all used force and directness to create dynamic, engaging speeches.
Variations in Directness
Directness
Knowing when and how to use directness in your speech can strengthen the impact on the audience.
Booker T. Washington delivers the Atlanta Compromise speech.
“Omit the thunder of delivery, if you will, but put ‘silent lightning’ into your speech. Make your thoughts breathe and your words burn. ” – J. Berg. Esenwein, The Art of Public Speaking
What is Directness?
Directness is a state of being straight, constant, and without interruption. With regards to public speaking, directness refers not only to how you address your audience in both style and tone, but the force behind that style and tone. A better way to think about force and directness is to consider what they are not.
Force and directness are not:
Speaking loudly (but force and directness may cause you to raise your voice)
Using wild, violent gestures (but force and directness may cause you to gesture more emphatically)
As you can see, force and directness can be both cause and effect. Essentially, directness adds emphasis to your words, showing earnest conviction in your beliefs and arguments, thereby making your speech more evocative and persuasive to your audience. From a stylistic perspective, force and directness add moments of dynamic contrast to your speech.
When to Use It
Directness and force are not always appropriate in every speech and should be used with care. You don’t want to come across as overbearing, pushy, or threatening to your audience. That said, if you are giving a speech where you must convey a persuasive argument, directness and force may be appropriate.
Any time you are speaking about your own personal beliefs, values, or principles, you may find that force and directness naturally occur as you speak, since you are already so deeply invested in your own beliefs, values, and principles.
How to Use It
Force and directness can be controlled by four factors: ideas, your feeling about the subject, wording, and delivery.
Ideas
Certain ideas in your speech may lend themselves to force and directness. As you craft your speech, see which ideas rise to the top with regard to force and directness, and adjust your style accordingly.
Your Feelings
What are your gut feelings on your subject? Are you inspired, humbled, enraged? Capitalize on your own emotional response to determine if a section of your speech could be more forceful or direct than others.
Wording
Vivid words, phrases, and imagery are essential in crafting a forceful section of your speech. Use evocative language, powerful imagery, and compelling anecdotes to get your point across.
Delivery
Don’t be shy about using force or directness with your audience. Feel the conviction of your own words. Be authentic, genuine, and consistent.
11.2.2: Variations in Abstraction
While abstract descriptions should usually be avoided, abstraction can be used to your advantage when used correctly.
Learning Objective
Give examples of the uses of abstraction in a speech
Key Points
Abstract descriptions are vague and not specific.
Abstraction is a good technique to use if your audience already has a working knowledge of any part of your speech. You can save time and keep your audience engaged by not boring them with material or levels of understanding they already have.
If you are too abstract, you may confuse your audience.
To test if your speech is too abstract or over-described, have another person read your speech draft and summarize your main points back to you.
Key Term
abstract
Difficult to understand; abstruse.
Variations in Abstraction
What Does It Mean to Be Abstract?
Abstractions are ideas that are not described in specifics. They cannot be physically sensed (seen, heard, felt, touched, or smelled). Abstraction lacks representational qualities. Abstract descriptions are in contrast to concrete descriptions. Concrete descriptions cut through any vagueness or amorphous interpretation of an idea.
Examples of Abstract Descriptions
A happy child
A pretty car
A beautiful night
An incredible sight
Examples of Concrete Descriptions
A three-year old boy
A white Lamborghini Aventador
A starlit summer evening
The wide river-cut rust-colored ravines of the Grand Canyon
While most of the time, you want to avoid abstract descriptions in your speech, there are times when it may be stylistically appropriate.
Mounting the Ladder of Abstraction
Ladder of Abstraction
A good speaker will be able to manoeuvre along the ladder of abstraction.
The Ladder of Abstraction, popularized by S. I. Hayakawa, is based on the idea that people are able to achieve four levels of reasoning.
At the bottom of the ladder is concrete thinking. Children tend to start asking concrete questions about the world around them at the age of eight or nine. “Why is the sky blue? ” “Where did my baby brother come from? ” Once you start hearing questions like these, you know the individual has started to climb the ladder of abstraction.
From that point, humans continue to grow and as they do so, their thinking broadens until they finally reach the top of the ladder: abstraction.
Talented speakers will start at the bottom of the ladder and present a concrete concept to the audience. They will then end on a broader, more abstract note. Thus they will ascende the ladder of abstraction. In doing so, they will generate interest (by use of the concrete point) and then move on to discuss the concept in general.
Advantages of Abstraction
If you audience has a working knowledge of something in your speech, you may not need to get into very finite, concrete detail with them. Using abstraction in this instance saves you time and doesn’t bore your audience with knowledge they may already know.
Disadvantages of Abstraction
The most obvious challenge of using abstraction is assuming that your audience has a certain working knowledge and failing to describe something concretely that may have needed a specific, spelled out description. In this instance, you will confuse your audience if you speak too broadly or vaguely.
Abstraction: Use It or Lose It?
A quick way to test if your speech is too abstract and not specific or concrete enough, share your draft with another person. Ask them to summarize it back to you. If they leave out or gloss over some points, ask them if your speech was clear enough to understand. If they didn’t understand parts, you’ll know which sections to go back to and specify in more concrete detail. Similarly, the person reviewing your speech can let you know if its too detailed.
11.2.3: Variations in Objectivity
Ideally, strive for a balance between subjectivity and objectivity in your speech.
Learning Objective
List the benefits of speaking with a balance of objectivity and subjectivity
Key Points
Objectivity is the ability to remove your personal experience, bias or preference from your speech.
Objectivity gives you credibility as an impartial, unbiased speaker and subject matter expert.
That said, delivering a speech with 100% objectivity can feel robotic. Sprinkle some subjective moments such as personal anecdotes or how you connect to your topic to still remain relatable to your audience.
Key Terms
objectivity
The state of being objective, just, unbiased and not influenced by emotions or personal prejudices
subjective
The state of being formed, as in opinions, based upon a person’s feelings or intuition, not upon observation or reasoning; coming more from within the observer than from observations of the external environment.
Variations in Objectivity
Finding a Balance
You should strive for a balance between subjectivity and objectivity in your speech.
German Chancellor Angela Merkel giving a keynote speech.
What Does it Mean to Be Objective?
When we are subjective in our speech, we put forth our own experience and bias into the conversation. To be objective, then, is to remove yourself from your own experience and bias. For the most part, when it comes to public speaking, you want to remain as objective as possible. The reason for this is because you don’t want your audience to accuse you of bias or preference as you substantiate your argument.
It’s a fine line to walk between subjectivity and objectivity, one that requires you to pay close attention to your own personal biases. One of the easiest ways to determine objectivity is to take a look at the amount of facts, research and data that you have to substantiate your case. If your speech is largely guided by personal thoughts, opinions and beliefs, then it is more likely that your speech is heading into subjective territory.
Advantages of Objectivity
The advantages far outweigh the disadvantages to remain objective throughout your speech. By writing and speaking objectively–that is, removing yourself from the facts, examples, and scenarios– you lend a more compelling case for your credibility as speaker. By sticking to hard facts and data, your audience can trust your impartiality to the subject matter. When they know that you don’t have anything personally invested in the outcome of or response to your speech, they are more likely to trust you as as subject matter expert.
Subjectivity Has Its Place
That said, you can also use objectivity to a point that can actually hurt your speech. By relying solely on hard data and research, your audience may find your speech impersonal and not connect to your material on a personal level. A speech without any personal anecdotes can feel robotic; on the other end of the spectrum, a speech comprised of nothing but anecdotes can feel untrustworthy. It’s your job as speaker to strike that careful balance to use enough subjectivity to be relatable to your audience but not so much as to erode your credibility and authority.
11.2.4: Variations in Orality
Orality is thought and verbal expression in societies where the technologies of literacy (writing) are unfamiliar to most of the population.
Learning Objective
Differentiate the qualities of an oral society from that of a literate society
Key Points
Oral societies use narrative and repetition for ease of memory.
Oral societies use directness and force to express emphasis.
Oral expression brings words together in pithy phrases that are the product of generations of evolution.
Gestures should be natural and not distracting.
If you’re able to answer questions following your speech, always repeat the question before answering so everyone can hear what was asked. If you don’t know an answer, do not lie or make one up; share what relavant information you can.
Always have a backup plan when using audio/visual technology for amplification of your voice or visual aids in case this equipment fails.
Key Terms
orality
The quality of being spoken or verbally communicated
primary orality
Primary orality’ refers to thought and its verbal expression within cultures “totally untouched by any knowledge of writing or print.”
Example
The ‘sturdy oak tree’, the ‘beautiful princess’ or ‘clever Odysseus’ — these words are brought together out of habit during general communication.
Introduction
Orality
Modern scholarship has shown that orality is a complex and tenacious social phenomenon.
An oral community in Takéo, Cambodia sits together and discusses a writing.
Orality is thought and verbal expression in societies where the technologies of literacy (especially writing and print) are unfamiliar to most of the population. The study of orality is closely allied to the study of oral tradition. However, it has broader implications.
In his publications Walter J. Ong, a key scholar in this field, distinguishes between two forms of orality: ‘primary orality’ and ‘secondary orality’. In addition, he refers to ‘oral residue’ and ‘residually oral cultures’.
Drawing on hundreds of studies from anthropology, linguistics and the study of oral tradition, Ong summarizes ten key aspects of the ‘psychodynamics of orality’. Ong draws his examples from both primary oral societies, and societies with a very high ‘oral residue’.
Formulaic Styling
Formulaic styling is to package complex ideas memorably for easy retention and recall.
To solve effectively the problem of retaining and retrieving carefully articulated thought, one must think in mnemonic patterns, shaped for ready oral recurrence. Thoughts must come into being in heavily rhythmic, balanced patterns, in repetitions or antithesis, in alliterations or assonances, in epithetic and other formulary expressions.
Anthropologist Marcel Jousse identifies a close linkage between rhythm and breathing patterns, gestures, and the bilateral symmetry of the human body in several ancient verse traditions. This synergy between the body and the construction of oral thought further fuels memory.
Additive Rather Than Subordinative
Oral cultures avoid complex ‘subordinative’ clauses. Ong cites an example from the Douay-Rheims version of Genesis (1609–10), noting that this basic additive pattern (in italics) has been identified in many oral contexts around the world:
In the beginning God created heaven and earth. And the earth was void and empty, and darkness was on the
face
of the deep; and the spirit of God moved over the waters. And God said …
Demonstrating how oral modes of communication tend to evolve into literate ones, Ong additionally cites the New American Bible (1970), which offers a translation that is grammatically far more complex:
In the beginning, when God created the heavens and the earth, the earth was a formless wasteland, and darkness covered the abyss, while a mighty wind swept over the waters. Then God said …
Aggregative Rather Than Analytic
Oral expression brings words together in pithy phrases that are the product of generations of evolution: the ‘sturdy oak tree’, the ‘beautiful princess’, or ‘clever Odysseus’. The words are brought together out of habit during general communication. Analyzing or breaking apart such expressions adds complexity to communications, and questions received wisdom.
Redundant or Copious
Speech that repeats earlier thoughts or thought-pictures, or shines a different light on them somehow, helps to keep both the speaker and the listener focused on the topic, and makes it easier for all to recall the key points later. Oral cultures encourage fluency, fulsomeness, volubility. Rhetoricians were to call this copia.
Conservative or Traditionalist
Because oral societies have no effective access to writing and print technologies, they must invest considerable energy in basic information management. Storage of information, being primarily dependent on individual or collective recall, must be handled with particular thrift. It is possible to approximately measure oral residue from the amount of memorization the culture’s educational procedures require.
This creates incentives to avoid exploring new ideas, and particularly to avoid the burden of having to store them. It does not prevent oral societies from demonstrating dynamism and change, but there is a premium on ensuring that changes cleave to traditional formulas, and are presented as fitting the traditions of the ancestors.
Close to the Human Lifeworld
Oral cultures take a practical approach to information storage. To qualify for storage, information must usually concern matters of immediate practical concern or familiarity to most members of the society.
By contrast, only literary cultures have launched phenomenological analyses, abstract classifications, ordered lists and tables, etc. Nothing analogous exists in oral societies.
Agonistically Toned
Beowulf fights the dragon: the oral world is agonistic.
Agonistic means ‘combative’, but Ong actually advances a deeper thesis with this point. Writing and to an even greater extent print, he argues, disengage humans from direct, interpersonal struggle.
Empathetic and Participatory
In an oral culture the most reliable and trusted technique for learning is to share a “close, empathetic, communal association” with others who know.
Homeostatic
Oral societies conserve their limited capacity to store information, and retain the relevance of their information to the interest of their present members, by shedding memories that have lost their past significance.
Situational Rather Than Abstract
In oral cultures, concepts are used in a way that minimizes abstraction, focusing to the greatest extent possible on objects and situations directly known by the speaker.
11.2.5: Variations in Accuracy
Make sure all sources of information for your speech are accurate, reliable, unbiased, credible, and current.
Learning Objective
Choose reliable sources when researching in order to assure your speech’s accuracy
Key Points
Use scholarly sources such as journal articles, reviews, biographies, and interviews to ensure accuracy and credibility.
You can find scholarly sources collected in several online databases.
Always cite your sources when and how you can so that you’re never accused of lifting, stealing, or borrowing someone else’s words or work.
Key Term
Accuracy
Exact conformity to truth, or to a rule or model; degree of conformity of a measure to a true or standard value.
Variations in Accuracy
Accuracy
Accuracy is vital for a speech to be successful. Make sure your facts are correct!
A teacher speaks at the front of a classroom.
Why is Accuracy Important?
If you are presenting yourself as a subject matter expert or authority, it’s imperative that you have your facts straight before delivering them to a waiting audience. In the age of fact-checking, it’s especially important to make sure that you have done your homework and fully researched your topic and supporting evidence because chances are, your audience already has. You will only enhance your credibility and authority by making sure your information and sources are solid.
Are Your Sources “Good”?
How do you know if your sources are “good? ” You’ll want to make sure your sources are reliable, unbiased, and current. To do this, seek out information from trustworthy sources. Typically, you’ll turn to scholarly sources such as academic journals, scientific research, or data. You should also understand that scholarly research comes in primary and secondary sources.
A primary source is an original document containing content and data created or collected by the author. Primary sources can include interviews you conduct to gain information and data, collections of letters, lab reports, autobiographical, and literary works. Secondary sources are written about primary sources and include documents such as reviews, critiques, biographies, and other scholarly books or journal articles.
To find academic and scholarly sources, asking your local librarian is one of the best ways to validate whether or not a source you have found is reliable, unbiased, and current. You can also access databases of scholarly sources online, including:
Academic Search Premier
Project MUSE
JSTOR
Entrez-PubMed
The MLA International Bibliography
PsychINFO
ProQuest
A Word About Plagiarism
Always cite your sources whenever or however you can. You never want to be accused of pulling information or data from an unreliable source, or worse yet, just making it up. You also don’t want to be accused of directly lifting, stealing, or even borrowing someone else’s words. Never take someone else’s words and claim them as your own.
11.3: Using Language Effectively
11.3.1: Choosing Clear Words and Phrasing
Choose clear words and phrasing in your speech by fully understanding your topic through delimiting the question and defining key terms.
Learning Objective
Analyze your speech topic until you fully understand the question and key terms
Key Points
How well do you know your topic? Make sure you fully understand everything that goes into your topic as you begin to craft the specific wording of your speech.
Start by delimiting the question, that is, fully parsing out exactly what question you’re answering by giving your speech. Even if you don’t think there is a specific question, your speech topic exists for some purpose. What purpose does your speech fulfill?
From there, define your key terms of your speech.
Key Terms
delimit
To mark or fix the limits of.
baseline
A datum used as the basis for calculation or for comparison.
dissect
To analyze an idea in detail by separating it into its parts.
Choosing Clear Words and Phrasing
Using Clear Words
It’s important to convey your message to the audience in the clearest way possible.
President Ronald Reagan gives a campaign speech.
How Well Do You Fully Understand Your Topic?
You know that you have to write a speech, and you may or may not have been given a specific topic about which to write. Easy as pie, right? Hold on there–take a step back for a moment and ask yourself: how well do you fully understand your topic? It’s important to take that step back and look at your speech from a distanced perspective.
Looking at your speech from a distance allows you to dissect exactly how you can begin to tackle the specific wording of your speech. You want to make sure that your speech is easy to understand and follow, so it’s imperative to choose clear words and phrasing. When you think of your speech in delimiting the question and defining key terms, you have a great starting point for how to begin selecting the clearest words and phrasing.
Delimit the Question
What question does your speech address? You might be thinking, “Wait a minute. My speech isn’t even answering a question. I’m just supposed to talk about a business plan I’ve made for a fake company for an assignment in my entrepreneurship class. “
Here’s the thing: your speech actually is answering a question, that question being, “Why should you invest in my business? ” (however fake that business may be).
The importance of identifying the broader question to which your speech will speak not only helps your audience understand your point, but it pinpoints exactly how you need to tailor your speech to your audience. Essentially, when you take the steps to delimit your question (your speech’s purpose), you help to outline exactly how your audience can follow your line of reasoning.
When you delimit the question, first think about the purpose of your speech. This will usually point you in the direction of the broader question. From there, list step-by-step how you plan to address that question. Set the parameters for your rhetoric for your audience.
Define Key Terms
Even though your speech could be about something that is otherwise common knowledge to your audience, it is helpful to also define key terms for them as you go along in your speech. Even though you may have outlined your plan of attack by delimiting the question, it also helps to explain exactly what you’re talking about to your audience. When you establish your key terms by defining them for your audience, you set a baseline standard of understanding for your audience, thus eliminating any confusion.
When you delimited your question, were there any key words used in that question? Define those terms as necessary. You’ll want to source your definitions appropriately by looking up those key terms from reliable sources. In doing so, you indicate to your audience that not only do you fully understand the ways in which to approach your argument, but that you understand your topic.
Do be careful: you don’t want to “dumb down” your speech by defining every single key term throughout your speech. Make sure you only highlight and define those words that are necessary for establishing a foundation of your speech topic.
11.3.2: Choosing Vivid Words
Don’t lose audience interest by having a boring speech; use descriptive language to build interest and make your points more creatively.
Learning Objective
Use creative, vivid language in your speech to combat monotony
Key Points
Descriptive language in your speech builds interest and allows you to immerse your audience in a sensory experience.
Use simile and metaphor as a way to add descriptive language and wording into your speech. Make your points more compelling by painting pictures with words in the minds of your audience members.
Tell your audience exactly how you want them to digest the information in your speech by using a variety of process words.
Key Terms
monotony
Tedium as a result of repetition or a lack of variety.
simile
A figure of speech in which one thing is compared to another, in the case of English generally using like or as.
metaphor
The use of a word or phrase to refer to something that it isn’t, invoking a direct similarity between the word or phrase used and the thing described, but without the words like or as, which would imply a simile.
Example
Here is a list of fifty of the most commonly used process words to add interest and vivid depth to your speech: Account, Analyze, Argue, Assess, Calculate, Characterize, Classify, Comment, Compare, Consider, Contrast, Criticize, Deduce, Define, Demonstrate, Describe, Determine, Differentiate, Discuss, Distinguish, Elaborate, Elucidate, Enumerate, Estimate, Evaluate, Examine, Explain, Express, Identify, Illustrate, Indicate, Infer, Interpret, Justify, List, Mention, Name, Outline, Prove, Quantify, Relate, Review, Show, Speculate, State, Substantiate, Suggest, Summarize, Trace, Verify.
Choose Vivid Language and Wording
William Shakespeare
When lacking vivid words, Shakespeare created his own. He invented over 1,700 words and phrases in his body of works.
Conquer Monotony
“The monotonous speaker not only drones along in the same volume and pitch of tone but uses always the same emphasis, the same speed, the same thoughts—or dispenses with thought altogether. Monotony: the cardinal and most common sin of the public speaker. ” – J. Berg Esenwein, The Art of Public Speaking
The quickest way to lose your audience is to be boring. Avoid the “sin of monotony,” as Esenwein puts it, by using vivid language and imagery to build interest in your speech.
Writing Descriptively
Think of your favorite food or meal, or perhaps your favorite place to visit. What does it smell like? Look like? Taste like? What sounds are characteristic of your favorite vacation spot? When you use vivid, descriptive language in your speech, you immerse your audience in a sensory experience that transports them from their seats and into the experience you craft with your words.
Writing descriptively is more than just using “pretty” language to dress up your speech; in fact, you want to be careful that your speech doesn’t come across as poetry. Using descriptive language can actually help get your points across more pointedly to your audience than by simply presenting hard facts and data. Descriptive language engages your audience’s imagination, which holds their attention and adds both interest and complexity to your speech.
There are a variety of ways to add descriptive language to your speech, which are described below.
Similes and Metaphors
Two of the easiest techniques to add descriptive wording to your speech are simile and metaphor. They essentially achieve the same goal: comparing one thing to another in likeness. In a simile, the comparison is made by using the words “like” or “as. ” Metaphors, on the other hand, usually compare things directly by using the verb “to be. ” These comparisons help to paint a picture in the minds of your audience. For speechwriters, metaphor and simile are like the brushstrokes of an artist, the notes of a melody, or the choreography of a dance — they demonstrate an artistry with language.
These comparisons may be alike or dissimilar. The use of opposing ideas and imagery can illustrate bolder points while similar comparisons bolster the strength of an idea or image.
Billy Collins, former U.S. Poet Laureate, is a master of metaphor. Take, for example, his poem, Litany:
You are the bread and the knife, the crystal goblet and the wine. You are the dew on the morning grass and the burning wheel of the sun. You are the white apron of the baker, and the marsh birds suddenly in flight. However, you are not the wind in the orchard, the plums on the counter, or the house of cards. And you are certainly not the pine-scented air. There is just no way that you are the pine-scented air. It is possible that you are the fish under the bridge, maybe even the pigeon on the general’s head, but you are not even close to being the field of cornflowers at dusk. And a quick look in the mirror will show that you are neither the boots in the corner nor the boat asleep in its boathouse. It might interest you to know, speaking of the plentiful imagery of the world, that I am the sound of rain on the roof. I also happen to be the shooting star, the evening paper blowing down an alley and the basket of chestnuts on the kitchen table. I am also the moon in the trees and the blind woman’s tea cup. But don’t worry, I’m not the bread and the knife. You are still the bread and the knife. You will always be the bread and the knife, not to mention the crystal goblet and–somehow–the wine.
Process Words
Process words tell someone how to process a set of information. In a speech, it’s important to vary your vocabulary so that you don’t end up repeating yourself. There are several process words that get at the basic six ways of processing information: comparing, criticizing, describing, discussing, evaluating, and explaining. By using synonyms of these words as you craft your speech, you not only tell your audience how to process the information you’re presenting, you also build interest by using a varied vocabulary.
11.3.3: Choosing Appropriate Words
Consider the style, tone, and sections of your speech to determine the most appropriate words and phrases.
Learning Objective
Choose appropriate words that can be used to section your speech
Key Points
Section your speech into parts arranged in a logical order, with each section having a specific focus or purpose.
Transition between sections with phrases and words that connect your ideas.
Avoid weasel phrases in order to keep your speech credible and authoritative.
Key Term
weasel phrases
Phrases that often precede statements and that lack substantive quality.
Choosing Appropriate Words
Appropriate Words
When choosing the appropriate words for your speech, it helps to fully understand the context of your speech, including the audience and venue.
A valedictorian gives his speech.
The Style and Tone of Speaking
Consider for a few minutes exactly where, when, and how you will be giving your speech. Consider the tone and style of your speech. From there, think about how you will structure your speech, given these various contexts. Thinking about these parameters can give you an idea of the most appropriate language to use in the wording of your speech.
Sectioning Your Speech
As you outline your argument, you will want to break your speech into sections. A speech consists, broadly, of an Introduction, Body, and Conclusion. However, as you begin to highlight your thesis and specific supporting points and examples, you will create additional sections to your speech. This is particularly helpful if you have a long speech because sectioning makes the information easier for your audience to process.
Each section of your speech should have a specific purpose or focus. As you move from one section to the next, you will want to make sure you transition smoothly between each section.
Useful Phrases for Transitions and Sectioning Your Ideas
Generalizing: as a general rule, as a rule, in general, generally, normally, on the whole, usually
Explaining: in other words, that is, this means that
Express likelihood: it is certain that, there is no doubt that, I am confident that, certainly, definitely, clearly, undoubtedly, presumably, will, is, should, it is probable that, it is likely that, probably, can, may, it is possible that, could, might, might possibly, possibly, perhaps
Express doubt: it is doubtful that, maybe, is improbable, is unlikely, it is uncertain, impossible, cannot, can’t, will not, is not
Draw attention: it is worth noting that, it should be emphasized that, it should be highlighted that, it should be underlined that, in particular, especially, mainly, chiefly, mostly, it should be pointed out that, it should be noted that, it should be remembered that, it is worth stressing that, is vital, is crucial
Contrasting two points: however, but, in spite of, despite, in spite of the fact that, despite the fact that, nevertheless, nonetheless, instead, conversely, on the contrary, by contrast, whereas, while, whilst, although, even though, on the one hand, on the other hand, in contrast, in comparison with, but, yet, alternatively, the former, the latter, respectively, all the same, there are two possibilities, alternatively, the one, the other, either, or, neither, nor, in addition, no only, but also, worse still, better still, equally, likewise, similarly, correspondingly, in the same way, another possibility, in a similar vein, as well as, furthermore, moreover, also, although, again, what is more, besides, too, as well as
Giving examples or introducing illustrations: for example, for instance, to name an example, to give an example, is well illustrated by, a case point is, such as, such, one of which, illustrates, is an example of this, is shown by, is exemplified by, is illustrated by, (something) is, means, describes, is defined as, is used, is concerned with, deals with, relates to, involves, signifies, consist of
Stating consequences: so, therefore, as a consequence, as a result, now, consequently, because of, thus, for this reason, then, this is why, accordingly, hence, given this, with reference to, given, on this basis, is caused by, causes, due to, has the effect, affects, the reason for, because of this, if, then, results in, leads to, produces, owing to, through, as, since, because
Summarizing: to sum up, in summary, to summarize, in brief, altogether, overall, I conclude, I therefore conclude, reached the conclusion that, it is concluded, therefore, for this reason, then, thus, in conclusion, to bring it all together
Qualifying frequency: never, rarely, sometimes, usually, often, always, generally, on the whole, frequently, occasionally, hardly ever, seldom
Qualifying results: under no circumstances, mainly, generally, predominantly, usually, the majority, most of, almost all, a number of, may be, some, a few, a little, fairly, very, quite, rather, almost
Weasel phrases are those that make a lot of promise but do not follow through on the delivery. These trigger phrases often precede statements that lack much substantive quality. These terms are particularly important to avoid so as not to invalidate the credibility of your argument. Here is a list of common weasel phrases:
allegedly
arguably
as opposed to most
considered by many
contrary to many
critics/critics say that
it could be argued that
it has been suggested/stated/said/noticed
it is widely believed/generally claimed
many people say
many scientists argue that
research has shown
researchers argue that
serious scholars say that
social science says/believes that
some historians argue
the scientific community
this is widely considered to be/regarded as
11.3.4: Matching Personal Style
Matching your personal style in your speech by defining your voice will take time and practice.
Learning Objective
Create your own unique voice based on the specific context of your speech
Key Points
Your voice is ultimately a reflection of who you are as a person and influences how your audience both perceives and receives you as speaker. Adapt your voice to your audience’s needs, goals, and expectations.
Consider your role in relation to the audience. Why are you there to speak to them? What makes you the subject matter expert?
Don’t forget to think about the formality and venue of your speech, as well as any relevant cultural contexts that may come into play.
Your attitude speaks volumes to your audience. Make sure your attitude is appropriate to all the factors of your speech: topic, audience, and venue. Be aware that subconscious non-verbal cues can betray how you really feel.
Don’t be afraid to get creative and let your speech reflect your unique personality.
Key Term
pandering
The act of expressing one’s views in accordance with the likes of a group to which one is attempting to appeal. The term is most notably associated with politics. In pandering, the views one is verbally expressing are merely for the purpose of drawing support and votes and do not necessarily reflect one’s personal values.
Example
Steve Jobs, the late CEO of Apple, Inc., famously wore a black turtleneck to Apple’s annual Worldwide Developers Conference each year. Despite this being Apple’s biggest moment in the technology world spotlight, Jobs’ black turtleneck shirt had become his signature trademark, a reflection of his personal style. Even as Apple unveiled some of their most game-changing products for the future of personal computing, Jobs never compromised his personal sense of style. It matched well with his conversational manner and tone. In many ways, Jobs was able to show that the Apple brand was both flexible and approachable and could be as casual or as powerful as needed, for both the home user and the power user.
Matching Personal Style
When writing a speech, it’s important to consider the complete context in which you plan to speak. From audience, formality, topic, and venue, each of these factor in how you deliver your speech. Your words, phrases, lines of reasoning, as well as the gestures and mannerisms you might use, will influence your personal speaking style.
Your Own Style
Your speech is a reflection of who you are. Be sure to add your own personal style.
Senator Dan Quayle gives a speech in 1984.
Define Your Voice
As you craft your speech, you will naturally begin to adopt a tone and style as you write. Your personal style and tone is what’s known as your voice. Your voice is what makes your writing and speeches unique from those of others. Developing your voice, in particular honing what works for you and what you like, is something that develops over time.
That said, there are other factors that shape your voice. Your voice should adapt to your speech as much as your speech is guided by your voice. Here are six factors to which you must consider as you develop your voice in your speech:
Audience
Who will be present at your speech? Who will be listening to what you have to say? As you consider your audience, think of what their needs, goals, and expectations are of your speech. Adapt your tone appropriately to your audience.
Formality
Are you presenting at an academic conference? Or are you giving the first toast speech at your best friend’s wedding? Consider the specific occasion, venue, and formality of your speech to make sure you’re using the most appropriate phrasing, language, and wording. Formality will also dictate how you need to dress and appear before your audience.
Your Role in Relation to Your Audience
Why are you there? What makes you the subject matter expert? As much as you’re analyzing your audience, the audience is doing the same of you. Your audience will have expectations and assumptions about you, so it’s helpful to consider them before you ever step foot on stage so that you can adapt and tailor your style accordingly.
Attitude
It’s not just what you say, but how you say it. Your attitude will speak volumes to your audience, not only informing them about you as a person, but either bolstering or eroding your credibility as speaker. Also, be aware that non-verbal cues, such as hand gestures, body stance, and posture can subconsciously betray your real attitude to your audience members, so always be mindful of your physical presence when speaking. You don’t need to be chipper and cheerful for every speech, but your attitude should reflect the other factors influencing your speech.
Cultural Context
Just as when you were analyzing your audience, consider the cultural context of where and to whom you’re speaking. Use your commonalities with the cultural context of your speech venue and audience to build bridges of understanding with your audience. However, don’t fall victim to pandering where you merely say things that reflect the overall needs and expectations of your audience without actually believing in them. Be authentic.
Your Own Creativity
At its heart, your voice is a reflection of you as a person. Let your creativity and the authenticity of your own words and experiences be the vehicle of your voice, guided by your gut. Over time, you’ll know what sounds good and what works well in your speeches.
Incorporate these best practices into your speeches so that they become second nature. It is also helpful to find volunteer readers for your drafts. Having a second reader or mock audience can help you identify areas that can be improved or emphasized, further honing your skills and personal style as a speech writer.
What’s your personal style?
Don’t be afraid to let your personal style come through in your speech. Steve Jobs does it well here with his signature black turtleneck.
11.4: Deploying Style Effectively
11.4.1: Alliteration
Alliteration is a stylistic device whereby a series of words begin with the same consonant sound, which can help your audience’s listening.
Learning Objective
Explain why public speakers use alliteration in public speaking
Key Points
Phrases like “busy as a bee,” “drop dead gorgeous,” “friends and family” are all examples of alliteration.
Alliteration adds a textural complexity to your speech that makes your words more engaging.
Take a creative writing or poetic mindset to approach adding alliteration to your speech.
Key Term
alliteration
The repetition of consonants at the beginning of two or more words immediately succeeding each other, or at short intervals.
Alliteration
The game of Tic-Tac-Toe is a perfect example of alliteration. Each word in the game’s name begins with the letter “T.”
Alliteration: What Is It?
When you use the same repetitive sound at the beginning of a series of words or phrases, you are using alliteration. Typically, this means a string of words beginning with the same consonant or syllabic sound. While alliteration doesn’t serve much rhetorical purpose, you do make your case more compelling by using a beautiful form of expression and language.
Famous Alliteration in Speech
“I see also the dull, drilled, docile, brutish masses of the Hun soldiery plodding on like a swarm of crawling locusts.” –Winston Churchill on the German invasion of Russia
“To those people in the huts and villages of half the globe struggling to break the bonds of mass misery, we pledge our best efforts to help them help themselves, for whatever period is required–not because the communists may be doing it, not because we seek their votes, but because it is right. ” –John F. Kennedy’s Inaugural Address
“Veni, vidi, vici. ” –Julius Caesar
Why Use It?
As mentioned, it won’t boost the efficacy of your argument but it will make it sound better. Alliteration adds a textural complexity to your speech that makes your words more engaging. When your speech is more engaging, your audience is more apt to pay attention and remain engaged with your words.
How to Use Alliteration
As you craft your speech, try to put on your poet’s cap. Alliteration is a technique often found in poetry, so take the time to get creative with the words and phrasing of your speech. Look for sentences that could use a little “oomph” and try playing around with alliterative words and phrases to make your words sparkle.
11.4.2: Antithesis
Anthesis adds stylistic texture to your speech through the presentation of contrasting ideas and an opposite point of view.
Learning Objective
Give examples of antithesis in public speaking
Key Points
Contrast helps fully illustrate a concept by giving your audience a 360 degree understanding of your idea, claim, or argument.
Giving your audience a contrast of the thesis with an opposite point of view aims them in the direction of understanding the concept; you can then use your speech to more fully flesh out that idea.
If you’re having a hard time figuring out how to use antithesis in your speech, consider the opposing viewpoint of your main argument. From there, consider all the points of contrast that could be made from your main antithetical point.
Key Term
antithesis
A device by which two contrasting ideas are juxtaposed in parallel form.
Antithesis
Antithesis is a counter-proposition that denotes a direct contrast to the original proposition. Antithesis is a way to express contrast through direct opposites. Light is the antithesis of dark, heaven is the antithesis of hell, and some would even say that cats are the antithesis of dogs.
Antithesis
Anthesis is a way of presenting contrast. Black is the antithesis of white and vice-versa.
Antithesis is also a way to describe contrasting ideas or themes: genocide is the antithesis of world peace, for example.
Why it is Used
Contrast is a very important stylistic choice to fully illustrate a concept. By explaining a concept, idea or argument with its opposite, you give your audience a 360 degree understanding of your point. Using something’s opposite helps to bolster the definition about what you’re speaking. By giving your audience a contrast with the opposite point of view, they have a better idea of the concept; if they do not, you can clarify further. Antithesis is a great way to lead into exactly how you want to portray an idea or argument.
How to Use Antithesis
Antithesis makes for a great way to set up your argument or idea by showing your audience the opposite. From there, you can then specifically tailor your argument to fill the void left when describing its opposite. If you are having a hard time trying to decide how to use antithesis effectively, consider the main point you are trying to make with your speech. What would the opposing point be? Use that as a springboard to begin pinning down points of contrast to give your speech stylistic texture.
11.4.3: Hyperbole
Hyperbole is the use of exaggeration or overstatement to get your point across to your audience.
Learning Objective
State how hyperbole can be used as a stylistic tool in speech
Key Points
When hearing a hyperbole, ask yourself: is this claim really true?
While you want to avoid generalizations in your speech as much as possible, there are advantages to using hyperbole since it can be used as an effective persuasive device.
Don’t rely on hyperbole alone to substantiate your claims; instead, use it as a strategic stylistic choice to enliven your words and infuse them with persuasive meaning.
Key Term
hyperbole
Extreme exaggeration or overstatement; especially as a literary or rhetorical device.
Hyberbole
Hyperbole is a form of exaggeration. Do you really think these are THE most touching records EVER made?
Hyperbole: What Is It?
Hyperbole comes from the Greek word meaning exaggeration and that is exactly what it is. Often, you can identify hyperbolic claims by certain trigger words such as “most,” “best,” or “worst. ” But not all hyperbole is that clear cut. The question you must ask upon hearing a hyperbolic statement is whether or not it’s actually a true statement. Hyperbole would have you believe so, and that’s what makes it an effective and strategic stylistic choice.
Why Use It?
While you want to avoid generalizations in your speech as much as possible, there are advantages to using hyperbole. They can be used like any other descriptive form of language to help paint a more vivid picture for your audience. Hyperbole also serves as a form of persuasion, to really make your case to an audience. The use of exaggeration or overstatement can make your speech that much more persuasive.
How to Use Hyperbole
Like any stylistic choice, be strategic. You don’t want your speech to consist solely of hyperbole as your audience will quickly begin to see that your argument has no basis. You can also use it to be more relatable to your audience or to simply communicate your point with a more vivid, engaging style. If you were speaking about a world leader, you might say, “they have the weight of the world on their shoulders” instead of “world leaders have a lot to deal with. ” We know that a world leader does not, in fact carry a weight of 6.6 sextillion tons of the Earth’s physical weight. But using that phrase communicates just how difficult it is to carry the burdens of global leadership.
11.4.4: Onomatopoeia
Onomatopoeia is a stylistic choice to represent sound within words and can be used as an attention-getting device in your speech.
Learning Objective
Indicate when and how onomatopoeia should be used in speech
Key Points
Words like “meow,” “boom,” “bleep” and “boing” each represent the sound they make. These are each examples of onomatopoeia.
Onomatopoeia, because of its jarring nature, often acts as a great way to emphasize something.
Consider using onomatopoeia strategically and sparingly to make a bold or memorable statement.
Key Term
onomatopoeia
A word that sounds like what it represents, such as “gurgle” or “hiss.”
Onomatopoeia
Onomatopoeia is a word that imitates a sound.
The word “Slam.”
Onomatopoeia: What Is It?
Have you ever read an old Batman comic and seen action bubbles with words like “Boff! ” “Pow! ” and “Boom!”? These are all examples of onomatopoeia.
From the Greek, onomatopoeia is a combination of the words “I make” and “sound. ” At its most basic, onomatopoeia are words that represent the sounds they make. Whether it’s the woof of a dog or the wubwubwub of dub step, onomatopoeia captures that sound within a representational word. Many of these words have become a part of everyday language and you may not even realize you’re using onomatopoeia in the first place.
Why Use It?
Onomatopoeia can be a very effective and catchy stylistic choice to use in your speech. Since these words are representations of sound, they can often be jarring. They’re a great way to grab an audience’s attention when used in the right way. Some onomatopoeia are even part of common phrases and quotes, adding to the relatability of your speech:
Pow! Right in the kisser.
If it looks like a duck and quacks like a duck, it must be a duck.
Snap, crackle, pop! (Rice Krispies jingle)
How to Use Onomatopoeia
The key to using onomatopoeia is to use it sparingly. Because onomatopoeia can be jarring, you don’t want your speech to be so punctuated by it that it makes it hard to listen to as an audience member. Consider using onomatopoeia when you need to make a bold or memorable point with your audience, perhaps as even a form of verbal punctuation. Onomatopoeia, like other styles of descriptive language, can help paint a visual – and aural – picture in the minds of your audience.
11.4.5: Personification
Personification can refer to speaking as another person or thing, or assigning human qualities to a non-human animal, object or idea.
Learning Objective
Identify the the different uses of personification in public speaking
Key Points
Personification adds a colorful way to describe complex ideas to your audience.
When using prosopopoeia, your audience will project their reaction on that which you’re trying to be and not on you as the speaker.
Speaking as another person or idea is helpful to deflect negative response to the words you’re saying, but because you’re saying them as someone else, the audience is less likely to blame you for your words.
Key Terms
prosopopoeia
A prosopopoeia (Greek: π) is a rhetorical device in which a speaker or writer communicates to the audience by speaking as another person or object.
personification
A figure of speech, prosopopeia, in which an inanimate object or an abstraction is given human qualities.
Personification
Anthropomorphism is a form of personification. It associates human qualities and characteristics with non-human animals.
A picture of Donald Duck.
Personification: What Is It?
Personification is a rhetorical device where a speaker speaks as another person or object (in a style known as prosopopoeia). It can also refer to the assignment of human characteristics and qualities to non-human animals, inanimate objects or abstract ideas. A simple way to think about personification is to consider the characters of some of your favorite Saturday morning cartoons: Donald Duck, Mickey and Minnie Mouse, or the Teenage Mutant Ninja Turtles. As a form of hyperbole, we know these animals can’t speak English, go on madcap adventures in Disney World or use martial arts to right crime. But their personification makes them more human to us.
Why Use It?
In addition to being an artful form of speaking, personification can be used to more vividly make your point. Personification is a way of using storytelling to craft your speech by personifying complex or abstract ideas or thoughts. Your audience may better understand a complex subject when you give it human qualities and characteristics.
How to Use Personification
There are two ways to approach personification: to speak as another person to make a point or to personify an inanimate object, animal or abstract thought. In the former case, when you speak as someone or something else, your audience will project their reaction on that which you’re trying to be and not on you as the speaker. This is helpful to deflect negative response to the words you’re saying, but because you’re saying them as someone else, the audience is less likely to blame you for your words.
An example of speaking as something else is when President Abraham Lincoln constructs a mock debate between Republicans and the South, emerging as the spokesman for the Republican party:
“You charge that we stir up insurrections among your slaves. We deny it; and what is your proof? Harper’s Ferry! John Brown!! John Brown was no Republican; and you have failed to implicate a single Republican in his Harper’s Ferry enterprise. If any member of our party is guilty in that matter, you know it or you do not know it. If you do know it, you are inexcusable for not designating the man and proving the fact. If you do not know it, you are inexcusable for asserting it, and especially for persisting in the assertion after you have tried and failed to make the proof. You need to be told that persisting in a charge which one does not know to be true, is simply malicious slander. ” – Abraham Lincoln, Cooper Union Address
In the second instance, assigning human qualities to an object or idea also helps deflect negativity while bolstering the strength of your words and ideas. A particularly stark example of this could be seen at the 2012 Republican National Convention, when actor Clint Eastwood physically addressed and spoke to an empty chair representing President Barack Obama as if he were sitting there:
“So I — so I’ve got Mr. Obama sitting here. And he’s — I was going to ask him a couple of questions. So, Mr. President, how do you handle promises that you have made when you were running for election, and how do you handle them? ” – Clint Eastwood, Republican National Convention speech
11.4.6: Repetition and Parallelism
Repetition and parallelism can add clarity and dramatic punch to your speech.
Learning Objective
Distinguish between the use of repetition and parallelism in speech
Key Points
Repetition should be used sparingly and strategically. Pick your most influential statement and weave its repetition throughout your speech.
Use parallelism to use similar constructs to approach the same sentence. Add balance and break up repetition by adding parallelism to further emphasize your ideas.
You may decide to use repetition and parallelism to drive home the most important takeaway messages from your speech.
Key Terms
Parallelism
the juxtaposition of two or more identical or equivalent syntactic constructions, especially those expressing the same sentiment with slight modifications, introduced for rhetorical effect.
repetition
the act or an instance of repeating or being repeated.
Repetition and Parallelism
Repetition and parallelism of ideas and concepts can really emphasize the point of a speech to an audience, while establishing balance in the argument.
A picture of a man and woman talking while sitting next to a statue.
Repetition & Parallelism: What Are They?
When you repeat similar ideas or themes in your speech, you are using repetition as a stylistic choice. Similarly, parallelism is a structured use of repetition by using identical or equivalent constructions in corresponding clauses to express the same sentiment.
Why Use Them?
Parallelism is an especially effective technique to provide structure, order, and balance in your speech, in addition to clarifying your argument. Repetition also helps emphasize your point to your directly to your audience. The audience is more likely to remember something that has been repeated. Parallelism works the same way but without rote repetition of words or ideas and instead constructs them from similar examples.
How to Use Repetition and Parallelism
Repetition is fine in small doses, but you don’t want to sound like a broken record. Consider using repetition of the same phrase or words only for those statements that you would like to be the most memorable and influential and weave them throughout your speech. You can also use them in close proximity for an especially dramatic effect. For example:
“Even though large tracts of Europe and many old and famous States have fallen or may fall into the grip of the Gestapo and all the odious apparatus of Nazi rule, we shall not flag or fail. We shall go on to the end,we shall fight in France, we shall fight on the seas and oceans, we shall fight with growing confidence and growing strength in the air, we shall defend our Island, whatever the cost may be, we shall fight on the beaches, we shall fight on the landing grounds, we shall fight in the fields and in the streets, we shall fight in the hills; we shall never surrender. ” – Winston Churchill
Parallelism is a very effective way to break up your use of repetition by laying out many different ways of expressing the same thought or idea. See below how parallelism was used in these two speakers:
“Let every nation know, whether it wishes us well or ill, that we shall pay any price, bear any burden, meet any hardship, support any friend, oppose any foe to assure the survival and the success of liberty. ” – John F. Kennedy
“Today’s students can put dope in their veins or hope in their brains. If they can conceive it and believe it, they can achieve it. They must know it is not their aptitude but their attitude that will determine their altitude. ” – Reverend Jesse Jackson
11.4.7: Simile and Metaphor
Simile and metaphor are creative ways of making comparisons in your speech.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between the use of a simile and metaphor in public speaking
Key Points
Similes and metaphors are composed of two parts: a tenor and a vehicle. A tenor is the subject that is being compared or described; the vehicle is the comparison used to describe the subject.
Both similes and metaphors use tenors and vehicles, the only difference being that similes connect the two with the words “like” or “as” while a metaphor simply states a tenor is a vehicle.
Similes and metaphors are wonderful ways to bring your creativity and style to your speech.
Key Terms
simile
A figure of speech in which one thing is compared to another, in the case of English generally using like or as.
metaphor
The use of a word or phrase to refer to something that it isn’t, invoking a direct similarity between the word or phrase used and the thing described, but without the words like or as, which would imply a simile.
Metaphor
Using descriptive language adds variety and creativity to your speech.
Simile & Metaphor: What Are They?
Similes and metaphors are forms of descriptive language that make comparisons. Similes make their comparisons by using the words “like” or “as” while metaphors directly state what something is.
Why Use Them?
Simile and metaphor are artful ways of speaking to make a comparison. With simile and metaphor, you can paint pictures in the minds of your audience members. They make for more engaging and compelling ways of describing something, which means your audience is more likely to pay attention to what you have to say. Additionally, you have the chance to make bold stylistic choices in your speech through the construction of creative similes and metaphors.
How to Use Simile and Metaphor
Simile and metaphor are constructed of two parts: the tenor and the vehicle. The tenor refers to the subject itself, that which is being described. The vehicle is the comparison or description used to describe the subject. With simile, the tenor and vehicle are linked by the words “like” or “as” whereas metaphor simply states the tenor is the vehicle.
“All the world’s a stage, And all the men and women merely players; They have their exits and their entrances. ” William Shakespeare, As You Like It
In the example above, the tenor of Shakespeare’s line is the world. The vehicle of this metaphor is a stage, with an additional tenor of men and women represented by actors as a vehicle.
As you craft your speech, look for sections that could use vivd imagery; how do you want to make your words stand out in the minds of your audience? What picture do you want to paint with your words?
11.5: Understanding Bias in Language
11.5.1: Gender Bias
Gender bias exists because of the social construction and language of gender itself; recognize it and try to avoid it when speaking.
Learning Objective
Explain how gendered communication creates bias in public speaking
Key Points
Gender is the social construction and definition of what it means to be man, woman, masculine or feminine.
Gender expression and expectations of how gender should be expressed vary by culture.
Men and women have different expectations and perceptions of each other and thus will receive speakers of opposing genders differently. Additionally, gender bias still exists – for both speaker and audience – when speakers who may share the same gender as their audience.
Key Terms
bias
An inclination towards something; predisposition, partiality, prejudice, preference, predilection.
gender
The sociocultural phenomenon of dividing people into the categories of “male” and “female,” with each having associated clothing, roles, stereotypes, etc.
Gender Bias in Public Speaking
Gender Bias
The late Benazir Bhutto, former Prime Minister of Pakistan, faced gender and cultural bias in her two brief terms as a world leader.
Understanding Gender
Before we can start talking about gender bias, it’s first helpful to understand the concept of gender. Gender is not necessarily indicative of the sex organs with which we’re born. When you’re talking about the biological classification of “male” and “female” you’re referring to sex, not gender.
Gender is the social construction of a person’s sex. Gender refers to the social definition and cultural expectations of what it means to be “man” or “woman. ” Additionally, some people may identify with a gender different from their sex, often identifying instead as “transgendered. “
Gender is not something with which you are born; instead it is taught, learned and understood through social interaction and experience.
What is Gendered Communication?
At its heart, gender is learned by, defined and taught to us through language and communication. Gendered communication is often culturally constructed as well, meaning that what is considered masculine or feminine in one culture may not hold true in another. How people express their gender often relies on the cultural constructs of the society in which they live or identify. The same is said of how people expect certain gender roles to be expressed by others.
Recognizing and Avoiding Gender Bias in Public Speaking
Just as you want to be cognizant and aware of the cultural biases that exist between both you and your audience, you’ll want to be equally aware of how gender bias may factor into your speech. Know that when a woman gets up to speak in front of a group of men, she is instantly received differently than her male counterpart. In certain cultural contexts, men may be dismissive of a female speaker. Many times, female speakers have to adapt gendered mannerisms, language and stance of men in order to validate their authority as speaker.
It’s not exactly a cut and dry vice-versa situation, either. Women may be at ease with a female speaker, but they may also be more attentive to a male speaker, given that many cultures teach women to be attentive (subservient in the extreme) to men.
Taking a step back and considering what gender bias you bring to the table, as well as what gender biases your audience might have of you is an important step in eliminating or at least addressing gender bias in your speech.
11.5.2: Culture Bias
We all carry cultural biases, intentional or otherwise; try to find and address cultural bias within your speech.
Learning Objective
Describe how cultural bias can impact the delivery, rhetorical content and reception of a speech
Key Points
Cultural bias exists when you try to navigate the experiences of others through the framework of your personal compass of cultural experience.
Both you and your audience bring cultural bias to your speech: how you perceive and communicate with them and how they perceive and receive your words.
Cultural bias can impact mannerism, speech, and gesture as well as the rhetorical compenents of your speech.
Try to avoid cultural bias if you can and if you can’t, at least acknowledge it. Read your speech from a distanced perspective while considering the cultural context both you and your audience bring to the speech and how it will be received. This will only make your argument more robust.
Key Terms
Intercultural Communication
Intercultural communication is a form of global communication. It is used to describe the wide range of communication problems that naturally appear within an organization made up of individuals from different religious, social, ethnic, and educational backgrounds. Intercultural communication is sometimes used synonymously with cross-cultural communication. In this sense it seeks to understand how people from different countries and cultures act, communicate, and perceive the world around them.
bias
An inclination towards something; predisposition, partiality, prejudice, preference, predilection.
Example
In many Western cultures, we associate eye contact with assertiveness, attention, and honesty. However, in many cultures, including Asian, Latino, Native American and Middle Eastern, looking someone in the eye is actually a sign of disrespect. With regard to public speaking, looking at your audience is an integral part of delivering your speech. If your cultural context dictates that such eye contact is disrespectful, you may feel awkward about standing up in front of a crowd. Alternatively, if your audience falls into this context, know that your eye contact could be seen as intimidating or disrespectful.
Cultural Bias in Public Speaking
Understanding Intercultural Communication
Cultural Biases
To be effective speakers, we must recognize, acknowledge, and move beyond cultural biases.
Chinese Vice Premier Wang Qishan holds an autographed basketball given to him by President Obama. He and President Obama are talking as Chinese State Councilor Dai Bingguo looks on.
In a world of seven billion people, author David J. Smith reduced the world down to just 100 inhabitants. Of those 100, Smith breaks the world down into the following locales and languages:
61 are from Asia
13 are from Africa
12 are from Europe
8 are from South and Central America
5 are from the United States and Canada
1 is from Oceania
22 speak a Chinese dialect (18 speak Mandarin)
9 speak English
8 speak Hindi
7 speak Spanish
4 speak Arabic
4 speak Bengali
3 speak Portuguese
3 speak Russian
When reduced to such simple terms, Smith’s “global village” illustrates the wide swath of diversity among the people of our planet. How we communicated with one another in spite of and in support of our diverse backgrounds is at the heart of intercultural communication.
Our unique cultural backgrounds can be the proving ground for commonality. Unfortunately, more often than not our cultural backgrounds serve as reminders of the ways in which we differ from one another and that our bias can serve as barriers to communication.
What is Bias?
Bias is the state at which we all exist; that is, a non-neutral state of inclination, predilection, and prejudice. By the sheer virtue of differences in human experience, we each harbor bias in some way because we’re all bringing something a little different to the table.
What is Cultural Bias?
Cultural bias exists when you try to navigate the experiences of others through the framework of your personal compass of cultural experience. Your cultural experience inherently makes you biased against disimilar cultural experiences to your own. Remember, bias doesn’t necessarily mean exclusion, so bias can mean a preference for one culture over another. This cultural bias may exist in the form of affinity towards one culture or cultural experience over another or complete detachment from one cultural experience over another.
How Cultural Bias Impacts Your Speech
Cultural bias exists in two forms when speaking in public. There’s the cultural bias you bring to the podium. The other exists in the minds of your audience, as they bring cultural biases with them to the auditorium. Both can impact your speech.
This dissonance between these biases can affect the ways your audience receives you as a speaker, in both trustworthiness and reliability as subject matter expert. Additionally, your cultural bias may impact your mannerisms and speaking patterns as you deliver your speech.
From a rhetorical perspective, your cultural bias may impact the strength and comprehensiveness of your argument. If your cultural bias only allows you to see things in a certain cultural context, there may be parts of your argument that aren’t fully developed simply because you don’t have the cultural context to even realize that part of your argument was not fully formed.
To overcome cultural bias, take a step back from your speech. Consider the following questions as you attempt to recognize and address cultural bias in your speech:
What cultural context does your audience bring to your speech?
What is the race, ethnicity, nationality, and heritage of your audience?
What language barriers may exist?
What cultural context do you bring to the table?
What cultural biases might your audience have about you as speaker?
What is the cultural context of both your argument and supporting evidence?
Good organization is the key to effective communication because it helps make your ideas accessible to your audience.
Learning Objective
Explain how information, knowledge, and wisdom work together in a speech
Key Points
Public speakers can structure the audience’s experience through skillful organization. As you write your speech, decide what you want your audience to feel in the beginning, middle, and end of your speech.
An effective speech should balance information, knowledge, and wisdom.
Information is the foundation of knowledge; knowledge is the basis of wisdom.
Key Terms
wisdom
Wisdom refers to insight that is gained from knowledge. This category includes truth, opinion, and perception.
knowledge
Familiarity or understanding of a particular skill, branch of learning, etc.
information
The category of information includes facts, figures, and concepts taken from primary and secondary texts.
Why Does Organization Matter?
William Carlos Williams once said that a poem is a “machine made of words. ” A sad poem is a machine that manufactures melancholy; a funny poem is a machine that produces laughs. Poetry doesn’t have a monopoly on this quality–a well-crafted speech can also be a machine made of words. Skillfully constructed language has a powerful effect on its audience, and speechwriters should strive to harness that power. How should a public speaker go about building a “machine made of words”? It’s all in the organization. Machines only work when their component parts are assembled properly.
Organizing a Speech
A well-organized speech is like a well-oiled machine.
A picture of a Merlin steam engine.
When you are organizing your main points, ask yourself a few questions. What is your ultimate goal? Are you trying to inform the audience, persuade the audience, amuse the audience, or enrage the audience? Think about the experience you want to create for your listeners–how you want them to feel when you begin speaking, and how you want them to feel when you make your final statement. When you have a clear vision in mind, return to the “Ordering Main Points” segment and choose a model that fits your purpose.
For example, let’s say you are preparing a speech to solicit money for political dissidents in Chechnya, and you want to motivate your listeners by shocking them. If shock is the desired effect, it would be ineffective to spend ten minutes pontificating generally about the virtues of free speech without mentioning the specific abuse that the fundraiser addresses. It would be more effective to open with the story of an abused dissident who could benefit from the fundraiser’s efforts–a story that would show the audience how high the stakes are, and how donations could help.
Information, Knowledge, and Wisdom
Where is the Life we have lost in living?
Where is the wisdom we have lost in knowledge?
Where is the knowledge we have lost in information?
-T.S. Eliot
T.S. Eliot makes a good point: it is difficult to maintain a healthy balance of information, knowledge, and wisdom. When we write speeches, we mix material from the three main registers of meaning: information, knowledge, and wisdom. For our purposes, let’s define information as facts, figures, and concepts taken from primary and secondary texts. Knowledge is more general than information: it refers to the ideas that come from processing information, rather than the information itself. Knowledge is the synthesis of many facts. This category includes stories, principles, and contexts. Wisdom, the most general category of all, refers to insight that is gained from knowledge. Wisdom includes truth, opinion, and perception.
To put it in concrete terms, let’s look at the information/knowledge/wisdom breakdown in a speech about performance-enhancing drugs in sports:
Information: statistics about athletes’ steroid use
Knowledge: stories about athletes who take steroids
Wisdom: suggestions about ethics in sports
All three of these elements should work together. If your speech is too heavy on information and light on knowledge and wisdom, your message may get lost in the details. A speech that presents knowledge without information to support it or wisdom to justify it may seem pointless. “Wisdom” offered without information and knowledge to ground it in reality may come across as a vapid collection of clichés.
Good organization can prevent these problems. Balance information, knowledge, and wisdom as though you are building a house: lay a strong foundation of information, build knowledge on top of it, and finish the house with a roof of wisdom.
10.1.2: Critical Thinking
Learning how to think critically is a vital part of the organizational process of crafting an effective speech.
Learning Objective
Use critical thinking to craft an effective speech
Key Points
Critical thinking consists of intentional, reflective thinking about a given set of information and determining not only what to believe about that information but also how to act on it.
Critical thinking consists of the following six key processes and actions: clarifying goals, examining assumptions, discerning hidden values, evaluating evidence, accomplishing actions, and assessing conclusions.
You must utilize the many elements of critical thinking to pinpoint your goals and articulate compelling, relevant, accurate evidence in your speech. Additionally, critical thinking allows you to examine your thesis from opposing viewpoints, giving you further strategies to bolster your argument.
Key Term
critical thinking
he application of logical principles, rigorous standards of evidence, and careful reasoning to the analysis and discussion of claims, beliefs, and issues
Critical thinking consists of intentional, reflective thinking about a given set of information and determining not only what to believe about that information but also how to act on it. When you think of delivering a speech or a public address, you might not think that critical thinking plays a key role in the delivery of that speech. The key to a successful delivery lies in the speech’s logical structure and organization of thought. Critical thinking is an important part of that organizational process.
Speeches typically serve one of four basic purposes: to inform, to persuade, to demonstrate, or to entertain. Constructing your speech with an effective thesis or main point and evidence to support that thesis requires you as the speechwriter to use critical thinking to determine how you’ll make those points. Fully understanding the context of your speech is one of the most important elements of critical thinking in your speechwriting process.
Critical thinking consists of the following six key processes and actions:
Clarify goals
Examine assumptions
Discern hidden values
Evaluate evidence
Accomplish actions
Assess conclusions
In regards to public speaking, each of these is a process to undertake as you craft your speech.
Critical Thinking
Critical thinking is an important step in the process of writing an effective speech.
A picture of three students studying.
Clarifying Goals
Before you begin outlining your speech, consider exactly what you’re trying to accomplish. Are you trying to inform or instruct your audience on a particular subject? Do you seek to persuade them to feel a certain way about your topic? By considering your purpose for speaking, you can more clearly articulate your goals for the speech.
Examining Assumptions
As you pinpoint your thesis and main points, you’ll begin to outline exactly how you plan to support your argument. In order to present a clear and well-reasoned argument, you’ll need to make sure you have accurate and specific evidence to support your claims. By examining assumptions that may be made about your particular thesis, you can more clearly hone and refine the evidence you choose to present to bolster your case.
Discerning Hidden Values
Have you considered all the possible ways to present your main thesis and all the possible evidence you could include? Consider your thesis from opposing points of view. Using this critical thinking skill of discerning hidden values gives you a comprehensive way to approach your speech from all possible points of view.
Evaluating Evidence
Now that you know all the possible angles from which others can approach your line of reasoning, now it’s time to select the best evidence to support your thesis. By evaluating evidence with a critical eye, you’ll strengthen your argument by selecting the most compelling evidence to make your point.
Accomplishing Actions
Now that you’ve outlined your purpose, goals, and evidence, how exactly will you set out to accomplish those goals? Considering what actions you hope your speech will provoke will further guide you in the process of carefully selecting every word and sentence that brings you closer to realizing those goals.
Assessing Conclusions
Once you’ve written your speech, will your audience come to the same logical conclusion as you? Assessing the ways in which your audience will come to their own conclusions about your material will influence all the other pathways of critical thinking about your speech. You can then go back and tailor your evidence and content more appropriately so that your audience reaches the same conclusions you set out to present.
In sum, critical thinking is a vital part of the speechwriting and public-speaking process, a skill that you should work to develop in order to craft effective speeches.
10.1.3: Components of a Speech: Main Points, Introduction, Conclusion, and Transitions
A speech should have four components: the main points, introduction, conclusion, and transitions.
Learning Objective
Name the different components of a speech
Key Points
Composing a speech is different from writing an essay. Write with listeners in mind, not readers.
The bulk of a speech is different from the body of an essay. An essay is a careful, detailed scaffold that builds points over multiple pages, whereas a speech should stick to a few overarching points or themes.
Public speakers can emphasize transition points with visual aids, body language, vocal delivery, and transitional words and phrases.
Key Term
transition
The process of change from one form, state, style, or place to another.
Components of a Speech: Main Points, Introduction, Conclusion, and Transitions
A speech is more than simply an essay that is read aloud. Listening to a speaker is inherently different from reading a page, and public speakers should keep that difference in mind as they prepare their work.
A traditional academic essay consists of an introduction, a body with alternating concrete details and commentary, and a conclusion. The role of the introduction and conclusion are similar in speeches and essays, but the “body” is a different matter. Break free of the essay mindset, and try to think of a speech as the sum of four components: the main points, introduction, conclusion, and transitions. What’s the difference? Read on to see what is special about the components of a speech.
Main Points
Thinking of “main points” rather than a “body” can help speakers remember to keep it simple. A restless audience may not have patience for the predictable, orderly progression of concrete details and commentary that is typical in the body of an academic essay. Above all, communicate a few important points!
Introduction
The introduction should get the audience’s attention, describe the topic, state the thesis or purpose, and give an overview of the speech and its main points. Open with a detailed map of your speech–giving good directions in the beginning will save your audience from getting lost along the way.
Conclusion
The conclusion should summarize main points and state a strong thesis. Remember that many people struggle with auditory learning, and consequently have trouble focusing on spoken words. Your listeners may not put everything together on their own, so you should make it easier for them by summarizing your argument and reviewing central ideas in the conclusion.
Transitions
A transition is a change or shift from one topic to another. It may be surprising to see that transitions are one of the four key components of a speech. Academic writers tend to think of transitions as important stylistic elements rather than essential building blocks. However, transitions are crucial for public speakers, since speakers need to compensate for the loss of visual formatting. On a written page, formatting provides a helpful road map: the reader sees topic headings, paragraph breaks, and other visual cues that signal transitions naturally. Speakers can replicate these cues and signal transitions using visual aids and body language, but it will take more conscious effort than simply hitting “enter” to create a paragraph break. Speakers can emphasize transition points with visual aids, body language, vocal delivery, and transitional words and phrases.
Visual Aids for Transitions
Visual aids such as slides and handouts are a great way to guide the audience through your transitions. A slide or handout with topic headings printed on it is a good road map for a speech, preparing the audience for any twists and turns that may come up.
Transitioning Together
Effective transitions will help the audience follow your speech as it moves from topic to topic.
A picture of arrows all pointing in the same direction.
Transition Words and Phrases
These words and phrases signal a change, giving the audience a “heads up” about an upcoming transition:
Connecting:
additionally
also
again
moreover
furthermore
coupled with
for example
for instance
likewise
similarly
specifically
indeed
in fact
Contrasting:
however
although
but
nevertheless
on one hand
on the other hand
besides
yet
on the contrary
conversely
comparatively
Concluding:
overall
above all
therefore
thus
accordingly
consequently
in conclusion
finally
in essence
in other words
in short
10.1.4: Patterns of Organization: Informative, Persuasive, and Commemorative
The three main categories of speech are: informative, persuasive, and commemorative.
Learning Objective
Discuss the goals of informative, persuasive, and commemorative speeches
Key Points
When you begin organizing your speech, determine what your broader purpose is–to inform, persuade, or commemorate.
Keep the purpose of your speech in mind as you try different structural models.
Different structures are suited to different purposes, and you may have to experiment with a few models before you find the right one for your speech.
Key Terms
persuasive speech
A persuasive speech makes a convincing case for its position or viewpoint.
commemorative speech
A commemorative speech honors, celebrates, or remembers its subject.
informative speech
An informative speech educates the audience about its topic.
Patterns of Organization:
As you organize your main points, keep your “big picture” goal in mind. Are you trying to inform your listeners about an issue? Or trying to persuade them to share your opinion? Perhaps you are commemorating an event?
Different goals call for different narrative structures and you may need to try a few models before you find one that suits. To aid your trial-and-error process, refer to the list of structural models in the previous chapter for ideas. If you haven’t looked at these recently, it may be helpful to review “Ordering Main Points” before reading on. The following provides examples of some of these in action.
Informative
An informative speech should educate the audience about its topic. These speeches are not argumentative—they describe, announce, or explain their subject without making a case or taking sides.
Catering to the audience’s needs is important in any speech, but it is crucial in an informative speech. This type of speech relies on the value of the information itself, without the added appeal of a conversion experience or an emotional catharsis. Make sure your information will be useful and interesting to your audience!
Here are some sample topic statements that illustrate different approaches to framing an informative speech:
Cause and Effect
Consumers listed rising gas prices and falling prices for electric vehicles as the main reasons behind their new interest in electric cars.
Compare and Contrast
Studies have found major demographic differences between consumers who would consider buying electric cars and those who would not, but both groups still share the same concerns.
Categorical
Market research shows that consumers weigh three main issues when they consider buying an electric car: purchase price, convenience, and long-term cost savings.
Chronological
The market for electric cars has evolved significantly in the years between its invention in the late nineteenth century and the mass-production of electric cars today.
Biographical
Belgian inventor, Camille Jenatzy, combined solid engineering skills with a flair for publicity stunts to build a successful electric vehicle company in the 1890s.
Persuasive
A persuasive speech should make a convincing case for its position. While some are intended to win passive agreement from the audience, others encourage immediate action. For example, a speech arguing that drug-resistant bacteria strains are a serious problem seeks only passive agreement. However, if the speech went one step further and urged listeners to reduce their own consumption of antibiotics, it would belong to the second category.
If you want your audience to do something, end your speech with a call to action and explain how your listeners could help the cause.
These thesis statements about antibiotic-resistant bacteria illustrate different structural models for persuasive speaking:
Cause and Effect
The U.S. industry standard of giving daily antibiotics to healthy livestock promotes the creation of antibiotic-resistant bacteria.
Problem-Cause-Solution
Dangerous bacteria are adapting to resist antibiotics on under-regulated U.S. farms. The FDA should scrap its useless “voluntary guidelines” for agribusiness and impose legally-binding restrictions on the practice of feeding antibiotics to healthy animals.
Compare and Contrast
The European Union banned the routine feeding of antibiotics to livestock as part of its quest to fight antibiotic-resistant bacteria. Compared to the strict regulations in other industrialized nations, the U.S. policy of trusting agri-businesses to regulate themselves seems outdated and irresponsible.
Categorical
The case for legally-binding restrictions on agricultural consumption of antibiotics should be evaluated in terms of its costs, benefits, and practical feasibility.
Chronological
The European Union banned the practice of routinely feeding antibiotics to healthy livestock in 2004. Since then, calls for similar legislation in the U.S. have become increasingly urgent as new studies warn of public health risks from antibiotic-resistant bacteria.
Biographical
Dr. Marc Sprenger of the European Centre for Disease Control and Prevention draws on his experience as a doctor and epidemiologist to combat antibiotic-resistant bacteria.
Commemorative
A commemorative speech should honor, celebrate, or remember its subject. These sample statements of purpose memorialize different aspects of the Titanic:
Autographed Postcard
Three survivors of the Titanic, including Eva Hart, signed a postcard commemorating the tragedy.
Cause and Effect
The sinking of the Titanic inspired a new wave of maritime safety laws. My panel will discuss the life-saving provisions we owe to that tragedy.
Compare and Contrast
The passenger carrier Lusitania sank only three years after the Titanic and claimed nearly as many lives. However, the legend of the Titanic overshadows the Lusitania’s story. When I compare these two tragedies, I find myself asking—how different are they, really?
Categorical
Are we justified in our nostalgia for a bygone era of chivalry? Behavioral economists have taken one step toward answering this question, using data from the Titanic and the Lusitania to study social norms in disaster responses. How many men actually gave up lifeboat seats to women and children? I will address these questions by analyzing the effects of age, gender, ticket class, and family structure on an individual’s chance of surviving one of these disasters.
Chronological
After the Titanic sank in 1912, the White Star Line spent four years in arbitration before reaching a deal to cover 16 million in legal claims with a settlement of 664,000. Let’s give that controversial legal battle a retrial from beginning to end to see if the settlement is actually a fair outcome.
Biographical
Tonight, we are gathered to celebrate Eva Hart, who was only seven years old when she sat on a lifeboat watching the Titanic sink into the sea with her father on board. The experience left her with terrible nightmares, but she overcame her fears and lived a full life as a singer, politician, and magistrate.
While informative speeches explain, educate and describe; persuasive speeches raise the stakes by using information to influence the audience; commemorative speeches assume a shared emotional connection to the subject.
10.1.5: Building a Speech: Starting with an Outline
The process of creating an outline can help speechwriters organize their main points and evidence.
Learning Objective
Describe the process and methods for creating a speech outline
Key Points
If you are having trouble writing your outline, try brainstorming first.
A topic outline, or a general list of topics, evidence, quotes, and other details, is a good way to organize your main points and create a general overview of the speech.
If you want to make an outline that includes text from the actual speech, write a sentence outline.
Key Terms
sentence outline
A sentence outline expresses the central ideas of a speech in complete sentences.
topic outline
A topic outline is a hierarchical list of a speech’s main points. Topic outlines use keywords and short phrases rather than complete sentences.
outline
A list used to present the main points or topics of a given subject, often used as a rough draft or summary of the content of a document.
Building a Speech: Starting with an Outline
It is always a good idea to make an outline before you begin writing a speech. An outline is a structural plan that lists main points, summarizes claims, and serves as a guide for the writing process. Working from an outline can help you organize your speech and put supporting elements, such as definitions and supporting evidence, in order. Some outlines are minimal, providing a quick sketch of a speech’s main points. Other outlines are very detailed, filling in a skeleton of topic headings with topic sentences, pieces of evidence, and transitions.
Many students are familiar with outlining techniques from academic writing classes. Outlining a speech is similar, but there is one key difference: speechwriters can use the outlining process to create prompts to aid with delivering the speech. Some speakers like to use handwritten notes, others use cue-cards, still others read from a printed script, and some experienced speakers don’t use any prompts at all. Ideally, with practice, you will avoid reading a script word-for-word—burying your face in papers for the entirety of the speech will limit your ability to engage the audience. However, minimal prompts such as cue cards and outline-style notes may help you stay on topic and remember main points. Whether or not you plan to use prompts, creating an outline is a great way to refine your argument—and you can always ignore it once you begin writing.
Brainstorming
Many speakers like to brainstorm before making an outline. Brainstorming, which involves techniques such as creating “idea maps” or flowcharts that connect ideas and evidence, is less formal and structured than outlining. It is a great place to begin if you’re having a hard time settling on a definite plan for your speech.
Topic Outline
A topic outline is a hierarchical list of a speech’s main points. Topic outlines tend to use keywords and short phrases rather than complete sentences. A topic outline is fragmentary—it serves as a prompt, rather than a draft of material to use in the actual speech.
Creating an Outline
This outline provides a general overview of the structure of a science presentation.
An outline for a scientific presentation (background, introduction, literature review, experiment, tool, best practices strategy, and conclusion).
Sentence Outline
A sentence outline expresses the central ideas of a speech in complete sentences. Sentence outlines are more detailed than topic outlines, but less detailed than first drafts.
10.2: Main Points
10.2.1: Choosing the Main Points
The needs, interests, and expertise of the audience should be the central consideration in choosing main points.
Learning Objective
Demonstrate a variety of methods to help you choose your main points based on your audience and the purpose of your speech
Key Points
If you are speaking to a homogeneous audience, research the particular interests of that group and tailor your speech to meet their needs.
If you are speaking to a heterogeneous audience, try to find points that will interest each segment of your audience, and also a common purpose to unify diverse elements.
As you choose your main points, ask yourself what is at stake for the audience. Why should that particular group of people care about your topic? How will it affect them?
Key Terms
Homogeneous
Having the same composition throughout; of uniform make-up.
heterogeneous
Diverse in kind or nature; composed of diverse parts.
Choosing Main Points
When you are preparing a speech, it is important to establish a clear focus from the beginning. How should you narrow your focus and choose your main points? Follow the first commandment of public speaking: Know Thy Audience.
Focus on the Audience
According to a Greek philosopher named Epictetus, “We have two ears and one mouth so that we can listen twice as much as we speak. ” Epictetus’s wisdom applies to public speaking: listening to the audience is twice as important as speaking to the audience. Find out what your audience members already know about your topic, what they want to learn, and why it is important to them. If you focus on information that is obvious, irrelevant, or incomprehensible to them, you may find yourself speaking to a room full of yawns, cell phones, and backs walking out of your talk. However, if you research the demographics of your audience, you may avoid some common last-minute dilemmas: “Do I need to define this term? ” “Will this anecdote offend anyone? ” “Will anyone care about what I’m saying? “
Consider the Audience
In order to create an effective speech, the speaker needs to take the specific audience into account.
An audience waiting to hear Canadian politician Justin Trudeau speak at the University of Waterloo’s Humanities Theater.
Of course, some groups are easier to figure out than others. Let’s say you are speaking at a professional development conference for paralegals. In that case, the attendees share a common purpose, which makes it easier to address their specific needs. You could look at sources such as professional journals and conference bulletins from previous years to see what issues are important to ambitious paralegals. If, on the other hand, you are speaking at a high school graduation ceremony, the audience may include a wide range of people with very little in common except the ceremony itself. In that case, your main points could focus on graduation, the one thing that binds everyone together.
Before you choose your main points, answer these questions about the audience:
What does the audience know about my topic?
Is the audience homogenous or heterogeneous?
How does this topic relate to the audience?
Why is this topic important to the audience?
What is at stake for the audience?
What does the audience want to learn about my topic?
How can I show the audience that my main points are relevant and useful?
Homogeneous and Heterogeneous Audiences
A homogeneous audience is a group of people who share a consistent level of interest and expertise in your topic. A heterogeneous audience includes people with different levels of expertise and interest in your topic. It is important to determine what type of audience you have, and plan your speech accordingly. If you are writing a toast for your best friend’s wedding, you already know what your listeners want: they are gathered to celebrate the happy couple, and your toast should help them do that. On the other hand, if you are presenting scientific research to a mixed audience of academics and wealthy donors, you need to navigate a varied set of interests, agendas, and levels of knowledge as you select your main points. If there are non-experts in the audience, it is important to provide background information and define key terms. For a heterogeneous audience, you should make points that appeal to different segments of the audience, but also try to identify points that will unite your listeners under a common cause.
If you are addressing a homogeneous group, don’t take their interest for granted. It’s not a free pass–a homogeneous audience is not a captive audience. For example, if you are presenting research on business ethics to a group of specialists in your field, make sure to include points that might be applicable to their research.
The Stakes
How does your topic relate to your listeners, why should they care about it, and what is at stake for them? The answers to these questions will be your best guide in choosing main points. If you want to hold your audience’s attention, your speech needs to answer these questions as early as possible.
The Innovation
What are you adding to the existing conversation about your topic? What can your speech offer that the audience won’t find elsewhere? If you want to hold your audience’s attention, make a case for the comparative advantage of your perspective.
The Purpose
Most speeches aim to do one of three things: to inform, to persuade, or to commemorate. Choose main points that will fulfill your speech’s overall purpose:
For an informative speech, provide a foundation of relevant information and then present knowledge and wisdom that will be useful to your audience.
A persuasive speech assumes that your audience already has preconceptions about your topic. Address these preconceptions, and then introduce points that prove the value of your position.
A commemorative speech usually compiles stories and wisdom that will help the audience honor, remember, or celebrate something.
Remember the broad purpose of your speech–to inform, to persuade, or to commemorate–as you choose your main points.
10.2.2: Ordering the Main Points
There are 9 different ways to organize your speech and the type of speech can help you decide which one is best to use.
Learning Objective
List ways to organize the main points of your speech
Key Points
When ordering main points, the speaker should consider the audience and find a way to make sure the points are arranged to help retention and clarity.
Try to limit a speech to 3 or 4 main points with supporting sub-points to make sure the audience is not overwhelmed with too much information.
Each of the main points would require additional support and evidence in a speech and are identified only to aid the conceptualization of the organizational forms.
Asking someone to listen to the speech can help make sure that the main points flow well and are in a order that will help maximize understanding for the audience.
Key Terms
sub points
A sub point has a direct, specific relation to its major point that you can make clear by the organizational method you choose.
chronological
In order of time from the earliest to the latest
Ordering Main Points
It is important to make sure that a speech flows properly to enhance understanding. When ordering main points, the speaker should consider the audience and find a way to make sure that the points are arranged to help retention and clarity .
Organizing the Main Points
Making sure the main points are ordered correctly helps the speech to flow better.
A man giving a speech and using his hands for emphasis.
How Many Main Points?
Try to keep main points down to three or four with supporting sub points. An audience will only be able to grasp so much information at one time and the presenter does not want to bombard the audience with too much information at once. Additionally, make sure that each of your main points are supported by the same number of subpoints or evidence. This adds balance and proportion to your speech.
Ways to Organize the Main Points of Body
The following are the 9 different ways to organize your speech, including examples to help you understand better. Each of the main points, of course, would require additional support and evidence in a speech and are identified only to aid the conceptualization of the organizational forms.
Temporal Organization
This is the chronological approach; it is good choice for when you are telling a story, explaining research, or outlining a future plan.
Cause-effect
Telling why something happened; cause-effect may be used for past, present, or future events and processes. Cause-effect can also be reversed, from effect back to cause.
Example: What causes something to happen, and the result (effect) of the occurrence.
Spatial Patterns
When using spatial patterns, be sure to proceed systematically from one place to the next, following a clear order. A size sequence is a variation on spatial organization, describing different artifacts from smallest to largest (or from largest to smallest). This is useful when describing something, especially a progression through a place/time or a physical object.
Example: First you enter here, then you go through there, and you end up…
Topical
Topical is an appropriate approach when the subject matter has clear categories of division.
Example: My Family: my dad, my mom, my brothers.
Importance Patterns
This can be used to discuss the different reasons for something and then designating their importance.
Example: If you were the President’s advisor, you may come to him/her with 3 problems, organizing each in the order of importance to the country.
Compare/Contrast
The compare/contrast takes two or more entities and draws attention to their differences and/or similarities.
Example: If you were comparing apples and oranges you could use this to better clarify and prove your argument.
Problem-Solution Organization
Problem-solution organization involves the identification of a problem followed by a possible solution.
Example: (1) Timmy does not have enough skittles (2) Ask Bobby to share.
Stock Issues
Stock issues are designed to organize presentations on issues of policy in a more complicated way than simple problem-solution. There are generally four main components to this organizational scheme:
a description of the current system (inherency, or the inherent flaws in the current system),
explanation of the harms that result from the current system (harms),
a program to address those harms (a plan of action),
reasons why the plan would be preferable to keeping the current system (solvency or why the plan would help the problem).
Monroe’s Motivated Sequence
This is good organizational tactic for persuasive speaking. It has 5 Components:
Gain audience attention
Show need for change
Provide an alternative
Benefits of the change
A call for action
10.2.3: Highlighting the Main Points
If you want your audience to follow your main points, you should highlight them using visual and textual cues.
Learning Objective
Give examples of ways to highlight the main points in your speech
Key Points
65% of Americans are primarily visual learners, while 30% work best with auditory learning and 5% thrive with kinesthetic (or hands-on, touch-based) learning. This puts public speakers at a disadvantage, since only 30% of Americans learn best by listening.
Public speakers should accept the reality of distractible audiences and take responsibility for getting the message across despite this challenge.
Public speakers can emphasize their main points using visual and textual cues.
Key Terms
textual cue
Textual cues are signals within the language of a speech: key words and phrases, examples, anecdotes, and selections of text that appear on a slide or handout.
visual cue
A visual cues is a signal the audience can see. Examples of visual cues include slides, handouts, charts, and also the speaker’s body language.
Highlighting Main Points
The scenario: your teacher is droning on and on, and your mind wanders…”Mmm, food. What’s in the fridge? Should I buy groceries after class? What could I make for dinner? ” When you snap back into focus, the teacher has just finished explaining a key concept. Nothing else makes sense without that piece of the puzzle, but you can’t just turn back a page or hit rewind, so you’re out of luck! We’ve all been there, right? This is an important lesson for public speakers: no matter what you do, audience members will zone out occasionally. In an ideal world, your listeners would cherish every word that comes out of your mouth, but in the real world, that’s not going to happen. It’s practically a law of nature, so you might as well accept it and plan accordingly: highlight your main points to help your audience catch the most important ideas.
Visual and Textual Cues
Public speakers can highlight important points using visual cues and textual cues. Visual cues are cues the audience can see, including aids such as slides, handouts, and charts, and also the speaker’s body language. Textual cues relate to the content of the speech: signal words and phrases, examples, anecdotes, and selections of text that appear on a slide or handout. Take responsibility for your message and use some of these tried and tested techniques to get your message across.
Highlighting Main Points
Public speakers can use visual aids and textual cues to highlight their main points.
Four highlighters with marks on a piece of paper.
Highlighting with Visual and Textual Cues
Some studies estimate that 65% of Americans are primarily visual learners, while 30% work best with auditory learning and 5% thrive with kinesthetic (or hands-on, touch-based) learning. This puts public speakers at a disadvantage, since only 30% of Americans learn best by listening. Fortunately, speakers can use visual cues to make their words “stick. ” For examples of visual cues, just look at the page you are reading right now. Important points are highlighted with topic headings in large typeface, bold font, italics, bulleted lists, banks of key terms, etcetera: the visual presentation of a printed page functions as a guide for the reader. For a speech, the rules are a little bit different. To highlight key terms and new topic headings, a speaker can create slides or handouts that outline the speech’s main points. To convey the effect of italics or bold print, a speaker has to rely on tone of voice rather than visual cues. To combine visual and kinesthetic learning, speakers can poll the audience and ask them to raise their hands and look around the room to see the results. Here are several techniques for using visual aids such as slides, handouts, or posters to enhance your presentation:
Highlighting with Graphics
Graphics such as charts and pictures can make a presentation more engaging by illustrating the main points. If you support your claims with numbers, visual aids such as charts, graphs, and models would help your audience understand the figures easier and faster. If your speech describes people, places, or objects, pictures of those subjects would make your presentation more vivid and interesting.
Highlighting with Text
Visual aids such as slides, handouts, and posters are excellent ways to highlight key phrases, definitions, quotes, and lists. Spoken words can evaporate as soon as they leave your mouth, but written words stay in place–they’re not going anywhere. Try to put your most important points in concrete form. For example, a slide show that lists important definitions allows the audience to copy the definitions exactly as they appear, refer back to them, and make mental notes of the most important terms. When you make an outline of your speech, keep the question of visual aids in mind. You can save time with an outline that converts easily into visual aids: remember this when you choose subject headings, definitions, quotes, and key phrases.
Highlighting with Signal Words and Phrases
Signal words and phrases are designed to command attention. These verbal road signs have many uses, one of which is to highlight important points. Here are some examples of signal words and phrases that will alert your audience to pay attention: important, noteworthy, crucial, vital, major, principal, primary, central, valuable, defining, distinctive, relevant, above all, in the end
Highlighting with Examples
Precept is instruction written in the sand. The tide flows over it, and the record is lost. Example is graven on the rock, and the lesson is not soon lost.
-William Ellery Channing
Instructions, rules, and descriptions are all great, but if you want to make a concept stick, support it with an example. Different types of examples include facts, figures, data, illustrations, anecdotes, and quotes. As an illustration, compare the following two versions of the same point:
Many Americans struggle with debt. For this reason, affordable health care is an important priority for our country.
Anne Smith is one of the forty-six million Americans who live below the poverty line today. Last week, Anne arrived at the emergency room of Lutheran General Hospital unconscious and seriously injured after a drunk driver hit her and left her half dead. Anne survived, thanks to the hard-working EMTs at Lutheran General, but she woke up the next morning with $120,000 in medical bills. A health care system that cripples its patients with debt is not consistent with a healthy economy: Americans like Anne deserve better.
The second version combines facts, figures, and an anecdote to convey the human impact of the situation along with its broader significance. That is the power of example in action.
10.3: Introduction
10.3.1: The Role of the Introduction
The introduction should convince the audience that your speech will be relevant and useful by providing a general overview of what’s to come.
Learning Objective
Use the introduction of your speech to convince your audience that you have something worthwhile to say
Key Points
The introduction is a sales pitch and a useful outline in one, so it should maintain a good balance of hype and content.
The introduction has five important responsibilities: get the audience’s attention, introduce the topic, explain its relevance to the audience, state a thesis or purpose, and outline the main points.
By the end of the introduction, you should provide a road map that outlines your main points.
Key Term
introduction
A means of presenting one person to another.
Role of the Introduction
The introduction is the best opportunity to convince your audience that you have something worthwhile to say. An introduction can accomplish this by fulfilling five important responsibilities: get the audience’s attention, introduce the topic, explain its relevance to the audience, state a thesis or purpose, and outline the main points. By the end of the introduction, the audience should know where you’re headed and what your speech will cover. If you are giving a persuasive speech, state your thesis in the introduction. If you are giving an informative speech, explain what you will be teaching the audience.
Speech Introduction
The introduction grabs the audience’s attention and sets the tone for the entire speech.
Two speakers are standing in front of a podium during the MIT Energy Innovation Panel.
As you write your introduction, try to answer these questions:
What is the scope of your presentation–how narrow or broad is your topic? How does it relate to the audience? What is at stake for the audience? Do you have any new insights or special perspectives to add to the existing discussion of your topic? Why should the audience listen to you instead of someone else? Will you be informing the audience, or making an argument?
The Road Map
By the end of the introduction, you should provide a brief overview of your main points. This “road map” will help the audience understand the main points in the context of your larger purpose. Without a good map to follow, the audience is liable to get lost along the way. A good introduction is the best way to make sure your message gets through.
In sum, the introduction should:
Hook the audience.
Describe your topic.
Explain how your topic is relevant to the audience.
Explain the stakes at hand.
Establish credibility: What authority do you have to discuss this topic?
State your innovation: What is new or special about your perspective?
Lay out a road map of your speech.
Outline your main points.
State your thesis or purpose.
Writing the Introduction
If you have an anecdote, quote, question, or some other “hook” that inspires you to start writing the introduction, go for it. Don’t take inspiration for granted! In some cases, the right story will set up a natural sequence for your main points, launching the speech effortlessly. Otherwise, it may be easier to begin the introduction after you write about your main points. Working through the main points will set the destination of the speech, and it doesn’t hurt to have a clear idea of where you’re going before you set out. If you finish writing the body of your speech and come back to the introduction uninspired, refer to the chapter, “Getting Attention and Interest” for more ideas about effective openings.
10.3.2: Getting Attention and Interest
In order to win the audience’s attention and interest, write a dynamite opening and then give a quick overview of your speech.
Learning Objective
Give examples of ways to hook your audience’s attention with the first words of your speech
Key Points
The opening of a speech is the most important time to get the audience’s attention and generate interest.
One way to grab the audience’s attention is to begin with something surprising, shocking, or controversial.
If a subdued approach is more appropriate, try opening with a question. In academic contexts, it may be best to start by situating your talk within the existing conversation.
Key Term
anecdote
An account or story which supports an argument, but which is not supported by scientific or statistical analysis.
Getting Attention and Interest
Public speaking is essentially the art of convincing an audience to listen to you against all odds. How can you pry your listeners away from their day-to-day concerns? What would make you the most interesting person in their lives—at least until you finish your speech? You need to act fast, since first impressions tend to overshadow all other impressions. The opening of your speech will determine the audience’s willingness to listen. Learn how to deliver a dynamite opening, and you can make that fact work in your favor.
Attracting Interest
Getting the audience’s attention is like showing someone a wrapped present. It should peak their interest.
A woman holds a small present in her hands.
Strategies for the Opening
Here are eight ways to open a speech with panache:
1. Make a provocative or controversial statement. You can back down from an extreme position later, but controversy is an effective way to capture the audience’s attention.
Example: The United States should control its population growth by imposing fines on parents who have more than one child.
2. State a surprising or little-known fact.
Example: Did you know that eating blueberries can actually make you smarter by boosting neurotransmitters in your brain?
3. Open with a quote. If you can’t think of an attention-grabbing sentence yourself, get some outside assistance (with proper attribution, of course).
Example: Oscar Wilde once said, “Always forgive your enemies; nothing annoys them so much.”
4. Open with a brief anecdote.
Example: I was driving home from work on a cold, rainy day when I saw a scrawny cat by the side of the road. Her ribs were sticking out under her filthy, matted fur; she was clearly starving. I made the split-second decision to find a home for this cat, pulled over, lifted her up into the passenger seat, and began a journey that would change my life in ways I never could have imagined.
5. Make a case for your topic’s relevance to the reader.
Example: Genetically modified foods are filling grocery stores all over the country; they are unavoidable at this point. If you’ve eaten something today, you’ve eaten something genetically modified today.
6. Take a stand against something. Don’t attack a “straw man,” or a vague, made-up antagonist—be specific.
Example: The hazing rituals of this university’s fraternities and sororities are getting worse, not better.
7. Stake a position for yourself within an ongoing debate.
Example: Corporate culture is evolving toward workspaces that encourage collaboration, such as open floor plans and inviting communal areas. Our company has resisted that trend. We still have an old-school lineup of offices with closed doors surrounding a honeycomb of high-walled cubicles, and guess what—the employees never mingle! I believe it is time to give the new workplace order a chance.
8. State a question.
Example: When was the last time you donated money to charity?
Repetition
Repetition is boring, right? Who wants to hear the same thing more than once? Actually, experienced public speakers learn that repetition doesn’t have to be redundant—there’s more to it than saying the same thing twice. In this culture of distraction, choosing an anchoring word, phrase, or idea and returning to it periodically throughout your speech can help the audience find the connection between different points. Think about how it feels to listen to a good song: each verse builds the story with new lyrics, and then the chorus comes back to ground the song and bring it back home.
Finding Inspiration
If you get stuck, look to other speakers for inspiration. If you search video hosting sites such as YouTube and Vimeo for speeches, you can watch seasoned public speakers dealing with the very same problems you’re facing. Decide for yourself what works and what falls flat.
10.3.3: Establishing Credibility
To establish credibility, public speakers should earn the audience’s trust and respect by presenting themselves as authorities on the topic.
Learning Objective
Illustrate how to establish credibility and authority with your audience, even if they start out skeptical
Key Points
Don’t rely on the content of your speech to gain credibility with the audience. Self-presentation is important too, since the audience will start judging you before you begin speaking.
Establish your authority to speak about your topic by stating the source of your knowledge: experience, training, or research.
When you speak to a skeptical audiences, begin by finding common ground. Acknowledge the appeal of opposing perspectives before you make a strong case for your own opinion.
Key Term
credibility
The objective and subjective components of the believability of a source or message.
Establishing Credibility
In the realm of public speaking, the message is inseparable from the messenger. If audiences don’t trust you, they won’t listen to you. Unfortunately, their trust is based on superficial, silly, and irrelevant factors in addition to legitimate concerns. First impressions are hard to overcome, and audiences will begin judging you before you even have a chance to introduce yourself. Preparing a good speech is not enough to gain the audience’s trust and respect–you also have to prepare yourself. Establishing credibility may seem like a daunting task. After all, different people are looking for different things. How could you possibly please them all? Fortunately, public speakers can rely on a set of general guidelines to establish credibility in a variety of situations.
Self-Presentation
Self-presentation is a crucial factor in a public speaker’s credibility. The following strategies can help speakers convince their listeners that they deserve trust and respect:
Dress the part. Find out how formal the occasion is and style yourself accordingly. Keep it simple: loud patterns, bright colors, flashy jewelry, and revealing styles may distract the audience from your message. When in doubt, err on the side of formal professional attire .
Look at the audience. Speakers who make eye contact with the audience appear more open, trustworthy, and confident. Even if you are reading from a script or consulting cue cards, look up frequently to maintain your connection with the audience.
Speak loudly, clearly, and confidently. Confidence is contagious–if you have confidence, the audience will catch it easily.
State your credentials. Trust is contagious too–audiences will trust you more readily if you can prove that other people value your expertise. Credentials include relevant degrees, certifications, testimonials, recommendations, work experience, volunteering experience, and informally, other types of personal experience.
Reveal a personal connection to your topic. What is at stake for you? How has the subject affected your life? If it is appropriate, share a personal anecdote that illustrates your relationship to the topic.
Establish common ground with your audience. What problems do you have in common? What goals do you have in common?
Professional Attire
A speaker can establish credibility by dressing professionally and making eye contact with the audience.
A man in a suit stands with his hands resting on a conference table.
Establishing Authority
Why should the audience listen to anything you have to say? The burden of proof is on you, so you need to make a case for the value of your experience, training, or research. Tell the audience how you became an authority on your topic. Don’t expect anyone to simply take your word for it, though: bring in outside sources to boost your credibility. Demonstrate that you are familiar with the conversations that surround your topic. Mention or quote other authorities on your topic to show that you are familiar with their contributions. Also, show your audience that you understand how your topic fits into a larger context. Look at the history of your issue and its treatment in other contexts or cultures. Winston Churchill’s maxim, “The farther backward you can look, the farther forward you are likely to see,” is a great case for the relationship between context and wisdom.
State the source of your authority: experience, training, or research
Refer to outside authorities
Put your perspective in context
Gaining Credibility with a Skeptical Audience
If you are speaking to a skeptical or hostile audience, begin by finding common ground. Appeal to shared beliefs and values, and identify a goal that you can all agree on. Refer to this shared goal throughout your speech to remind your audience that, ultimately, you want the same thing. Show skeptics that you are motivated by a sincere desire to find the best answer and that, as a result, you have carefully considered their perspective. You will lose credibility if you dismiss opposing views offhand. If you can demonstrate that you understand why opposing views are attractive, you will have more credibility when you make a case for your own position. If you fail to address common points of contention, your audience will have a perfect excuse to resist your argument. In sum:
Find common ground
Appeal to shared beliefs and values
Identify a shared goal
Return to this shared goal throughout the speech
Demonstrate that you have considered other perspectives on the issue
Show that you understand the appeal of opposing positions
Make a case for your position
Speaker at Social Media Art Camp
This woman knows her audience. She would have lost credibility dressed in a suit.
10.3.4: Introducing the Topic, Thesis, and Main Points
Provide an overview of your topic, thesis, and main points early on to show your listeners why they should be interested in your speech.
Learning Objective
Identify your topic, thesis, and main points early in your speech
Key Points
Describe the scope of your speech when you introduce your topic.
State your thesis or purpose clearly and with emphasis in one to three sentences.
Provide an overview of your main points before you launch into the body of the speech.
Key Terms
topic
Subject; theme; a category or general area of interest.
thesis
A concise summary of the argument or main points, usually one to three sentences long.
Introducing the Topic, Thesis, and Main Points
Public speakers should introduce a topic and state a thesis (or purpose) as soon as possible. After the attention-grabbing opening, there is only a small window of time in which to convince the audience that you have something useful to say.
Introducing the Topic and Thesis
Public speakers need to introduce the topic and state the thesis as soon as possible to keep the audience’s attention.
A woman speaking from a podium.
Introducing the Topic
Name your topic,
Explain the topic at a level that is appropriate for your audience,
Define key concepts,
Explain how the topic relates to your listeners and remind them of their stake in the matter.
Introducing the Thesis
Make your initial thesis statement (or the statement of purpose in an informative speech) short and sweet.
Remember: the thesis statement should summarize your argument in one to three sentences.
Introducing the Main Points
Before your introduction is finished, give the audience an overview of your main points. It may help to refer to your outline, which should provide a concise list of your main points, in order. Translate that list into complete sentences, and voila! You will have a good overview.
Example: Topic, Thesis, and Main Points
Vitamin D deficiency may be the hottest topic in nutrition today. Scientists are flooding academic journals, fashion magazines, and talk shows with arguments about all things D, ranging from sunscreen to supplements.
No one is disputing its importance: vitamin D helps with calcium absorption, promotes bone health, boosts immunity, and reduces inflammation. That is why recent studies estimating that 10 to 75 percent of Americans are deficient in vitamin D are so scary.
Hold on—10 to 75? That range is huge!
In order to discover the extent of the problem, we need to take a closer look at those numbers—and that is exactly what we will do in this presentation. I have prepared a chronological overview and analysis of methodologies for measuring vitamin D levels in the U.S. population, beginning with a study conducted at this university.
Analysis
The opening of this speech names a topic (vitamin D deficiency), explains its importance, explains its relevance to the audience, and then states the purpose of the presentation—to investigate the improbably wide range of deficiency-rate estimates from different studies—and outlines the main points.
10.4: Conclusion
10.4.1: The Role of the Conclusion
The conclusion of a speech functions as a summary of the most important points so that the audience can best remember them.
Learning Objective
Define the role of a conclusion in a speech
Key Points
The end of your speech is going to be the audience’s lasting impression of everything you’ve said. Use your conclusion as an opportunity to remind them of your main points.
Reiterating your introduction in your conclusion will bring the audience’s mind back to the overall purpose and message of your speech.
If you end your speech without some kind of lead-up or indication that you are about to do so, it can feel extremely abrupt and confusing to the audience. Make sure to give the audience closure with your ending.
Key Terms
reconcile
To make things compatible or consistent.
applicable
Suitable for application; relevant.
Summarizing a Speech
It’s important for public speakers to have a strong conclusion.
Bill Gates speaking on a stage.
The role of a conclusion in a speech is to signal to the audience that the speech is coming to a close and help them remember the most important points from the speech.
While this may sound unimportant or superfluous, if you do end your speech without indicating you are about to do so it can feel extremely abrupt and confusing to the audience. Make sure to give the audience closure with your ending.
It is important that you always tie your conclusion back to your introduction. This can most effectively be done by circling back to your “hook,” or attention grabber. The same ‘vehicle’ or theme, for example, an anecdote about Margaret Thatcher, is employed to conclude the speech as was used initially to introduce it. A clever closing line is common place and many strong speakers will simultaneously reference the theme discussed in the introduction and conclusion.
The end of your speech is going to form your audience’s lasting impression of everything you’ve said. This is why your conclusion is the perfect opportunity to secure the key elements of your speech in your audience’s mind. Make sure that you reiterate the thesis statement from your introduction, highlight the most important points from your speech, and then relate the concepts of the speech back to reality so your audience can see how it is applicable to their world.
By reiterating your introduction you bring the audience’s mind back to the overall purpose and message of your speech. By signally the end of your speech your ensure that your audience leaves with an overall positive impression of your speaking and does not feel confused. By highlighting the main points, you ensure they are fresh in your audience’s memory.
Think of your conclusion as an opportunity to summarize. While your speech is undoubtedly well organized, concise, and poignant it is still possible for listeners’ attentions to wander or for them to not fully understand a certain section of your speech. Your conclusion is the perfect place to reconcile any miscommunication with your audience.
10.4.2: Summarizing Ideas
Summaries succinctly communicate lengthy ideas; your conclusion is the perfect place to summarize the main points of your speech.
Learning Objective
List the best practices for summarizing ideas in the conclusion of a speech
Key Points
Three main areas of your speech should be summarized in your conclusion: your primary message, your main points, and what you want your audience to take away from your speech.
A summary should concisely revisit what you’ve just been speaking about in a way that is accessible for your audience.
Summaries should be lean, only including the most crucial information and ideas.
Your conclusion should be an overview of your speech. There is no need to elaborate or use examples, as this should have been done in the body of your speech.
Key Terms
concise
brief, yet including all important information
elaborate
(used with on when used with an object) To give further detail or explanation (about).
Summarizing Ideas
Your conclusion is the perfect place to summarize the main points of your speech. That way, when your audience leaves, the most important information from your speech will be fresh in their minds.
Summarizing means to succinctly communicate a complex or lengthy idea. In the context of your speech, it means concisely revisiting what you’ve just been speaking about in a way that is accessible for your audience. Summaries should be lean, only including the most crucial information and ideas.
Summarizing a Speech
Ask yourself one main question: What do you want the audience to remember?
Bill McKibben speaks at the Rochester Institute of Technology.
The best way to summarize ideas in your conclusion is to ask yourself the following important questions:
What is the primary message I want my speech to communicate?
What are the most important points of my speech that convey this message?
What do I want my audience to take away from my speech?
By asking yourself these three questions, you will be prepared to write and deliver a conclusion that effectively summarizes the most important ideas from your speech.
Primary Message
It is important to always keep your primary message in mind when preparing for a speech. Throughout the entire speech you must constantly relate your research, examples, analyses, etc. back to the message of your speech. Your conclusion is no exception.
It is important to reiterate the focus of your speech again in your conclusion. By summarizing the primary message of your speech you will refocus your audience’s mind back to the overall purpose of your speech and the reasons why they should care about what you are saying.
Main Points
After you readdress your primary message, it is then crucial to summarize your main points. You have just spent your entire speech speaking in depth about these points, so you’ll want to be sure that you are only summarizing them and not entirely rehashing them all over again. Remember, a summary must be concise and lean. Clearly list your main points and connect them back to the primary message of your speech. There is no need to elaborate on them again or use examples—this should have been done in the body.
Audience Take-Away
Thinking about what you want your audience to take away from your speech is necessary in order to write an effective conclusion. You must decide the intention of your speech: is meant solely for educational purposes, are you trying to convince your audience to take a certain action (such as give money or vote), or perhaps you are attempting to teach them a skill.
Whatever the answer may be, it is imperative that you make your final push toward this goal in your conclusion. You can easily summarize this idea in only a sentence or two. You can even address your audience directly using the 2nd person (“You”) to help implant the message in their memory. Using call to action verbs such as “go”, “do”, “vote”, “sign-up”, etc. can also motivate audiences to engage in action.
Whatever you decide you want your audience to take away from your speech, it is important that you reiterate this in the conclusion and that you focus on simply summarizing it and not stating your entire speech all over again.
10.4.3: Signaling the End of Your Speech and Managing Q&A
Signaling the end of your speech and managing a Q&A session afterwards are crucial steps to leaving your audience satisfied and informed.
Learning Objective
Discuss the best practices for ending speeches and managing Q&A sessions
Key Points
To signal the end of your speech, you can use concluding phrases and vary the tone of your voice to wind down your conclusion.
Managing Q&A sessions is an important skill and will help your audience gain more in-depth information that is relevant to them.
To successfully facilitate a Q&A session, it is important you are as knowledgeable about your topic as possible. If, however, you are asked a question that you cannot answer, it is crucial to stay calm and still answer professionally.
Key Terms
conclusion
The end, finish, close, or last part of something.
colloquial
Denoting a manner of speaking or writing that is characteristic of familiar conversation; informal.
Signaling the End and Managing Q&A
Part of a successful conclusion is easing your audience into the end of your speech. If you end to abruptly, your listeners may leave with a feeling of incomplete knowledge or hurriedness. You want to round out the end of your speech—like slowing down a car. You want your conclusion to lead to the end of your speech slowly and gently; you do not want to slam on the breaks .
Questions
Successfully answering questions at the end of your speech ensures that your audience has been pointed in the right direction.
A picture of a triangular street sign with a question mark on it.
Signaling the End of Your Speech
There are several ways you can indicate to your audience that you have reached the end of your speech. The easiest way is to directly tell them by using phrases at the beginning of your conclusion, such as, In closing, In conclusion, or Finally. This way, they are clearly aware you are coming to the close of your speech.
Another good way to indicate you are approaching the end is using a change in the tone of your voice. Humans naturally slow their speech and lower the tone of their voices at the end of a sentence or paragraph. By doing this, your audience will intuitively know that you are reaching the end of your conclusion.
Once you have successfully ended your speech, it is often appropriate to offer the audience a question and answer session, colloquially referred to as Q&A. In a Q&A session, you will allow your listeners to ask you specific and in-depth questions about your speech topic and then provide them with the appropriate answer.
Depending on the content of your speech, this could turn into a hostile or confusing exchange, so it is important to know how to manage a Q&A session.
Managing Q&A
The first and most important way to avoid any embarrassing moments during a Q&A session is to be very well versed and knowledgeable about your topic. There is nothing worse than being asked a very poignant question by an audience member and having absolutely not idea how to answer it.
While it is crucial to know as much about your topic as possible, it is impossible to know everything and even if you do your very best to prepare, there is always a chance you will be asked a question you cannot answer. If that ever happens, it is important not to panic. The best strategy is to have a handful of diplomatic phrases in your back pocket to save face. Some good ones include the following:
“I did not come across that in my research but I can find out and get back to you.”
“That’s a really good question and I’ve actually been wondering that myself. “
Since these are examples, you will want to word the phrases in your own style and according to your topic.
It is important to maintain control of the Q&A session. As the speaker, you are in charge of facilitating this interaction portion of your presentation. This means you must be aware of things like giving all audience members a chance to ask questions, not spending too much time on any one question, and not engaging in hostile rhetoric with your audience.
Finally, it is important to remember that while the conclusion is your audience’s final impression of your speech, a Q&A session will be the freshest in their minds. You want to do your best to be helpful and informative. Hopefully, audience members are asking questions because they are genuinely interested in the topic. It is your responsibility to engage them and do your best to help them attain the knowledge and answers they seek. The Q&A is still part of your presentation, so continue to present yourself as you did while you were speaking; do not become overly casual or revert to bad habits like breaking eye contact or speaking too quietly.
10.5: Transitions
10.5.1: The Role of Transitions
Transitions allow your audience to follow your presentation; they help maintain the flow of a speech.
Learning Objective
Indicate when transitions should be developed during the speech writing process
Key Points
Adding transitions may be the last step in building your presentation, but that does not minimize their importance.
A speech without transitions often seems choppy, and can even seem unorganized.
You can use transitions to signal that you are stressing a point that you have already made.
Key Terms
detour
A diversion or deviation from one’s original route.
transition
The process of change from one form, state, style, or place to another.
Role of Transitions
Introduction: Building Your Speech
Once you have established your goal and identified your target audience, you should take the following steps to construct your presentation.
Develop a general premise: constructing a presentation will require that you begin by developing your goal and translating it into a general premise you will state to your audience.
Generate main points and organize them strategically: after you have established a premise, you will be able to generate main points to support this claim. Be sure to coherently organize these main points so that the audience can easily follow your flow of ideas. A maximum of two to five main points will ensure clarity and timeliness. Keep main points separate (transitions separate ideas) and balance the time spent on each point.
Create an introduction and conclusion: after you have developed your main points, you will need to complete the introduction and conclusion. Create the introduction first—the conclusion really reiterates much of what was said in the introduction. The introduction opens the speech and is responsible for getting the audience’s attention, relating the topic to the audience, establishing the speaker’s credibility, and previewing the main points of the presentation.
Fill in transitions: Prior to delivering your presentation, your final step will be to develop transitions that lead your audience between parts of the presentation and between distinct, main ideas.
Take the final step, filling in transitions, seriously. Transitions play an important role in the success of your speech.
The Importance of Transitions
Imagine this scenario. You are driving, trying to get from point A to pont B. At the beginning of your trip, you see a sign telling you that you’re going in the right direction. But then you drive and you drive. The road winds. There are detours and forks in the road, but there are no more signs pointing you towards your destination. Are you going the right way? How did you get to this point anyway? What is happening? Where are the signs telling you that the road has changed and you should go this way instead of that way?
In speeches, transitions serve this purpose. Take the road example from above and apply it to your speech:
Members of your audience will do their best to follow you as you speak. However, your speech may take detours. It is bound to move from one subject to the other. Will your audience make the correct connections or get lost? There is also the chance that members of your audience will drift off and when they tune back in will wonder how you moved from talking about X talking about Y. They do not know how you got there .
Detour
Transitions help the audience follow your presentation even when you take a detour.
Proper transitions will not only eliminate such questions, but will also hopefully eliminate the situation in which members of your audience drift off. Transitions enable the flow of a speech. A speech without transitions often seems choppy, and can even seem unorganized. Using them allows your audience to follow your presentation. The words you use can lead them along, signal that you are moving from one point to another, or signal that you are stressing a point.
10.5.2: Types of Transitions
Various types of transactions include: transitional phrases, internal previews, internal summaries, and signposts.
Learning Objective
Differentiate between and give examples of transitional phrases, internal previews, internal summaries, and signposts
Key Points
Transitional phrases are words or phrases indicating that a speaker has finished one thought and is moving onto another one.
Internal previews cue the audience to listen for the key elements within major points of the speech.
Internal summaries review the key points a speaker just made.
Signposts are often the numerical indications of the main body points.
Key Term
transition
The process of change from one form, state, style, or place to another.
Example
Many speakers utilize “first, second, third” type numbering to as a signpost to indicate where they are in their speech.
Introduction
Transitions enable the flow of a speech. A speech without transitions often seems choppy, and can even seem disorganized. Many tools for transitions allow a speaker to reiterate the central ideas they are trying to express.
Types of Transitions
Transitional Phrase: A word or phrase that indicates when a speaker has finished one thought and is moving onto another one.
Options:
However;
But;
Nevertheless;
On the contrary;
Because;
And;
Lastly;
Yet;
On the other hand.
Example
In addition to being hilarious, The Office is also very entertaining. Consequently, there have been many people who try to imitate Dwight, but none can even come close.
Internal Previews
Internal previews are more detailed than simple transitional phrases, but serve a similar function. While the preview in the introduction discloses to the audience the general points to be made in the speech, the internal preview outlines the critical points to be made within the body of the speech.
Internal previews cue the audience to listen for the key elements within major points. Examples of internal previews include statements like “there are a couple of points I would like to make here,””there is both a problem and a solution to propose,” or “there are several items to note in this section. ” Each of these statements might be followed by more detailed, though brief, explanations of what is to come in the speech.
Examples
I will be focusing on two main points–Why Jim and Pam should get married, and why Michael Scott needs to get married.
Before I get started I would like to go over the three best episodes of The Office, which are “Diversity Day,” “Beach Day,” and lastly “Casino Night. “
Internal Summaries
Internal summaries, in contrast to internal previews, review the key points a speaker just made. These regular summaries help the audience to remember the key points just articulated by the speaker.
Examples of internal summaries include statements like “I have reviewed…,””Now that I have talked about a couple of the key points,” or “to summarize briefly what was just discussed…. ” Each of these statements would be followed by more specific but still brief summaries. Internal summaries reinforce the key issues in the speech.
Examples
I hope I have made it clear that The Office is the best show ever, because it is relevant to the audience, it makes fun of so many different people but still gets away with it, and it is just plain funny.
Signposts
Where Are We Going?
Transitions show the audience where you’re taking them.
A man and woman looking into the distance from a rooftop restaurant.
Signposts are often the numerical indications of the main body points. Many speakers utilize “first, second, third” type numbering to indicate where they are in their speech.
Signposts allow an audience to remember the key points and follow along in the speech. They serve to clearly distinguish main body points from each other and also from the introduction and conclusion. Signposts can also be used as questions.
Examples:
First I will discuss with you the importance of convincing everyone about the greatness of The Office.
To begin with, we must talk about how The Office came to be.
Why do you think The Office is the number one show today?
Transitions are so important to a speech. Without them, your audience may just think that you are rambling.
10.5.3: Using Transitions
When using transitions, pair them with body language to make them even more effective.
Learning Objective
Indicate when and how transitions should be used in public speaking
Key Points
You can use transitions along with hand movements to emphasize a point.
You can use transitions to indicate that you are going to talk about the past or the future and then add movement to physically take your audience there.
Transitions can also be used with facial expressions.
Key Terms
transition
The process of change from one form, state, style, or place to another.
body language
Body language is a form of mental and physical ability of human non-verbal communication. It consists of body posture, gestures, facial expressions, and eye movements. Humans send and interpret such signals almost entirely subconsciously.
Example
You may be talking about the present and then want to take your audience back to the past. In doing this, you might use the transition phrase, “let me take you back. ” As you say this, move slowly to the right or left to show that you are moving into the past.
Using Transitions
Introduction
Transitions go a long way in improving the quality of your speech. However, there is something that can make the quality of your transitions truly bring your speech alive: combining your transitions with body language. You may be surprised to learn that only 7% of the information you transmit to others is in the language you use. The remainder comes from the following:
38% is how you speak—the quality of voice, accent, voice projection, emphasis, expression, pace, volume, pitch, etc.
55% Body language—posture, position, eye contact, facial expression, head and body movements, gestures, touch, etc.
Armed with this information, it is easy to understand why body language can make your transitions even more attention-grabbing.
Using Transitions with Body Language
Transitions Paired with Hand and Arm Movements
You can probably think of many good speakers who have used a finger wag or other hand gesture to emphasize a point. President Kennedy did this quite a bit and so did Bill Clinton . Be careful, however. If there is a note of admonishment in your voice, try to avoid finger pointing because it will seem insulting. An open-palmed hand spread wide, as if in appeal, is far less confrontational and is there fore more likely to be seen as positive.
Emphasizing Transitions
President John F. Kennedy used body language to emphasize transitions.
Other hand or arm movements can be useful—even positive—if it is well-chosen and sparse. An animated speaker who punctuates every expression with hand or arm gestures can create a diversion or distraction. Used occasionally, however, movement adds weight and gravity to important points.
How would you use a transition with this movement? Perhaps you are explaining a strategy with similarities to something that was implemented in the past. You want to emphasize that the past errors must be avoided. To emphasize this point, you might say, “However, we must be careful to avoid repeating the mistakes of the past. ” As you say this you may use a hand gesture such as the finger wag or the open palmed gesture.
Transitions Paired with Walking Backwards or Forwards
When Steve Jobs gave a presentation, people listened. The buzz created around his product announcements and the announcements themselves had a lot to do with it, but so did his presentation style. He incorporated movement within his style. He didn’t just stand behind a podium and speak. He knew how to enhance his story using transitions by changing his position on the stage.
You can do the same. You may be talking about the present and then want to take your audience back to the past. In doing this, you may use the transition phrase, “let me take you back. ” As you say this, move slowly to the right or left to show that you are moving into the past. Moving forward in time? Move in the opposite direction. Moving back again? Move the same direction in which you previously moved.
You may have been talking about something positive and now need to talk about something negative. To do this, you might use the transition phrase, “Now I need to take you to a different place. ” As you say this, step backwards. Or try adding even more emphasis by stepping backwards and then diagonally. Both movements signal that you now moving into a negative aspect of your talk.
Have something positive to say? Step toward the front of the stage as you say your transitional phrase.
Transitions Paired with Other Movements
Remember that your head and face are your key expression amplifiers. With appropriate movement and expressions of the face you can add emphasis where needed.
An exaggerated eyebrow lift or the removal of eyeglasses at an appropriate moment can give the appearance of your own realization of the importance of the particular point being made. Expressing a negative point while shaking the head from side to side, or a positive point while nodding are standard devices for amplification. Use these movements along with your transitions.
Finally, remember to alter your tone as you deliver your transitions. Think of what transition delivery methods you can use as you write your transitions into your speech outline.
10.6: Outlining
10.6.1: Reasons to Outline
Outlining is an important first step in speech-making; it allows you to ensure your speech flows smoothly and covers all your main points.
Learning Objective
Justify out the reasons to outline prior to writing a speech or presentation
Key Points
An outline helps you group ideas into main points and see their logical connections.
It is important to create an outline before you deliver your speech, as it will act as your guide to effectively sequence your information and ensure you touch on all your main points.
Outlining allows you to ensure your speech flows smoothly.
Use an outline as a tool for delivery of extemporaneous speaking.
Key Term
outline
A list used to present the main points or topics of a given subject, often used as a rough draft or summary of the content of a document.
Reasons to Outline
There are many reasons to create an outline; but in general, it may be helpful to create an outline when you want to show the hierarchical relationship or logical ordering of information. Many people find that organizing a speech or presentation in outline form helps them speak more effectively in front of a crowd.
Below are the primary reasons for creating an outline.
Why Make an Outline?
Creating an outline can help you organize your ideas.
A picture of an outline made out of Post-it notes. The notes are stuck on a wall.
Purpose
An outline helps guide you as you prepare your speech as follows:
Helps you organize your ideas;
Presents your material in a logical form;
Shows the relationships among ideas in your writing;
Constructs an ordered overview of your speech;
Groups ideas into main points.
When you clearly outline exactly what points you would like to convey in each section of your speech, it will be much easier to envision. You can ensure you do not skip anything crucial and that your speech follows a logical sequence and order of information.
Organization
Your outline should consist of the three main parts of your speech: the introduction, the body, and the conclusion. Within each of these sections, you’ll need to plan more specifically what you would like to say. You can list your hook in the introduction, identify three or so main points to touch on in the body of your speech, and clearly lay out how you will end your speech and what thoughts you will leave your audience with in your conclusion.
It is important to keep in mind that your outline is only a guide. The purpose of it is to aid you in delivering a clear speech that flows smoothly and effectively, communicating all your ideas. An outline is not a script of your speech with the exact text you want to say, nor is it a rigid structure that you must follow exactly when giving your speech.
Think of your outline as a skeleton — a tool for delivery of extemporaneous speaking. It will serve as the backbone of your speech, providing you with a solid structure on which to build. However, it is your job to then to it flesh out and enrich it. Use your creative flare to make the bare bones more appealing and accessible to your audience.
10.6.2: The Preparation Outline
As its name suggests, a preparation outline helps you lay out the main topics and sub-points of your speech.
Learning Objective
Describe the purpose of a preparation outline, and the different preparation outline styles used by speech writers
Key Points
The types of preparation outlines for speeches vary, however, it is up to the presenter to choose the format that best fits the content and personal style of the presentation.
Common outline styles include sentence outlines, topics outlines, chronological outlines, and alphanumeric outlines.
Similar to any traditional outlines, preparation outlines include a speech title, introduction, body, conclusion, and supporting references or sources.
Key Term
prepare
to make ready for a specific future purpose; to set up; to assemble.
The Preparation Outline
A preparation outline is a precursor to your speech outline. As its name suggests, a preparation outline helps you prepare your speech. Presentations that require significant research, visual aids, or other type of content outside of speech rehearsal usually require organization and preparation in the form of an outline.
An outline is a list of items organized according to a consistent principle. Each item may be divided into additional sub-items or sub-points. A preparation outline consists of three main sections, which includes the introduction, body, and conclusion. It also includes the title of the speech.
Preparation Outline
Some word processing programs have pre-made outline templates that will make outlining your speech even easier.
A photo of a woman’s hands on a computer keyboard.
Outline Approach
The types of preparation outlines for speeches vary. However, it is up to you to evaluate the style most appropriate for the speech, as well as the best form to assist you.
Common outline styles include sentence outlines, topics outlines, chronological outlines, and alphanumeric outlines. While sentence outlines follow a hierarchical structure composed of sentences and headings around the subject of the speech, topics outlines are comprised of topics and subtopics. Alphanumeric outlines include a prefix in the form of a roman numeral at the top level, upper-case letters for the next level, arabic numerals for the third level, and lowercase letter for the final level.
Outline Structure
If, for example, you have separate visual aids for the introduction, main points in the body of your speech, and your conclusion, than using a sentence style for your preparation outline may be more appropriate. Your preparation outline will start with the introduction, along with a list of the points you would like to cover before launching into the body of your speech. This may include a preview of the main topic, an attention-grabbing quote or statistic to support the main argument of your presentation.
The body of your speech will contain the details and descriptors to support the main point, topic, or argument of the speech. Here you will state each of the main points or topics you covered in your introduction, followed by supporting facts and details. Sub-topics should be added underneath each main topic covered in the body of the preparation outline
No matter what type of speech you are giving, every preparation outline should have a conclusion. The conclusion allows you to re-state and emphasize your main topic or argument (mentioned in the introduction) in a summary or list of key points. Moreover, you should identify how you will end your speech for the audience. Additional items you can add to the preparation outline include references or a “works cited” list including sources you have used to prepare your speech.
Remember, an outline is simply your guide. While there are traditional and non-traditional ways of outlining, do not get caught up worrying about “right and wrong” ways to outline. However, a standard preparation outline can serve as a helpful aid for a well-prepared and organized presentation.
10.6.3: The Speaking Outline
Speaking outlines help presenters with the timing, pacing, and overall delivery of the speech.
Learning Objective
Construct a speaking outline that includes an introduction, body, and conclusion
Key Points
The speaking outline covers the main points and aids the speaker’s memory on certain topics.
Speaking outlines generally include an introduction, body, conclusion, and transitions.
To successfully deliver an outlined speech, it helps for presenters to be subject matter experts, or at least sufficiently knowledgeable about the topic.
Key Term
transition
The process of change from one form, state, style, or place to another.
The Speaking Outline
After putting together a rough draft outline (i.e., the “skeleton” of the speech), writers can then progress to the speaking outline. Speaking outlines fill out additional details about the speech, as well as where the speaker plans to mention short phrases, pause, and transition to other topics. This outline may also include where the speaker would like to ask questions or use visual aids such as flip charts and handouts. The speaking outline acts a guide for the speaker on how to time and pace the delivery of the speech .
Using a Speaking Outline
Even experienced speakers use speaking outlines to aid them during presentations.
A man holds a microphone and looks at a piece of paper while giving a speech.
The Role of the Speaking Outline
Unlike the rough draft outline, which includes short notes on structure, the speaking outline covers both the main points and aids the speaker’s memory on certain topics. It offers the speaker more flexibility on tailoring the speech to the audience’s needs and reactions . Speaking outlines can be used to prepare and rehearse speeches, as well as serve as memory aids during the presentation.
Parts of a Speaking Outline
While speaking outlines include an introduction, body, and conclusion, they also note where transitions take place and when vital key points or statistics should be mentioned during the presentation. The structure of the speaking outline will likely vary slightly depending on the subject, timing, and audience. For example, notes may be added on when to introduce visual aids during the presentation. Nevertheless, a basic speaking outline generally includes:
An introduction – This includes notes on whether the speaker starts with a quote, statistics, personal story, or humorous joke. It leads into the overview of the speech, previews the main topics, and captures the attention of the audience.
A first transition – The first transition should be as smooth as possible, and be placed after the introduction and before the body of the speech.
A body – The body lists the main points, sub-points, and supporting evidence. Each sub-point in the outline should have a supporting bullet.
Second transition – The second transition comes after the body and before the conclusion.
Conclusion – This includes a bullet on signaling the end of the speech, a bullet on restating the objectives or main argument, and a bullet that reviews the main topics discussed in the body. The speaker may also add a note to say a memorable statement or call-to-action (e.g., thank the audience, etc.).
To successfully deliver an outlined speech, presenters are usually subject matter experts, or at least sufficiently knowledgeable about the topic. But even for experienced speakers and speech writers, a speaking outline organizes thoughts, uncovers transitions, and reminds speakers to elaborate on key ideas.
10.6.4: The Rough Draft Outline
Rough draft outlines serve as a precursor to the speech’s rough draft and help organize the speakers’ ideas into a cohesive topic.
Learning Objective
Describe the role and different components of a rough draft outline
Key Points
Rough draft outlines help form the skeleton of the speaker’s speech and provide a pattern from which the speaker writes his or her main statement, argument, and supporting points.
Prior to starting the rough draft outline, some research should be completed.
Similar to traditional outlines, rough draft outlines should include notes on the introduction, body, and conclusion.
Rough draft outlines ultimately change as the speechwriter conducts additional research and continues to shape his or her speech topic.
Key Terms
draft
A preliminary sketch; rough outline.
outline
A list used to present the main points or topics of a given subject, often used as a rough draft or summary of the content of a document.
writer’s block
The inability to begin or continue work on a piece of writing; normally temporary.
The Rough Draft Outline
Rough drafts outlines are part of the development process of speeches, crafting the flow and style of speakers’ presentations into a substantive and complete product. Creating rough draft outlines—i.e., an outline that serves as a precursor to the speech’s rough draft—often helps organize and structure speakers’ ideas into a cohesive and definitive topic. Rough draft outlines are not always necessary and may even be viewed as redundant. However, they can help speech writers prepare and organize their ideas during the pre-writing stage .
Rough Draft Outline
Preparing a rough draft outline is just one step to creating an informative and well-prepared speech.
A picture of a typed page from a speech.
Benefits of Rough Draft Outlines
Outlines help form the skeleton of the speaker’s speech. They provide a pattern from which the speaker writes his or her main statement, argument, and supporting points. The rough draft outline is particularly valuable at the pre-writing stage and provides the writer flexibility for revisions to the structure of the speech. Ultimately, rough outlines help organize the speech writer’s initial thoughts into a comprehensive process that flows into a rough draft and eventually a final speech.
Starting the Rough Draft Outline
One of the most useful techniques for starting a rough draft outline is brainstorming. Similar to freewriting, brainstorming jumpstarts the creative process by letting the speechwriter’s ideas flow and connect together around a specific topic. It also serves as a tool for overcoming writer’s block.
Prior to starting the rough draft outline, some research should be completed. Ideally, the writer has also finalized the main topics he or she will be discussing during the speech.
The Components of a Rough Draft Outline
The parts that comprise a rough draft outline are similar to other types of writing outlines. They include:
An Introduction: This part of the draft outline should include an intro topic sentence, as well as notes on the argument or point of view of the speech.
A Body: The body of the speech’s argument should include one or more main points. Each main point is supported by sub-points, which highlight factual evidence relating back to the main argument, or dismiss opposing arguments.
A Conclusion: The speaker should note how they will restate his or her point of view and summarize the argument.
Your rough draft outline is essentially a technique for organizing and jotting down ideas into a traditional outline format. Because this is the rough draft outline, the outline too will ultimately change as the speechwriter conducts additional research and continues to shape his or her speech topic.